Home

uk

1. AT TM z Ec ce lefe 4 SHAA T amp a TEL ROSIN ZAT I gt 92 102 e T D gt L H as th Cho gt gt 21 Ys Q l Qemal i ANa An O o D lt Palm T X Handheld CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Writing a Graffiti 2 ShortCut Graffiti 2 contains several ShortCuts to make entering common information easier For example when you write the ShortCut stroke followed by dts you automatically enter the current date and time You can also create your own ShortCuts 1 Write the ShortCut stroke RQ Perey dMi has gt This stroke appears at the insertion point 2 Write the ShortCut character from the following table You can write ShortCuts on the left side of the input area or across the middle 4 Done The ShortCut stroke is replaced by the text the character represents Palm T X Handheld 62 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Write ShortCuts on LEFT side or across MIDDLE of input area Entry ShortCut Entry ShortCut Date stamp ds Time stamp ts Date time stamp dts Meeting me Breakfast br Lunch lu Dinner di Palm T X Handheld 63 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Using the onscreen keyboard Entry A piece of You can use the onscreen keyboard in any application where you need to ente
2. Display Name Enter the name you Display Name Wayne Hofi want to appear on email messages face Password User Name Enter the username Sic eens roenan con you use to access email for this F Incoming Server account Incoming Server mail cruz com Mail Server Protocol POP Port Number 110 Password Enter your email I This server requires a secure connection SSL account password I Use APOP E mail Enter the email address for this account Incoming Server Enter the address of your incoming mail server Mail Server Protocol Select the protocol for this account Y Continued 322 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Do not check the Secure connection box if the VersaMail application displays Direct POP or Direct IMAP connection to server in the Desktop Connection field If you check the box you cannot receive incoming messages correctly To use SSL with your account set up the account on your handheld and check the Use Secure Connection box on the appropriate screen Palm T X Handheld Cont d Port Number By default the port number setting is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection see the next item Secure connection SSL To retrieve incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection check the box The
3. d You Know b Select Options and then select Preferences The default Timeout setting is 45 seconds c Select Connection It can be any number greater than 0 seconds however if you set the 2 Select any of the following Connection number too low your preferences Timeout 45 Seconds connection attempt may O Auto disconnect time out before you make Timeout Sets the number of O Disconnect on Exit a connection with the seconds to try to connect before Modem wait Seconds email service provider timing out To change the timeout period select the Timeout field and enter a new value Auto disconnect Automatically disconnects your remote connections after each command Each command you perform initiates a new call to your ISP This setting is not recommended if you plan to perform multiple email transactions in a short amount of time Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 386 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Palm T X Handheld Cont d Disconnect on Exit Disconnects from the network only after you leave VersaMail This feature is an alternative to Auto disconnect This option keeps your connection active while you perform multiple transactions in the Versa Mail application but automatically disconnects when you move on to a different application on your handheld If this option is not selected you must manually disconnect from your ISP Modem wait Displays the number of seconds that the modem takes t
4. Make Default Cancel 0x Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place your handheld or computer is updated in the other during synchronization Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your computer is updated on your handheld during synchronization If information has been changed on your handheld it will be replaced by the information from your computer and you will lose the changes you made on your handheld Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your handheld is updated on your computer during synchronization If information has been changed on your computer it will be replaced by the information from your handheld and you will lose the changes you made on your computer Do Nothing No synchronization occurs so any changes made on either your handheld or your computer are not updated in the other location Y Continued 109 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 To use the option you select on an ongoing basis click Make Default If you do not check this box the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize Thereafter information is updated according to the default setting Synchronize the files 4 Click OK and then close the Conduit Settings window 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 110 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Installing applications to your handhe
5. 2 ccsseeeseeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeess 351 Attaching a personal signature sssssssssssssssssssssesssennsnnnnnnnesnnerennennnnnnn 352 Send OU sesecssacesadcaecseseaecessiseetetecusesaeedctaueduaddeagessted iaee ei aderi enetan 353 Send retry notifications ccissss cccsisssscevstesscceseseseasceeevsseenceeevsbenceevesseends 353 Modifying messages in the OutboX cccceeeesteeeeeeesneeeeeeeeseeeeeseeea 354 Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications c ccceeeessteeeeeeesneees 354 Working with email foldErS sssrinds snaar 355 Viewing another folder ssssissceccaedesccieauenseceideentaeceeccesapeeudavessecoeuanees eens 355 Customizing the appearance of the message list ansasen 356 Moving messages between folders ssssssssssssrnssrrinnusrnnnnnnnnnnnnnurnnnn 358 Creating and editing a mail folder sssssssssrissesnreneeerresrrennenennnnns 360 Working with email MESSAGES sreiiirnsi anaana 361 Forwarding an email MESSAGE ceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeneenenaeeeaaees 361 Replying to an email message eeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeneeaes 362 Setting reply Preference cececceeeeseseceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeseeeaneeesssaaes 363 Working with URLs email addresses and phone numbers WMA message sg thccuecencacecvvasnatatasvec E a 365 Deleting a MESSAGE aiiin ainiai a osaid 365 Deleting old MESSAGES isione aani aiia 366 Emptying the trash sses nooiens oinaan 368 Setting the trash to be emptied automatically
6. Benefits of the web browser e Carry the web with you Setting advanced browser e View web pages in handheld friendly options format Related topics e Store pages for offline viewing Palm T X Handheld 420 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Before You Begin Accessing a web page To browse the web you must set up a connection to the Internet from your handheld using Wi Fi You can open web pages navigate the pages and do the same things you can do with a desktop browser or Bluetooth wireless Accessing a web page using the action bar technology If you are accessing a VPN network you need to 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp install VPN software and set up VPN access You can turn on VPN from the web browser by opening the Options menu and Go to the web page you want to view a Select Go to Web Page selecting Connect VPN gt 0 OOH G Ge Go to Web Page i 2 Email FA 3 Downloads 4 Sports URL Stands for uniform 5 Weather 6 Finance 7 Travel 8 Directories resource locator the 9 Portals 0 More technical name for a web f address For example Click below for palmOne news the URL for Palm is products and customer support e palmOne com Wireless Edition v http Awww palm com b Enter the address of the web page you want to visit Use the buttons in the Go to Web Page dialog box for quick entry of characters commonly used in web address
7. To set up a corporate email account you need certain information Check with your company s server administrator to obtain the following Username and password This might be your Windows username and password your Lotus Notes ID username and password or something else Protocol Most corporate mail servers use the IMAP protocol for retrieving mail In rare cases your company server may use the POP protocol Ry NOTE Some corporate mail servers do not use either protocol In this case you cannot send and receive email wirelessly using the VersaMail application You can however synchronize email on your handheld with email in Outlook or Lotus Notes on your computer Windows only Incoming and outgoing mail server settings Check with your company s server administrator to obtain these settings NOTE lf your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 you may be able to set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your handheld For more information see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Palm T X Handheld 308 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages VPNs If you want to access email on your handheld using your corporate email account you may need to set up a virtual private network VPN on your handheld A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate mail server through the company s firewall security layer Without a VPN you cannot pass through the firewall to gain a
8. Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 525 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Palm T X Handheld 4 amp OPTIONAL Select each setting you want to change Name Enter the name of the Edit Location ea location Time Zone Select the time zone for the location M This location observes Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time box Check for your handheld to automatically adjust the date and time for Daylight Saving Time in this location Start End Start and End dates Select the boxes to change the start and end dates of Daylight Saving Time if necessary Select OK and then select Done 4 Done 526 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Deleting a location 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Select the location you want Edit List to delete a Select a location pick list b Select Edit List c Select a location and then select Remove 3 Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 527 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Setting the alarm clock Use World Clock to set an alarm within the next 24 hours Set alarms outside 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O of this time frame in Calendar 2 Set the alarm Remember to put your handheld on local time a Select the Alarm box If you travel from San Francisco to London b Select the time columns to set the hour and minute and then select OK make London your primary location s
9. Tap Media Draw on a photo a Open the menus Draw on the photo using the in the input area Draw on Picture In the Thumbnail or List View select the photo you want Select Draw on Picture from the Media menu Text tool Drawing tool Color button following tools Drawing tool Draw anywhere on the photo using the stylus Text tool Enter text in the field Tap anywhere on the screen to open a text field in a new location Color button Select a drawing color e Select Done Ny Continued 206 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer 3 Select one of the following to save or reject changes Save New Picture You have drawn on this picture What do you want to do with the changes Replace Original Replace Original Saves the photo with the drawing in place of the original photo with no drawing the original photo is lost Save as New Picture Saves both the photo with the drawing and the original photo with no drawing You can enter a name for the new photo You can also select the pick list to save the updated photo to a different album Don t Save Changes Saves only the original photo with no drawing Cancel Returns to the Draw on Photo screen 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 207 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Copy an entire album by opening the Album menu selecting Album and then selecting Copy Album to Card or Copy Album to Handheld Se
10. and you must complete 1 all the prerequisites for the email and messaging Press Contacts 2 applications 2 To use Tap to Connect Enable Tap to Connect with your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology you must set up a phone a From the Contacts list open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences connection To use it with c Select Enable Tap to Connect and then select OK your handheld s IR port run Phone Link Updater Ny Continued and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection Palm T X Handheld 145 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Palm T X Handheld 3 Make a connection with Tap to Connect a Select the contact you want Work 555 234 1939 obile 555 234 9191 mail tsailee example com Lee Tsai W Select to Connecting edit b Select the entry you want to use to connect For example to dial a phone number select the number you want to dial To address an email message select an email address c Select the entry to edit it if necessary For example you might need to add an area code or country code to a phone number 4 Done 146 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip Working with Contacts on your computer Windows If you chose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook check out the online Help in Use Contacts on your computer to view and manage the contacts you create on your handheld
11. cceecesseeeeeeeteeeeseeaaeeeesseneaeeeesenaaes 443 Allowing websites to remember personal information 445 Clearing Cookies and cache Memory cececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeeeeeeees 446 Setting preferences for USING a proxy Server ceccceeeesessteeeeeeeeenees 448 Setting the JavaScript preference cccccecccssseeeeeseseseeeseeenreeessennaes 450 Related TOPICS tacacsecuscaccavecavataeagees ehtneneaaterttnavestagdessesaentanstaasaszeaneeh actdernaaveats 451 Palm T X Handheld xiii Chapter 19 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld 452 Dialing GUMBO siccsssaivsanssedevecesssceenestne laqesnesncechassssinauacentelodeucastesveedaasecdce 453 Entering MUNMDEN sasare taiigan aiia sateaeteenntezagnsatteces 453 Redialing the most recently used number nsssssssssssrsrrrrssrsssssrees 454 Dialing a number from the Call History List ccccceeceeseeereeees 455 USING sp sd diall siisii strpna aa arada Nada 456 Adding a speed dial Entry 0 cccccceeceeeeeseeceeaeeeeeeeceeeeeeseennenneaeeeeaaeees 456 Dialing a number using speed dial ceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaaes 457 Editing a Speed diall entry ss siisicesscsceccsssasdnccsssentanetetectecceasseandzcnssseeaus 458 Related tO DIOS iccsiiins adecctedadeuvaiad ainaani aiaa 459 Chapter 20 Sharing Information eee 460 Using the Send command csscccccessteeeeeesenneeesesenaeeeeeeeenaeeeessenaneeeseeeaaes 461 Sending information
12. 657 entering information from 112 marking completed tasks and 241 synchronizing with 10 106 112 613 614 Outlook requirements for 125 Overdue task icon 172 overdue tasks 171 180 240 245 overlapping events 178 overwriting information 107 109 owner information 558 Owner Preferences screen 558 P page icons web browser 432 Page Info command 424 pager 134 Palm Desktop Installer icon 7 Palm Desktop software completing repeated tasks and 241 creating user profiles from 12 13 described 2 27 entering information in 112 114 116 importing information to 117 119 installing 3 7 online help for 113 opening applications from 113 115 requiring password entry for 494 restoring archived items to 127 synchronizing with 10 112 160 613 system requirements for 2 time zones and 618 troubleshooting 604 uninstalling 125 updating information in 73 T X Handheld upgrading handhelds and 7 Palm Dialer software See Dialer application Palm OS applications 34 Palm OS handhelds exchanging records with 461 sharing notes with 263 upgrading from 4 Palm technical support 17 71 palmOne Quick Install software 73 paper clip icon 372 partnership 290 parts handheld 2 passkeys 92 292 298 300 621 passphrases encryption 273 Password check box 326 399 passwords Bluetooth 292 294 Bluetooth devices and 92 changing 494 creating 492 493 498 deleting 497 displaying web pages and 423 email accounts and 308 encry
13. CHAPTER 29 Common Questions My vCard or vCal email attachment isn t forwarding correctly WINDOWS ONLY Palm Desktop software provides several features that work with email client software on a Windows computer For these features to work correctly the email client software must be properly set up Follow these steps to check the settings 1 Click Start on your computer and then select Settings 2 Select Control Panel 3 Select Internet Options and then click the Programs tab 4 Make sure that the email field is set to the correct email client software 5 Click OK 6 Start the email client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client Consult the documentation for your desktop email application for more information Privacy I ve made records private but can t remember my password to display them First use the password hint to try to remember the password If this doesn t help or if you do not have a password hint you can use Security Preferences to delete the password but your handheld deletes all entries marked as private However if you synchronize before you delete the password the synchronization process backs up all entries whether or not they are marked private Then you can follow these steps to restore your private entries 1 In Security Preferences tap in the password box and enter a guess at the password 2 In the dialog box that appears select Lost Password Palm
14. In Day View and Month View you can set the Display Options to show the category list so that you can view all your events or just the events for a single color code Palm T X Handheld 1 2 3 y Done Press Calendar O Enter the event you want to color code Select the category marker next to the description and then select a category from the list Aug 31 06 KIBUG0 GEC Launch celebration _ 8 00 9 00 10 00 11 00 12 00 1 00 2 00 Category marker Aug 31 06 KIBUG0 GEC o Betis 8 0C o Holiday 9 0C o Personal 10 0C o Unfiled 11 00 12 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 4 00 5 00 In Agenda View and Day View the category marker next to the event is color coded In Week View and Month View the symbol for the event is color coded 164 CHAPTER 7 DUETE L DITTE OFT ELA Setting an alarm You can customize your alarm settings in the Calendar Preferences dialog box Press Calendar If you set your alarms in 2 Enter the event you want to assign an alarm to and then select the event World Clock instead of description Calendar you have different alarm sound choices Keep in mind 3 dened l that since World Clock SEME Alarm larms aren t tied t Time sala osha vee i a Select Details Date specific event you won t d ibti Alarm 5 Minutes see an event description b Check the Alarm box Location when a World Clock alarm le ategory Un
15. Palm T X Handheld Rename Custom Fields To rename any custom field below enter a new name Spouse Name Custom 5 Fay Color Custom 6 Hobbyl 135 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Selecting a contact as your business card You can create a contact with your own information and select it as your business card by opening the Record Menu and selecting Business Card You can then beam or _ send your business card to other handhelds To beam your business card quickly press and hold the Contacts application button for approximately two seconds 1 Press Contacts 2 2 Create a business card a Select the contact you want or create a new contact with your own contact information b Open the menus c Select Business Card on the Record menu 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 136 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts id You Knov Copying contact information into multiple contacts If you duplicate a contact and do not edit the name You can quickly make a copy of a contact so that you can edit only the fields you need to change For example if two of your contacts have the same work address or phone number duplicating the contact appearsinthe 4 panon y er Saa the first contact simplifies entering information in the second Contacts list as lt Last name gt lt First name gt Copy 1 Tap Press Contacts a 2 Duplicate a contact a Select the contact you want and then select Edit b Open the menu
16. Palm T X Handheld Copyright and Trademark 2005 Palm Inc All rights reserved Palm Addit Blazer Graffiti HotSync Palm Powered Palm OS the Palm logo and VersaMail are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by or licensed to Palm Inc All other brand and product names are or may be trademarks of and are used to identify products or services of their respective owners This product contains ACCESS Co Ltd s NetFront 3 0 Internet browser software Copyright 1996 2003 ACCESS Co Ltd and ACCESS Systems America Inc NetFront is the trademark or registered trademark of ACCESS Co Ltd in Japan and in other countries except the United States of America NetFront is a registered trademark of NetFront Communications Inc in the United States of America and is used under a license A portion of this software includes software modules developed by the Independent JPEG Group RealNetworks is the owner of all right title and interest in the RealNetworks Marks and RealNetworks logos No person or entity may reproduce or use or authorize the reproduction or use of the RealNetworks Marks or RealNetworks logos in any manner other than expressly authorized by RealNetworks Unauthorized use of RealNetworks Marks or RealNetworks logos is strictly prohibited Adobe and Adobe Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and or other countries Documents To Go is a tradema
17. by selecting the appropriate option 5 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 430 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Arranging the bookmark list The web browser includes ten pages so that you can arrange bookmarks and saved pages in a logical fashion For example you can store travel links on one page stock links on another and business links on a third page 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box a Select the Bookmark icon E b Open the menus c Select Edit Bookmarks in the Bookmarks menu Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 431 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web 3 Palm T X Handheld Arrange the bookmarks a Use the stylus to drag and drop bookmarks into different slots on the current page to organize them Move a bookmark to a different page by dragging and dropping it onto the Page icon Ten page icons at the bottom of the dialog box represent the pages on each of which you can add ten bookmarks Select OK 4 Done Edit Bookmark List Title Bookmarks sC 7L sC 9L 100 432 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web ik Downloading files and pages It you decide that me You can download files or save files for viewing when you are not connected to the Internet download process is taking too long you can stop it To stop a web Downloading a file page from downloading select the Stop icon in the action bar To stop a file 1 Go to Favo
18. ceeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesesseneeess 269 Accessing email and the web with Wi Fi technology 0ceee 276 Setting up a device to device Wi Fi network eeeeeeeeeeeeseereeeeeeeeeeeeees 277 Conserving battery power when using Wi Fi technology 0 283 Selecting Wi Fi power saving settings ccccccesessseeeeeseseneeeeeseaaes 283 Related topiCS sccaccacvsaancavess saaaeadces entnentess aaea Ra 285 Chapter 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections 286 What can do with the built in Bluetooth wireless technology 287 What types of connections can Make sssssessssssssssrrsssesrnsssrrerresees 287 What is device discovery e sessssssssssrerssserrnsstttrnessttnnnnntnnn nennen n ennet 288 Entering basic Bluetooth settings c cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 289 Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection cccccceeseeeteeeeeseetteeeeeeseeeees 290 Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth wireless technology 295 Setting up a connection to a Bluetooth network ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 297 Creating partnership with other devices ccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeeeeeeees 299 Setting advanced Bluetooth features cccsssecseccsssseeeeeesseeeeeeessseneeeess 302 Storing recently found device NAMES ceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesseneaeeeesennaes 302 Allowing your handheld to wake up when it is turned off 303 Related tODIGS corssier a aa a Aa daaa
19. 235 259 528 specifying duration of 183 turning off 529 albums arranging photos in 203 205 creating 201 moving photos in 203 moving photos to other 204 moving videos in 203 scrolling through 199 alert options 339 alerts 5 32 See also alarms reminders Auto Sync notifications and 338 340 icon on status bar 29 text messages and 414 Alerts screen 339 aligning the screen 556 All category 513 Allow wakeup command 303 alphabet Graffiti 2 writing 54 alternate stroke shapes 552 anniversaries 152 154 annual events 154 T X Handheld annual tasks 237 239 application buttons See quick buttons application buttons location of 20 application controls 34 application files 75 76 application groups 515 518 application icons 536 609 application title 42 applications See also specific built in application accessing 609 adding 111 120 adding contact information to 138 148 adding files for 73 assigning to buttons 543 beaming 468 469 categorizing 512 517 categorizing information in 515 checking version numbers for 122 123 copying 111 469 593 creating plug in 579 customizing 108 deleting 124 594 displaying 518 536 displaying categories in 518 displaying information about 17 122 downloading files to 433 exchanging 595 finding information in 44 importing information from external 117 incompatible 628 installation prerequisites for 122 installing 23 73 111 589 marking private entries in 490 moving arou
20. AT amp T WorldNet User Name username worldnet Details Connection type PPP Idle timeout 1 Minute Query DNS IP Address M Automatic 573 CHAPTER 26 Key lerm DNS Domain name system The Internet uses this system to translate the names of host computers into IP addresses A DNS number identifies the server that handles the translation Each IP address has four numbers from 0 to 255 that are separated by periods Key Term IP Internet protocol Everyone who logs in to the Internet needs a unique identifier an IP address Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP address upon login while others assign a permanent IP address Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Adjust any of the following settings N NOTE Ask your ISP or system administrator if you need information on any of these settings Connection type Select the pick list and choose the communication protocol for this service PPP SLIP or CSLIP Most email applications use the PPP or SLIP protocols Idle timeout Select the pick list and select how long your handheld waits before dropping the connection with your ISP or dial in server when you switch out of an application that requires a connection 1 Minute 2 Minutes 3 Minutes or Never Query DNS Check the Query DNS box if you re not sure whether you need to enter DNS addresses Many systems do not require that you enter DNS addresses If you do need DNS addr
21. CHAPTER 24 Using Categories to Organize Information To place an entry in a 5 Place the entry in a category different category simply select a different category a Select a category from the Category pick list from the Category pick list Category Contact Edit Unfiled First name Lee Contact Details Show in List v Work Category Private QuickList Unfiled Cancel Edit Categories b If necessary select OK c If necessary select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 516 CHAPTER 24 Using Categories to Organize Information Placing an application in a category 1 Go to Applications 2 Open the Category dialog box a Open the menus b Select Category in the App menu 3 Place the application in a category Category Quick Tour vV Main a Select the pick list next to the Aidit v ria alc Y Main application you want to place Calendar in a category Card Info Contacts Dialer b Select a category and then Documents Expense select Done Favorites 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 517 CHAPTER 24 Using Categories to Organize Information Viewing information by category In Applications View scroll through the categories by pressing Right or Left on the 5 way navigator To view all of the applications on your handheld select the All category Scroll through the categories in Contacts by repeatedly pressing the Contacts button Palm T X Handheld 1 Do one
22. Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Contacts on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics Outlook to learn how to e Viewing copying and deleting contacts use Contacts on your computer e Editing contact details e Marking contacts private e Showing masking and hiding private contacts Printing contacts Changing between the list contact info and Contact Edit views e Adding notes to a contact Adding a date and time stamp to a contact Organizing contacts into categories e Sharing contacts WINDOWS ONLY To open Contacts on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Contacts on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Contacts on your computer launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder and then click Addresses Palm T X Handheld 147 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts e Support If you re having problems with Contacts or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Moving Around Categories Entering Information Privacy Sharing VersaMail SMS e Opening applications e Using menus e Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Organizing contacts by type and sorting them Transferring contact information from other applications such as dat
23. Check with your email service provider for authentication username and password information Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Adding ESMTP to an account Some services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and password on an SMTP server If you aren t sure if your ISP or web email provider supports ESMTP check with your email provider 1 Select the account to which you want to add ESMTP a Open the menus b Select Accounts and then select Account Setup c Select the name of the account and then select Edit 2 The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an account Go through the screens by selecting Next When setup is completed select Advanced Y Continued Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit Yahoo Work Email Work Account Basic setup for your mail account is completed To exit select Done For additional settings select Advanced 333 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages To get and view 3 Set the ESMTP options messages for a different P Sta t nthe Outgoing Server Settings account Ope a Click Next Port Number 25 Accounts menu and O Use Secure Connection SSL select the account you b Check the Use Authentication W Use authentication ESMTP want Select the folders box on the advanced Username pick list in the upper r
24. Creating a user profile Save time by importing to WINDOWS ONLY quickly add information to a profile 1 Open the New Profile screen a Open Palm Desktop software b From the Tools menu select Users c Click Profiles and then click New Profiles X Select a profile OK New Profile X new Enter a new profile name Cae I Rename cance Users Help 2 Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK twice Select the profile from the User OOO Tock Supper ioe list and create the info in Palm Desktop software for the profile 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 12 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY 1 Open the New Profile screen a Open Palm Desktop software b From the User pop up menu select Edit Users c Click New Profile e0e8e Users ala alae New User New Profile Edit Delete Kind amp Christopher Tracy user amp mbronte user Enter name for new profile l Cancel OK 2 Create the profile a Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK b Close the Users window Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 13 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 Select the profile from the User pop up menu and create the info in Palm Desktop software for the profile 4 Set the profile s conduit settings a From the HotSync
25. Open the General Preferences Preferences e dialog box Page General Advanced M Auto complete a Open the menus W Disable cookies Disable Javascript b Select Options and then Tap and Drag Selects Text select Preferences Normal mode c Select General tab Check or uncheck the Auto Complete box to enable or disable autofill Select OK 4 Done 442 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Setting tap and drag behavior When you are in a web page you can select how you want the browser to behave when you tap and drag the stylus 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the General Preferences Bratcrences 77 dialog box ease Generat Advanced M Auto complete a Open the menus LM Disable cookies Disable Javascript Tap and Drag Selects Text b Select Options and then select Preferences Normal mode c Select General tab Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 443 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web 3 Select the Tap and Drag pick list and select an option Select Text Tap where you want to begin selecting text and drag the stylus to the end of the selection Scrolls page Tap and hold the web page and move the stylus in the direction you want to move the page 4 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 444 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Allowing websites to remember personal information By default your handheld saves the cookies it receives If you want more privacy you can te
26. Open the menus b Select Archive on the Message menu 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 415 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Editing a draft text message You can store your message in your Draft folder and work on it later by opening the Message menu and selecting Draft Palm T X Handheld Go to Applications and select SMS B Edit the message a Select Draft from the categories pick list b Select the message you want to edit c In the message view select Edit and edit your message Send or store the draft message Select Send Sends the current message now Selecting Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later Select Cancel Opens a dialog box that asks if you want to save the message in the Draft category Select Yes to keep your changes and return the message to the Draft category Select No to discard your changes and return the message to the Draft category 4 Done 416 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Setting advanced messaging features Go to Applications and select SMS 2 Go to the Preferences menu a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences 3 amp OPTIONAL Setthe following parameters Confirm Deleted Message Indicates whether a confirmation message appears each time you delete a message or you select the Empty Trash option from t
27. Select Details b Select Peer to Peer ad hoc from the Connect to pick list c Select the channel number from the Channel pick list Y Continued Network Details i Connect to w Peer to Peer ad hoc ET 6 Connect to an ad hoc network of wireless devices without using an access point Channel 11 default 264 CHAPTER 14 Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections 8 amp OPTIONAL Manually set your IP or DNS address a Select the IP Address or DNS Server pick list and then select Manual b Enter the IP address or DNS server information c If you want to use a preamble check the Use short preamble box d Select OK Advanced Network AdvancedNetwork IP Addvess EER IP Address 7 Manual Manual IP Address gee Subnet Mask _ Router DNS Server Automatic DNS Server Manual Preferred DNS _ Alternate DNS O Use short preamble O Use short preamble 9 Select OK three times and then select Done 4 Done You can now connect to the handheld any time you are within range 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections Conserving battery power when using Wi Fi technology The Wi Fi radio uses battery power that can shorten the length of time you can operate your handheld before you need to recharge The Wi Fi Preferences screen enables you to set power consumption options that can lower the strength of the radio signal and set a time interval of i
28. Selecting a line Tap three times anywhere in a line to select it This selects the final return character or space as well as any text Palm T X Handheld 68 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Tip Copying and pasting information There are even faster Copying and pasting information on your handheld is similar to editing with word processing ways to copy and paste applications on your computer information e Use Graffiti 2 gestures e Use the Graffiti 2 1 Select the information you want to copy Command stroke and the menu shortcut for cut copy or paste X C P 2 e Select the text write the command stroke and then tap the icon for cut or copy from the command toolbar that Copy the information a Open the menus b Select Edit and then select Copy appears 3 Tap where you want to paste the information 4 Select Edit and then select Paste 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 69 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Delete information with Graffiti 2 writing Select the information and then draw a line from right to left in the input area Palm T X Handheld Deleting information Delete all or part of an entry with the Cut command 1 Select the information you want to delete 2 Delete the information a Open the menus b Select Edit and then select Cut 4 Done 70 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Support Related top
29. T X Handheld Moving Around in Applications Using Applications View The Applications View lets you access all of the applications on your handheld except the wireless applications Wi Fi and Bluetooth which you access from the status bar and are available on any screen Use the category pick list in the upper right corner of the screen to view applications by category or to view all applications To access an item from Applications press Home D twice and select an icon Category pick list OO OO Home Switching between applications You can switch between applications at any time Just press Home A and select an icon from Favorites or Applications or press a quick button Your handheld automatically saves your work in the current application and switches to the other application 36 CHAPTER 3 lip In landscape view not only does screen orientation change but so does the orientation of the 5 way For example in right handed landscape view what was Up in portrait view becomes Right in landscape view Tip A few onscreen elements of your handheld can only be activated by tapping them with your stylus for example icons in the input area and on the status bar Palm T X Handheld Moving Around in Applications Using the 5 way navigator The 5 way navigator lets you access information quickly with one hand and without the stylus The 5 way does various things based on wh
30. Tap or use the 5 e Graffiti 2 writing way to move the cursor to the location you want In e The onscreen keyboard most cases if you do not see a blinking cursor you e Phone Lookup cannot enter information on that screen e Note Pad e An accessory keyboard sold separately NOTE You can also enter information on your computer and move and work with the information between your handheld and your computer Or you can send and receive information from other handhelds using beaming or your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology or Wi Fi capabilities Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing You can enter info directly on your handheld with Graffiti 2 writing Graffiti 2 writing includes any character you can type on a standard keyboard Entering these characters on your handheld is very similar to the way you naturally write letters numbers and symbols But instead of using a pen and paper you use the stylus and the input area on your handheld With only a few minutes of practice you can learn to use Graffiti 2 writing Writing in the input area You can write Graffiti 2 characters in the input area or you can turn on full screen writing and use the entire screen to enter characters Palm T X Handheld 48 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Tip Your handheld has two different layouts classic and wide for the input area that you can use to Select the top icon to e
31. Tip don t see anything on my handheld s screen When you purge or delete e Press an application button to ensure that your handheld is turned on items you are given the option to save an archive e If your handheld was exposed to cold make sure it is at room temperature copy on your computer the next time you synchronize e Charge your handheld e Perform a soft reset If your handheld still doesn t turn on perform a hard reset get a warning message telling me my handheld memory is full If you get a message saying that your handheld s memory is full go to Applications View open the menus and go to Info in the App menu Check the amount of memory that is available If there is less than 2MB of free space available try the following e If you have installed additional applications on your handheld remove them to recover memory e Purge items from Calendar and Tasks This deletes Tasks items and past Calendar events from the memory of your handheld e Delete unused memos photos and other items or save them to an expansion card If there is more than 2MB of free space available the problem may be caused by too many files Your handheld has a 1200 file limit that can be reached by storing a large number of small files on your handheld Try the following e Check the number of documents and other files you have stored on your handheld If there are a large number transfer some of the files to an exp
32. Wait a second to tap buttons or place the cursor so that the action is not interpreted as a period character Turn full screen writing on and off by tapping full screen writing on the status bar When full screen writing is on the icon turns from gray to white Write capital or uppercase letters in the middle A Untied Last name Kwan First name J Picture ji Company J Kwan Inc Write letters on the left side Write numbers on the right side Full screen writing Palm T X Handheld 50 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Learning Graffiti 2 writing i An as Graffiti 2 writing is a special set of letters numbers and symbols that you can use to write directly automatically capitalizes on the screen With only a few minutes of practice you can learn to use Graffiti 2 writing and the first letter of a help is always only a tap away sentence or a new entry Graffiti 2 writing Display the Graffiti 2 help 1 Go to Applications and select Quick Tour B screens at any time Just draw a single stroke from the bottom of the input 2 Select Using Your Handheld and then select Graffiti 2 Navigate through the area to the top of your screens to learn Graffiti 2 writing handheld s screen 4 Done Writing Graffiti 2 characters 1 Open an application you use to enter information like Calendar 2 Tap the screen where you want your character to appear 3 Position the stylus in the correct par
33. and then select Done 4 Select Done 4 Done Changing a password You can change your password at any time You must enter the current password before you can change it 1 Open Security Breierences TS Password A Password box a Go to Applications and then i Quick Unlock A select Prefs rey Anteleda b Select Security Private Records v Show Y Continued 494 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Palm T X Handheld 2 Enter your current password Carrent Password Enter current password a Select the Password box b Enter the current password and then select OK Change your password Naw Password Do you want to create a Select OK anew password now b Enter a new password and then select OK Confirm the password and enter a hint a Enter the password again and then select OK b Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it and then select Done Select Done 4 Done 495 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting a password You can delete your password at any time You must enter the current password before you Palm T X Handheld can delete it 1 Enter your password a Select the Password box b Enter the current password and then select OK Delete your password a Select Unassign b Select Done 4 Done Current Password Enter current password New Password i Do you want to create a new p
34. between your handheld and passkey For example to connect to your mobile phone you need to enter our phone the same passkey on your 7 i handheld and on your IMPORTANT You must enter phone Passkey is also the same passkey on your known as PIN number on handheld and your mobile phone some devices in order to connect to your phone We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits where possible to improve the security of your handheld The longer the passkey the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered b Select OK Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 292 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections 5 Do one of the following NetworkSerice Do you want to setup e Select Done and then select your handheld to Yes to begin network setup connect to the Internet and send Go to step 6 e mail e Select Done and then select No to use your phone connection only to dial phone numbers from your handheld or_send text messages You cannot use the phone connection to access the Internet or send email You are finished with setup 6 Select the pick list select Yes or No and then select Next Network Service Setup Do you subscribe to high speed data a If you select Yes go to step 7 service GPRS from your carrier b If you select No go to step 8 v Yes Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 293 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Contact your ISP if you
35. ccccceeeseeseeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeaaes 144 Using Tap tO CONMECE issevesssacedacest scezeccesstinanace Eiai 145 Working with Contacts on your COMPUTE eeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeteteaeeeeeees 147 Related TOPICS sicseisiee side ipera eane aea GcduYindudvavs deqebaacuadudvadisSaadeacuseteaay 148 Chapter 7 Managing Your Calendar cccscccseeseeeees 149 Scheduling AN EVENT ciiscsesccccsssasscesesesassccavestasecedceesssneddeweads eneiniad 150 Scheduling an appointment c cc cceceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeaeeeessenaas 150 Scheduling an event without a Start time ceeeecsseeeeeeseneeeeeeeeenees 152 Scheduling a repeating event standard interval c cccceeeeneees 154 Scheduling a repeating event unusual interval sessen 155 Scheduling an event that is longer than a day ccssceeeeesteeeeeeeees 157 Entering a location or a note for an event ceceeseeeeeeeeteeteteeeeeeeee 158 Scheduling an event with a time ZONE ccceeeeeeeenteeteeeeeneaeeeseeenaes 160 Palm T X Handheld vi Color codiing VOur SCHEGUIC wiis ss cescesssecsasisseccnenentsssapnacsvengeendssdeseteceaneee ta 161 Managing your COIOTCOUES iissccssasiiccis ssntddccenssteacseessbanccnnns senei cooten nests 162 Assigning a color code to an event eececeececceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeaeeaeaeeees 164 Setting AM alari ssccssvesdscccessasteedessanduecesdends sede sence cote sdaasdacden tual ited catecedssianas 165 RESCHEGUIING AN EVEN sira
36. computer The online Help includes info about the following topics e Adding editing and deleting expense items e Organizing your expenses by date type amount notes or category e Viewing expense items as a list large icons or small icons e Converting a list of expenses to a single currency e Printing expense reports e Transferring expense information to other applications such as Microsoft Excel using the Send or Export command in Palm Desktop software To open Expense on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Expense on the Launch bar Palm T X Handheld 481 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses Support Related topics If you re having problems with Expense or anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Click a link below to learn about these related topics Moving Around e Opening applications e Using menus Entering e Adding contacts to the attendees list with Lookup Information e Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and ShortCuts Calculator Performing basic math calculations associated with your expenses Categories e Creating and editing categories e Organizing expenses by type and sorting them Customizing Setting number formats Palm T X Handheld 482 CHAPTER 22 Performing Calculations Whether you re figuring the tip on a restaurant bill or balancing your checkbook it s always nice to have a calculator o
37. d Select OK and then select OK again 4 Done Scheduling a repeating task standard interval Repeating tasks are a great way to add tasks that happen over and over again like taking out the trash every Thursday night or making monthly mortgage or rent payments 1 Go to Favorites and select Tasks 6 2 Enter the task you want to repeat and assign it a due date Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 236 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks 3 Set the repeat interval Task Details ii i Priority N2 3 4 5 a Select the task description and Category v Personal then select Details Due Date i 1 6 06 Alarm J b Select the Repeat pick list and Repeat v Every week select how often the task Private O repeats Daily until Every week E Every other week Every month or Every year N NOTE Ifyou select Daily a dialog box appears for you to select the end date c Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 237 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Scheduling a repeating task unusual interval For tasks that don t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals you can set up your own repeat intervals For example enter tasks for paying a quarterly insurance bill or a credit card bill that is due every 28 days or changing your smoke detector battery every six months 1 Go to Favorites and select Tasks 6 2 Enter the task you want to repeat and assign it a due date Open the Change Repeat dialog box a Select Details
38. eee eeeeeeeeeee 120 Checking space and version NUMDEFS eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 122 REMOVING an applicationi ssiri iiianoe sasie an na 124 Removing an application from your handheld sses 124 Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer 125 Restoring archived items on your COMPUTED cee eee eeeeeeteeee 127 Related tOpiCS sssrinin onenn roana raa a rada ai 128 Chapter 6 Managing Your Contacts POE n 129 Adding AC OM CE 2c veasencecssntazatvnssdesdecnessus aa Eaa aa raaa 130 Entering additional contact information ssssesssssssssssssrsrnssesssesrerennns 133 Selecting a contact field type cesecceeceeseseeeeeeeeeseeneeeeseenneeeeeeseaaes 134 Defining a custom field sicccsissccecsssnesdacenaricecadeassseciacesisscquneedeeesdaansbsecce 135 Selecting a contact as your business card ssssssssssssrsrnrrnnsnnssne 136 Copying contact information into multiple contacts essees 137 LOCating a contact OM VOUF NSt sxsissavecnsacccsdesanateacsseaubadetesssegdnnnstd ataaabe suet 138 Deleting a CONLACE ssis sssccstses csceceenssangasassecscuttes anaiai iia 139 CUStOMIZING The Contacts iSt cs sssccsessstescsacsssccnsscsesancanancasansdanceshaaeeonna teenie 140 Making a connection froma CONTACT o 1 eee ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeenneeaes 142 Using Quick COMMGCE sis cccevsassccccessnscececetsus cetvetaesdcecetanadcecuvdaanscenvennes 142 Customizing Quick Connect SettingS
39. it is placed in the Trash folder 1 2 On a folder screen select the folders pick list and then select the folder that contains the message you want to delete Select the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want to delete To select adjacent messages drag the stylus across the bullet to the left of each message Lift the stylus and drag again to select additional adjacent messages Y Continued 365 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages TamEAN aleo serete 3 Delete the message or messages message icon next to a message and select a Open the menus Delete in the menu to delete a message b Select Delete in the Message menu Tip c Select Also delete message s on server if you want to delete the messages To delete messages on from the server now the server when you f empty the trash on your IMPORTANT If you delete a message from the server you cannot retrieve it handheld select the and view it again later Delete Msg on Server setting in VersaMail Preferences Many email 4 Done providers have size restrictions for mail storage If your mailbox on the server becomes full messages are returned to the senders d Select OK Deleting old messages 1 Open the Delete Old Messages dialog box a On a folder screen open the menus b Select Delete Old on the Message menu Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 366 CHAPTER 16 Messages you delete from a folder
40. list of bookmarks by selecting Bookmarks View from the Page 4 Dene menu OTSE P E Viewing a bookmarked or saved page like a bookmarked page Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in the Bookmarks View Saved pages are indicated by except that at the top of a small triangle in the upper right corner of the bookmark the page appears the text Page saved on date size k 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Select the Bookmark icon E 3 Select the name of the Boskma bookmarked or saved page Pola you want to visit Mobile Portal On the bottom right of the screen are five icons representing the first five Bookmarks pages Select a Bookmarks page icon to display the page You can also tap the arrow to go to the next page 4 Done Bookmark page arrow Bookmark page icons Palm T X Handheld 429 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Editing information about a bookmark or saved page You can clean up your bookmark list by deleting 1 old bookmarks or saved pages you no longer use Select the bookmark 2 select Edit and then select Delete Go to Favorites and select Web amp Select the Bookmark icon E 3 Go to the Edit Bookmarks List dialog box a Open the menus b Select Bookmarks and then select Edit Bookmarks 4 Edit the bookmark information a Select the name of the bookmarked or saved page that you want to edit b Change the bookmark or saved page name description or address URL
41. only from devices with which you have 1 previously communicated Creating partnership with other devices After you have set up your phone and computer as trusted devices you may want to set up partnerships with other devices such as a friend s handheld When your handheld recognizes a trusted device your handheld automatically accepts communication bypassing the discovery and authentication process Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar 2 Begin the discovery process a b Select Prefs Select Setup Devices Select Trusted Devices Select Add Device Select Trusted Devices to begin the discovery process The Discovery icon Q 1 appears to indicate that the discovery process is active Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 299 You can delete a trusted device or view the details about a trusted device such as the device address and your most recent connection In Bluetooth Manager select Setup Devices and then select Trusted Devices Select the appropriate device and select Details Palm T X Handheld 3 Select the device you want to add as a trusted device and then select OK If the device you want to add does not appear on the discovery results list select Find More to search again CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Discovery Results i Show All Known Devices Select a device a BlueGate AP BRAD PalmNokia3600 a Palm a Pico a Pico 3 S
42. repeatedly to cycle through the four different Sometimes you want to look at your schedule for a particular date while other times you want to see an overview of a week or month views Viewing your appointments and tasks together Did You Knows Agenda View shows your daily schedule and any items on your Tasks list that are overdue or due Agenda View shows how today If there s room on the screen Agenda View also shows your schedule for the next dates that many unread messages have events scheduled on them you have in the VersaMail application Did You Know 1 Press Calendar O8 You can use a favorite photo as the background for your Agenda View NOTE If Calendar is already open select the Agenda View icon instead Y Continued Tip Calendar opens to Agenda View by default but you can change that to another view Palm T X Handheld 171 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE ELA 2 Do one of the following to view your schedule e Select an appointment to go to it in Day View e Select a task to go to it in Tasks Thursday Nov 20 8 000 Walk dog 9 00 0 Dentist Santa Cruz 12 00 Lunch with Joe 2 00 Meet with sales team Category marker Location tomorrow Movie with Midyne O 1 Update project schedule O 2 Distribute meeting notes Overdue task icon No time icon Agenda View icon 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 172 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Viewing your daily sched
43. with changes from the b Select Options and then select Sync IMAP Folders server 2 Select the folder or folders you want to synchronize from the pick list 4 Done Working with root folders For IMAP accounts if you want to synchronize email messages on your handheld with messages on the mail server folder you need to enter the root folder for the account on your handheld Check with your email provider to find out the root folder for your IMAP account Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL Secure Sockets Layer SSL is a protocol designed to ensure that data you send or receive over a network or the Internet is secure and authentic The VersaMail application uses SSL to help guarantee the secure transmission of email messages that you send or receive When you set up an account in the VersaMail application you are given the option of selecting SSL for incoming and outgoing mail Palm T X Handheld 392 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages IMPORTANT For most email providers that support SSL you must select SSL for both incoming and outgoing mail If you select just one or the other your messages cannot be sent or received successfully If you set up an account that uses an SSL connection on Outlook Outlook Express or Eudora then SSL is supported in the VersaMail conduit when you synchronize with that account as well Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with the Ver
44. 128 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Adding a contact Copying contact information into multiple contacts Locating a contact on your list Deleting a contact Customizing the Contacts list Making a connection from a contact Working with Contacts on your computer Related topics Palm T X Handheld Say good bye to a paper address book that you need to update manually every time someone moves changes their email address or gets a new work extension With Contacts not only is it easy to enter information such as names addresses and phone numbers but it is just as quick to view update and organize contact information You can easily share info with other handhelds and dial phone numbers or send messages directly from a contact by using your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology and a compatible mobile phone or by beaming You can even add photos of your loved ones directly to their contact information Benefits of Contacts e Carry all your business and personal contact information in your hand e Keep track of who s who e Keep in touch 129 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Adding a contact If the first character you enter in the Last Name or Company field is an asterisk or another Press Contacts 2 symbol that record always appears at the top of the Contacts list That s 2 Add your contact information useful for an entry like
45. 157 defined 150 defining repeating 154 155 deleting 168 170 514 displaying 164 181 182 entering notes for 158 159 extending beyond midnight 157 finding overlapping 178 marking as private 151 490 rescheduling 166 167 retrieving with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 402 407 scheduling 150 152 182 setting alarms for 165 183 setting time zones for 160 161 viewing free time for 180 650 viewing specific time for 181 Excel files 24 73 187 Excel spreadsheets attaching to email 376 email messages and 305 importing information from 117 managing files for 186 opening 188 sending information to 473 transferring to handheld 77 exchanging information 21 exclamation point in Tasks list 245 EXIF format 200 expansion cards adding applications to 27 111 122 595 beaming from 468 benefits of 586 copying applications to 469 593 deleting information on 594 displaying information about 26 591 downloading files to 433 dummy card for 587 formatting 594 getting applications on 122 inserting 21 588 limitations 591 opening applications on 589 opening files on 590 overview 585 preventing damage to 587 related topics for 595 removing 587 removing applications on 124 renaming 592 T X Handheld transferring audio files to 219 types of 586 viewing information on 435 expense records See Expense application Expense application 23 archiving information in 478 benefits of 471 categorizing information in 473 479 480 512 c
46. 160 162 164 165 166 168 170 171 173 175 176 177 179 182 521 related topics for 185 rescheduling events 166 retrieving events for 402 407 643 saving information for 151 168 170 scheduling events 150 152 157 selecting dates on 234 setting alarms from 183 529 setting display options 178 179 183 synchronizing information for 76 112 transferring information to 66 troubleshooting 185 618 Calendar files 117 Calendar icon 23 Calendar Preferences dialog box 165 182 calendar views 173 175 176 177 calibration 556 Call History List 455 Call Waiting 571 calling card numbers 571 canceled actions 40 canceled appointments 168 canceled tasks 242 capitalization 51 60 249 card files 117 Card Info application 26 591 Card Info icon 26 card readers 218 219 593 carrying cases 586 categories See also albums adding 512 beaming 467 benefits of 511 changing 166 color coding 162 deleting 514 displaying 518 536 placing information in different 516 T X Handheld related topics for 519 renaming 513 scrolling through 518 selecting 467 categorizing applications 512 517 contacts 140 512 515 events 151 467 512 expenses 473 479 480 512 information 511 515 memos 512 notes 256 tasks 234 240 245 Category command 517 Category dialog box 517 category lists 589 category lists See Category pick list category marker 172 180 Category pick list displaying events on 164 opening 180 placing
47. 2 Select preferences Delivery Options Get v Entire message Get Select whether to get message O Ask Every Time subjects only or entire messages Get only M Unread messages Ask Every Time Check to display a O Mailfromlast 1day dialog box for choosing subjects only Download attachments or entire messages each time you retrieve email Leave unchecked to Message Format HTML retrieve messages according to the option you select in the Get pick list Get only Unread messages IMAP account only Check the box to download only unread mail to your handheld If you don t select this option and you select Get amp Send all of your messages on your provider s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox including messages you have already read Ay NOTE For POP accounts the Unread messages box does not appear on the Delivery Options screen Mail from last X days Get messages sent within the number of days you specify default is 7 Download attachments Check the box to automatically download file attachments to email messages to your handheld Attachments that exceed the maximum message size cannot be downloaded Y Continued 343 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know Basic HTML includes bold italics small font only colored words bulleted and numbered lists and so on In an HTML message certain types of graphics for example JPEG or GIF files may be displayed as a URL in
48. 436 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Changing your home and start pages You can change the page that your Home Page icon A goes to or change the page that the web browser starts with when it is first opened If you want more a larger screen to view your pages you can hide the address bar from the Page tab preferences by Changing your home page removing the check from You can choose a home page from any web address the Show Address Bar box Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the Preferences Page dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select the Page tab Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 437 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web 3 Select the Home Page box Preferences fi Page General Advanced Start With v Last Page Viewed Home Page fi 7 www com net org More Home Page Restore Default M Show Address Bar Enter a URL on the Address line 5 Select OK twice 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 438 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Changing your start page You can select the start page you want your handheld to open to when you first open the web browser 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the Preferences Page dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Page tab 3 Select the Start with pick list and select the page you want to start with when you first op
49. 442 specifying as home 437 specifying as start 439 viewing off line 433 434 viewing URLs for 424 web services 561 web viewer 434 websites See also web browser application accessing 265 276 287 295 420 422 browsing 25 287 295 421 Palm technical support 17 71 saving personal information for 445 setting browsing options for 440 442 445 448 450 week days 550 Week View 175 178 182 Week View icon 175 weekly events 154 weekly schedules 175 178 weekly tasks 237 239 WEP encryption 272 280 WEP key See encryption keys Whole Page view web browser 426 Wi Fi devices 265 radio 22 technology 265 Wi Fi access points 265 274 Wi Fi icon 268 Wi Fi wireless connections accessing email with 276 benefits of 264 265 browsing the web with 276 420 checking status of 268 device to device networking and 277 prerequisites for 269 related topics for 285 Windows information creating contacts 147 creating login scripts 576 creating notes 262 creating user profiles 12 displaying tasks 246 entering expense reports 481 entering information 113 handheld system requirements 2 importing 117 installing applications 111 installing handheld software 7 120 listening to music 214 667 opening calendars 184 restoring information 601 sync cable connections 81 synchronization options for 10 102 106 613 synchronizing handheld 75 78 80 89 94 95 99 synchronizing with user profiles 14 troubleshooting problems 6
50. 609 resetting 166 545 547 scheduling 151 scheduling periods of 151 setting current 548 setting for alarms 165 236 259 528 setting location specific 26 522 545 unscheduled events and 153 time bars 180 time formats 549 550 Time Zone entry box 526 time zone pick list 161 time zones adding locations and 525 automatically including 160 changing 526 545 546 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync and 407 Palm Desktop software and 618 primary locations and 160 scheduling events and 160 523 618 secondary locations and 524 T X Handheld selecting 161 timed events 181 timeout intervals 386 Timeout option 386 to do lists 233 See also tasks Tasks application toolbars 43 top panel controls 21 Touchscreen Preferences screen 556 touchscreen See screen TouchTone dialing 566 tracking expenses 23 471 transfer options 602 transferring applications 27 existing account settings 312 files 75 117 information 21 66 76 117 wirelessly 265 287 transferring information 74 Trash folder 368 369 travel expenses 480 travel guides 586 troubleshooting 8 79 556 604 trusted connections 298 Trusted Devices option 299 trusted pair See partnership trusted pairs 299 Tungsten handheld See handhelds turning device on and off 561 turning handheld on and off 21 559 turning off alarms 529 turning off HotSync manager 103 turning sounds off 557 U underlined links 425 Undo icon 43 Unfiled category 513 unfreezing handheld 597
51. 631 Send command 578 Send CR command 578 Send email from Outbox option 321 Send Password command 578 send retry failures 353 354 Send To Handheld droplet 27 75 112 Send User ID command 578 sending email 295 344 348 436 T X Handheld text messages 287 410 411 server preferences 449 servers 448 service defined 296 Service Connection Progress messages 572 Service pick list 296 570 573 service profiles deleting 575 selecting 572 setting up 569 570 573 service templates 569 services 296 561 577 Set Alarm dialog box 235 259 Set as default check box 108 Set Country dialog box 550 Set Date amp Time button 522 Set Date dialog box 522 548 Set Time dialog box 151 523 548 setting up email accounts 325 329 setting up Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts 395 401 setting up wireless connections 286 settings See preferences setup 604 Setup Devices option 89 Setup dialog box 103 sharing files 265 287 information 21 131 460 469 photos 210 videos 210 sharing FAQs 626 Short header option 389 Short Message Service SMS 411 short messages 410 ShortCut strokes Graffiti 2 writing backing up 554 changing 555 deleting 555 described 62 63 setting up 554 ShortCut Text line 554 shortcuts 43 69 544 shortcuts for 73 ShortCuts Preferences screen 554 555 Show Address Bar check box 422 Show History command 485 Show in List pick list 140 Show Multiple Locations setting 530 Show Private Records dialog box 492 si
52. Angel Linda Waterfall Rock V 4 Believe 5 15 Electric Angel Dave Meniketti Jill Meniketti Lynne Reardon Rock v 5 Velocity of Love 3 23 Electric Angel Suzanne Ciani Rock M6 Falling Angel 5 31 Electric Angel Midyne Spear Rock V 7 Follow the Dream 4 02 Electric Angel Jil Meniketti Lynne Reardon Midyne Spear Rack V 8 On Wings of a Dream 5 47 Electric Angel Dave Meniketti Rock 9 Higher Ground 3 51 Electric Angel Stevie Wonder Rack 7 10 Blue Rondo a la Turk 3 36 Electric Angel Dave Brubeck Rock V 11 Through the Mist 6 05 Electric Angel Midyne Spear Rack V 12 Caramar 3 42 Electric Angel Lynne Reardon Rack 3 Transfer the MP3 files to your handheld 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 221 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Tip For tips on using Pocket Tunes open the Options menu and select Help Did You Know Pocket Tunes continues playing the songs in your list until it reaches the end of your list or until you tap Stop even if your handheld screen is off Tip You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version that supports additional music file formats such as WMA supports streaming MP3 subscription music and includes additional features such as graphic equalizers and bookmarks For more information visit www pocket tunes com Palm T X Handheld Playing music on your handheld Go to Favorites and select Music O Select a song to play e To play the current song tap
53. Daily Repeating Events Show events that repeat every day 7 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 181 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE ELA Setting alarm and time options You can view and schedule events in time slots that are before or after the start or end time You just need to scroll to those time slots Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Press Calendar O Open the Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences Select the start and end times of your typical day This time frame appears in your Day View and Week View Ny Continued Preferences ti Start Time 8 00 am gt End Time gt O New events use time zones O Alarm Preset Alarm Sound Alarm Remind Me v 3 Times Play Every v 5 minutes 182 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar 4 Set any of the following alarm settings Alarm Preset Set an alarm for each new event When you check this box you also need to enter the default number of minutes days or hours before the event that the alarm sounds For events without a time the alarm settings are based on midnight of the date of the event The Alarm Preset settings appear as defaults for each new event but you can change these settings in the Details dialog box for individual events If you don t want to use alarms for most of your events don t check this box Alarm Sound Select the sound the alarm makes when it goes off Remind Me Select how
54. Documents 373K 3K Expense Size 122 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Cont d b Select one of the following options and then select Done Version Displays the version numbers of all of your applications and of the operating system of your handheld Size Shows how much space each application occupies The bar at the top shows the total space currently in use on your handheld or expansion card Records Shows the number of records in an application 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 123 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Before You Begin Removing an application Verify that the application extension or patch that you are removing is not used by You can remove applications from your handheld and remove Palm Desktop software from your computer another application If Removing an application from your handheld you delete a file that is If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer want some applications you installed shared by another you can remove applications from your handheld or from an expansion card application the other application may not work Ry NOTE You can remove only add on applications patches and extensions that you install You cannot remove the applications that are part of the operating system of your handheld 1 Go to Applications 2 Open the Delete dialog box a Open the menus b Select Delete from the App men
55. Documents To Go Companion desktop software for the Documents application on your handheld Lets you transfer Microsoft Word Excel and PowerPoint files to your handheld as well as create and edit files Palm T X Handheld 27 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Did You Know Some applications are automatically assigned to a category when you install them Assign any application to a category in Applications by selecting Category in the App menu Select the pick list next to the application s name and then select a category Palm T X Handheld Windows Media Player link Direct X link Windows only Pocket Tunes plug in Windows only Work with the Media desktop application These applications are required for Media to prepare videos for playback on your handheld Download requires Internet connection Also Windows Media Player is the desktop companion for the Pocket Tunes application on your handheld Windows only Transfer MP3 music files from your computer to your handheld or to an expansion card sold separately and copy music from your CDs to your computer N NOTE We recommend that you use the links to download the current versions of Windows Media Player and Direct X even if you already have Windows Media Player on your computer These versions contain all of the components needed to prepare videos for playback on your handheld Works with Windows Media Player to convert music files to a format th
56. Edit Bookmarks List dialog box 430 431 432 Edit Categories command 240 Edit Categories dialog box 162 163 512 514 Edit Connection dialog box 563 Edit currencies command 474 Edit List dialog box 525 527 Edit menu 69 70 Edit Playlist dialog box 223 editing 68 250 256 260 430 See also changing electrostatic discharge 596 638 639 email See also email accounts VersaMail application accessing 25 92 276 292 295 307 adding addresses to contacts 346 adding attachments to 376 adding signatures 352 addressing 134 142 145 349 350 351 554 changing fonts for 356 changing header information for 389 changing Inbox folders for 355 changing maximum size 334 changing messages 354 649 composing 348 creating folders for 360 deleting 365 366 368 388 downloading 334 343 downloading attachments 372 374 emptying Trash folder for 368 369 entering user names for 570 filtering 336 381 383 385 forwarding 361 manually marking 370 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 393 moving messages 358 reading 345 reading files attached to 375 434 receiving 295 334 402 related topics for 409 replying to 362 sending 295 344 348 436 setting display options for 356 setting maximum size 321 setting notification options for 339 353 setting preferences for 343 setting retry intervals for 353 tapping URLs in 365 viewing status of 342 viewing unread messages for 171 180 wireless connections and 265 276 ema
57. GSM Quick Look Results f 4 o M Tracker daemon t 11 53a Bug 94271 FA04_U2 Getti New Display 4 amp OPTIONAL Ifthe invitation contains an attachment open the attachment and view or save it before responding to the invitation Once you respond to the invitation the attachment is removed Y Continued 405 CHAPTER 16 When you send your response the server is updated with the new meeting event and immediately synchronizes the event to the Calendar application on your handheld If you select Accept the event appears as a confirmed appointment If you receive an updated meeting invitation you can again choose to accept decline or tentatively accept If you receive a meeting cancellation you don t need to do anything Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Respond to the invitation 3 of 641 P From Mike Hines a After reading the invitation Subj Quarterly Review select Accept _ Decline X Wednesday Oct 13 2004 or Tentative 2_ tentatively 2 00 pm 2 30 pm accept Andover Conference Room k When Wednesday October 13 2004 b Select the response option you 2 00 PM 2 30 PM GMT 05 00 want from the dialog box Eastern Time US amp Canada M Cn IGOEG Respond without comments Sends an immediate email response to the meeting organizer by means of the Exchange server Respond with comments Opens an email response form to which you
58. Handheld don ts e Do not drop bang or otherwise cause a strong impact to your handheld e Do not carry your handheld in your back pocket you might sit on it by mistake e Do not let your handheld get wet don t even leave it in a damp location e Do not expose your handheld to very hot or cold temperatures including placing it near a heater leaving it in a car or setting it by a window in direct sunlight Resetting your handheld On rare occasions your handheld may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen In this case you need to reset your handheld Doing a soft reset A soft reset tells your handheld to stop what it s doing and start over again None of your information will be lost After a soft reset a screen appears that lets you reset the date and time if needed Palm T X Handheld 597 CHAPTER 28 Maintaining Your Handheld To do a soft reset use the tip of the stylus to gently press the reset button inside the hole on the back panel of your handheld Reset button If your handheld does not respond after a soft reset you need to do a hard reset Palm T X Handheld 598 CHAPTER 28 Maintaining Your Handheld Doing a hard reset Only do a hard reset if a soft reset doesn t solve your problem or if you want to clear all of your information from your handheld IMPORTANT A hard reset deletes all records and entries stored on your handheld including the username that identifies the h
59. Install Windows Media Player and the Pocket WINDOWS ONLY Tunes plug in on your computer Insert the software installation CD 1 and follow the onscreen instructions for installing extra software An Internet connection is required to download the software Prepare your computer and your handheld a Connect your handheld and your computer to the USB sync cable b Go to Favorites and select Music B Y Continued e After you install the software you must synchronize your handheld with your computer so that WMP can recognize your handheld Palm T X Handheld 214 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Palm T X Handheld 2 Set WMP format setting on your computer a Open the Windows Media Player application Click the full screen icon in the upper right corner of the window to maximize the window to cover the full screen Click Tools and then click Options Click the Rip Music tab Click the Format pick list and then select mp3 Click OK Y Continued Options _ Plugins Priva Securty File Types DVD Network Player Rip Music Devices Performance Library ey Specify where music is stored and change rip settings Rip music to this location C Documents and Settings Owner My Documents My Rip settings Format Leam more about s MMPS formats Rip CD when inserted Eject CD when ripping is complete Audio qua
60. Select the month selector to scroll to the previous or next month or select Go To to choose a specific month e Select a date to go to that day in Day View 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 176 CHAPTER 7 DUETE L D CITO ELA Viewing a yearly calendar You can also press Right Year View shows a calendar for an entire year You can scroll between years or jump to any and Left on the 5 way to other year scroll to the next or previous month To go to Day View for a particular 1 date press Center on the 5 way to insert a highlight press Right or EOI TO PONOT A SANA b Select the Month View Be then press Center on the Hasselt 181620 21222324252627 28293031 5 way again icon fi E Open Year View Year selector a Press Calendar O 1234 7 8 9101112 34567 13141516 17 1819 10111213141 2021 2223242526 17 18192021 c Select Year 2324 2728293031 242526 27 28 29 Scroll arrows Month View icon 2 Do any of the following to view a yearly calendar e Select the year selector to scroll to the previous or next year or select Go To to choose a specific year e Select the scroll arrows to see months that don t fit on the screen e Select a month to go to that month in Month View 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 177 CHAPTER 7 DUETE L D LITRO GT ELA Finding events that overlap When an event starts before a previous event finishes the events overlap You can spot events that overlap in Week View and in Day
61. Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Knov Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account If you set up a Microsoft Although Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with both the VersaMail and Calendar Exchange ActiveSync applications you must set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in VersaMail account on your computer you cannot On a Windows computer you can quickly set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on synchronize email your computer and then synchronize the settings to your handheld On a Mac computer you messages and Calendar must set up the account on your handheld You can set up only one Microsoft Exchange events on your computer ActiveSync account with messages and I avanis on your handheld IMPORTANT If you set up an email account to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Calendar events on your handheld automatically synchronize directly with info on the Exchange server by synchronizing von along with email messages You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in must select Sync within Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email the VersaMail application account If you do not want to synchronize Calendar events with info on the server do not set to synchronize messages up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in the VersaMail application and events on your computer with messages i and evedisonvoilr Setting up a Micros
62. Setup d Select Bluetooth HotSync and then select Next Setup Devices i PC Setup Phone Setup To set up a connection or Messaging Dial from Contacts Internet connectivity K Ge PC Setup Ge wireless HotSync tap below Set up a wireless connection Browse the Web Check Email and data service to your PC HotSync wirelessly Bluetooth HotSync k LAN Setup Set up your PC to synchronize Browse the Web check Email using Bluetooth Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 89 CHAPTER 5 To open HotSync manager on your computer in step 2 of the onscreen instructions see procedure step 4b on this page click the HotSync manager icon on the taskbar in the lower right corner of your computer screen Remember that Bluetooth devices generally must be within 30 feet of each other to communicate Palm T X Handheld Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 y Done Select a computer and select OK DiscoveryResults Show v Nearby devices The Discovery icon 1 Select a PC appears to indicate that the BRAD discovery process is active If your computer did not show up on the discovery results select Find More to search again Cane Set up a connection for wireless synchronization a Follow the onscreen instructions for steps 1 3 selecting Next after each step b Select Launch HotSync in step 4 c Tap the HotSync icon to synchronize wirelessly synchronize Now yo
63. Sync List to Palm Handheld Wayne Hoff Start ie aa Sync AE meat tee E Select Palm Handheld Ready to synchronize 6 Light Of Sound Ready to synchronize 7 49 MB V Drawing Down The Moon Ready to synchronize 7 34MB I Believe Ready to synchronize 7 21MB A alaih NFI aua Daadu ta cunchennize 4 OMB 3 Select Start Sync The files are transferred to your handheld IMPORTANT Do not press the sync button on your cable Windows Media Player is transferring the files so there s no need to do anything 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 218 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music You can also use a card reader accessory sold separately to transfer MP3 files from your computer to an expansion card Palm T X Handheld MAC ONLY Mac users must transfer music files to an expansion card inserted into your handheld s expansion card slot Connect your handheld and your computer to the USB sync cable Insert an expansion card into your handheld s expansion card slot Select the MP3 files you want to transfer wer a Drag and drop the MP3 files KIDD onto the Send To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder b In the Send To Handheld dialog box select your username and click OK Synchronize your handheld with your computer N NOTE Be patient transferring music to an expansion card can take several minutes 4 Done 219 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Before You Begin Transferring mu
64. T X Handheld 625 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions 3 Select Delete Password to remove the password and delete all private records 4 Synchronize your handheld with your computer again forgot the password and my handheld is locked First use the password hint to try to remember the password If this doesn t help or if you do not have a password hint you must perform a hard reset to continue using your handheld Performing a hard reset deletes all of the information on your handheld To protect your info and create a backup of your info synchronize to back up the contents of your handheld to your computer often Sharing I can t beam information to another handheld or other handheld N NOTE Depending on the receiving handheld model not all information may be sent correctly e If you are beaming to another Palm Powered handheld confirm that your handheld and the other handheld are 4 to 39 inches approximately ten centimeters to one meter apart and that the path between the two handhelds is clear of obstacles Beaming distances to other handhelds with an IR port may be different e Move your handheld closer to the receiving handheld e Make sure the receiving handheld has beam receive enabled e Perform a soft reset on both your handheld and the receiving handheld e Avoid beaming in bright sunlight or fluorescent light These produce infrared noise that can make beaming go slower or in some cases prevent it fr
65. Viewing the date and time in other cities 584 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld In this chapter What type of expansion cards can use How can expansion cards help me Removing an expansion card Inserting an expansion card Opening an application on an expansion card Viewing card information Renaming a card Copying applications to an expansion card Removing all information from a card Related topics Palm T X Handheld A Chinese proverb says Life just gives you time and space it s up to you to fill it But doesn t it always seem that no matter how much space you have you still need more Expansion cards sold separately provide a compact and limitless answer to the storage dilemma When one card becomes full simply use another card To enjoy some aspects of your handheld such as listening to music you need to use expansion cards Also use expansion cards to install and run cool games and other types of software from dictionaries to travel guides on your handheld Benefits of expansion cards e Listen to music e Back up info e Add more games and other software e Add accessories e Store carry and exchange info 585 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Key Term What type of expansion cards can I use SDIO An acronym for f Secure Digital input Your handheld is compatible with SDIO SD and MultiMediaCard expansion
66. Week starts Controls whether applications treat Sunday or Monday as the first day of the week Numbers Controls the decimal and thousands separator symbols 4 Select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 550 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Customizing the way you enter information Your handheld lets you choose how you enter information You can choose the input area the area where you write Graffiti 2 characters choose Graffiti 2 strokes and create ShortCuts to make entering information faster You can change the input area anytime by tapping and holding Input on the status bar Customizing the input area You can configure your input area with preferences for keyboards or for Graffiti 2 writing You can also choose to see your strokes as you write 1 Open Input Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select Input 2 Select the type of input area you want Select an Input Configuration e Keyboard Wide e Wide M Show Graffiti Strokes e Classic Y Continued Done Palm T X Handheld 551 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Right after you write a character your handheld interprets a quick tap on the screen as a period character If you want to tap a button either wait a few seconds or tap the Full screen writing icon on the status bar Palm T X Handheld 3 amp OPTIONAL Uncheck the Show Graffiti Strokes box if you don t want to have the Graffi
67. a 304 Chapter 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 305 Upgrading an existing email ACCOUNT sssssssssssssssssssssrnnnnsnnenesrennnnnnnnnnenne 306 About email ACCOUNTS seescessiccicdesssccgadetaescnesnchiseseessssnccueesniseceaniensecnadavensetsc 307 Using an enmiail Provider ssi taisaas tarde aia te esis 307 Using a corporate email ACCOUNT ssssssssssssssssssesssenrinnnnnnnnnnnsnnnennnnnnn 308 VPNS wcseticcsvedine cascavate cases vided ectiestaedccadstauas tages vaed Suausuaed ecnie sdetvaadst cand ates douxs 309 Connecting to a VPN sisses a aa 310 Setting UP AN ACCOUNT siriricesesrissidedisrnrriusueeriieienii riri dediki nini doneiniaad utn andi 311 Transferring settings from an existing ACCOUNT sssssssssessssererreens 312 Setting up an account on your computer Common providers 314 Setting up an account on your computer Other providers 317 Entering advanced account settings on your computer sess 320 Setting up an account on your handheld cccecceeseeeeeseenteeeeeeeeees 325 Setting advanced mail options on your handheld c sscseeeeeee 328 TESTING VOUT NEW ACCOUNT sisescecsccacscccatsasascecseassccuencehsereanaepsecteustens eens 329 Editing am ACCOUNNE serrr niaaa th aceoencens benagubestecis 330 Editing an account ON your COMPUTED cceteeeeceeeeee eee eteteeeeeeaeaees 330 Editing an account on your handheld eceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeee 331 Deleting a ACCOUNT iiss cosis ceissn
68. a few minutes Palm T X Handheld 81 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY 1 Prepare your computer for IR synchronization a Double click the HotSync manager icon 4 in the Palm folder b In the HotSync Controls tab select Enabled c Click the Connection Settings tab e 3 HotSync Software Setup HotSync Controls ee On connec Settings Internal Modem Internal Modem nknown gt modem e PalmConnect PalmConnect use USB IR Port IR Port As fast as possible aan Settings d Select the On check box next to IR port e Close the HotSync Software Setup window Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 82 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer You can continue to use 2 the sync cable even if your computer is set up Synchronize your handheld with your computer Welcome for IR synchronization a Go to Applications and select HotSync 2 HotSync icon Mac To increase the b Select Local IR to a PC Handheld speed of cable IR to a PC Handhe synchronization turn off c Tap the pick list below the the IR port when you re HotSync icon and select IR to not using it to increase a PC Handheld the speed of cable synchronization Tap pick list d Position the IR port of your handheld within a few inches of the IR port of your computer e Tap the HotSync icon on
69. and off and to adjust screen brightness Tap to display the Reminders screen Tap to display the Bluetooth dialog box where Bluetooth functionality can be turned on and off and you can connect to another Bluetooth device The icon changes from gray to white when Bluetooth functionality is turned on Tap to display the Wi Fi dialog box where you can make a wireless connection to a Wi Fi network The icon displays Wi Fi if Wi Fi functionality is turned off and signal strength bars if it is turned on Tap to turn full screen writing on and off When on you can write Graffiti 2 characters anywhere onscreen 29 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld ou Know Screen Tap to switch between landscape and portrait view You can customize which rotation way the screen rotates in Input Tap to switch between showing and hiding the input area Tap and hold to landscape mode by display the input area selection menu choosing right or left handed rotation Rotating the screen You can switch between landscape and portrait views by tapping Screen rotation 2 on the status bar Landscape view is useful for viewing spreadsheets email web pages and photos 2 28 8 Bs Sab ae Ga Ls Palm T X Handheld 30 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Do s and don ts To protect your handheld from damage and ensure reliable performance follow these guidelines Do s e Use only the stylus to tap the screen no pen
70. and open World Clock 529 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Changing the clock display 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Open the Display Options dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Display Options 3 Select any of the following options and then select OK Show Multiple Locations Display the secondary locations Uncheck it to display only the primary location Show Date Display the date in World Clock 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 530 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics If you re having problems with World Clock or anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Moving Around e Opening applications e Using menus Calendar Setting an alarm outside of the next 24 hours Customizing Changing the volume of other system sounds Palm T X Handheld 531 Customizing Your Handheld Customizing Favorites View Customizing Applications View Making the screen easier to read Assigning a button to your frequently used applications Setting the date and time Customizing the way you enter information Selecting sound settings Entering your owner information Conserving battery power Connecting your handheld to other handhelds Customizing network settings Setting up a VPN Related topics Palm T X Handhe
71. anyone who has your handheld This includes entries that are marked private but are not masked or hidden Masking or hiding private entries without creating apassword Masked entries are displayed when selected and hidden entries are displayed when Show is selected in the Security Preferences This provides some degree of privacy for private entries but anyone with access to your handheld can view all your records Masking or hiding private entries and creating a password Private entries are protected by the password and can be displayed only when the password is entered This is the basic level of security Locking your handheld A password is required to use your handheld All entries are protected whether marked as private or not Palm T X Handheld 489 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Palm T X Handheld Marking information as private Marking an entry as private is the first step in protecting your info 1 2 Open an application Create a new entry or select the entry that you want to make private Mark it as private a For existing Contacts select Edit b Select Details c Check the Private box Contact Detais Show in List Mobile d Select OK Category v Personal Private M Private box e In Contacts and Memos Delete B select Done 4 Done 490 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Setting the level of privacy You ROn also sal the love Add further pro
72. are commonly called 40 bit keys and 128 bit keys are commonly called 104 bit keys because the other 24 bits are automatically assigned Hip You can use a passphrase to generate the keys If you have problems ask your network administrator for the hex equivalent and use that instead Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections If you selected WEP in step 5 enter the WEP encryption information a Select the Key box b Select the Key Type pick list and select a key type 40 bit hex Creates a 10 digit hexadecimal number 40 bit ASCII Creates a five character string 40 bit passphase Creates a variable length string 104 bit hex Creates a 26 digit hexadecimal number 104 bit ASCII Creates a 13 character string 104 bit passphrase Creates a variable length string Edit Wi Fi Network Network WEP Key i Network Name SSID Key Type v 104 bit hex O Four keys Security WEP Key 26 hex digits Key E Y Continued 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections Key index Cont d c If you want to enter more than one WEP key or you want to generate four Specifies which of the WEP keys from a passphrase check the Four keys box four keys to use ata given time Some access points d Enter the WEP key s automatically broadcast their key index e If you checked the Four keys box select an index number from the Key Index pick list Chock with your system f Select OK and go t
73. are moved to the Trash folder and remain there until you empty the trash Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Choose settings for deleting old messages a Select the Folder pick list and then select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete b Select the Older than pick list and then select One Week One Month or Choose Date If you select Choose Date select a date from the calendar Delete messages a Select Delete b Select Also delete message s on server if you want to delete the messages from the server now Delete Old Messages Delete all messages in the Folder w inbox Older than w One Week Delete Confirmation Q Delete message s from the handheld O Also delete message s on server IMPORTANT If you delete a message from the server you cannot retrieve it and view it again later c Select OK 4 Done 367 CHAPTER 16 You can set a preference to automatically empty the trash Many email providers such as Yahoo have size restrictions for mail storage If your mailbox on the server becomes full messages are returned to the senders Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Emptying the trash When you delete a message it is moved to the Trash folder Deleted email accumulates in the Trash folder and takes up space on your handheld To increase memory you should empty the trash regul
74. as the 15th Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 239 CHAPTER 11 MEULE My elt am Ft Organizing your tasks Overdue tasks have an exclamation point next to the due date Your Tasks Preferences settings control which tasks appear in the Tasks list such as completed or due tasks To change these settings open the Options menu and select Preferences Create a new category for tasks by selecting Edit Categories in the Category pick list Palm T X Handheld Sometimes you want to look at all the things you need to do while at other times you want to see only certain types of tasks 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Tasks 6 In the Tasks list select one of these options All Displays all your tasks Date Displays tasks that are due in a specific time frame Select the pick list in the upper right corner of the screen to select Due Today Last 7 Days Next 7 Days or Past Due Category Displays tasks that are assigned to the selected category Business Personal and so on Select the pick list in the upper right to select a different category KSN All aT LSA a DS LSA a Dote KRU Business Personal 2p Unfiled O 1 Submit monthilEdit Categories 240 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Marking a task as complete You can set Tasks Preferences to record the You can check off a task to indicate that you ve completed it date that you finish your tasks and you can show or hide finished t
75. bit keys are commonly called 104 bit keys because the other 24 bits are automatically assigned lip You can use a passphrase to generate the keys If you have problems ask your network administrator for the hex equivalent and use that instead Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections If you selected WEP in step 6 enter the WEP encryption information a Select the Key box b Select the Key Type pick list and select a key type 40 bit hex Creates a 10 digit hexadecimal number 40 bit ASCII Creates a five character string 40 bit passphase Creates a variable length string 104 bit hex Creates a 26 digit hexadecimal number 104 bit ASCII Creates a 13 character string 104 bit passphrase Creates a variable length string Edit Wi FiNetwork Network WEP Key Network Name SSID Key Type v 104 bit hex O Four keys Security be WEP Key 26 hex digits Y Continued 264 CHAPTER 14 Key index Specifies which of the four keys to use ata given time Some access points automatically broadcast their key index Palm T X Handheld Cont d Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections c If you want to enter more than one WEP key or you want to generate four WEP keys from a passphrase check the Four keys box d Enter the WEP key s e If you checked the Four keys box select an index number from the Key Index pick list f Select OK and go to step 9 Set the connection a
76. can set the date and time in Preferences as you did during the initial setup of your handheld Savings settings are or in World Clock When you change the date and time in one application it is automatically active the time changes changed in the other according to the rule for the primary location For example in North 1 America the time changes at 2 00 a m in Europe it changes at 1 00 a m 2 Go to Applications and select World Clock O Select Set Date amp Time 3 Set the date Year a Select the Set Date box Month b Select the arrows to select the current year 0 zrg ay l4 c Select the current month 29 30 31 d Select the current day Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 522 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Selecting a time zone when creating a new event in Calendar allows you to travel and have your events automatically adjust to the time zone in your new location Time zones in Calendar work only if you are synchronizing with Outlook or Exchange ActiveSync Palm T X Handheld 4 Set the time a Select the Set Time box b Select the hour and minute boxes and then select the arrows to change them c Select AM or PM and then select OK Select Done 4 Done M v 523 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings If you have friends family or colleagues in another time zone select a city in their zone as your secondary location When you need to contact
77. ccccccseeeeeeenees 369 Marking messages as read or unread ecesesssseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 370 Working with QttaChMents sssi ssisiisiicsiirordaas ssncencecestaegencabaccreatestaettx 371 Working with a downloaded attachment sssssssssssssssssirsssssssesrrerrennns 372 Downloading large attachments ssssssssssessssssssssssrnnsrnnnsssnsnnnnnnnnnnns 374 Attaching files to outgoing messages sssssessssssrissisrrssssrerrrernnnnns 376 Attaching photos and VId OS 0 0 0 cccccceceeeeeeeeseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeneneeneaeaeees 378 Advanced VersaMail application features ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenneeaeeeeeees 380 Creating and USING filters cess sccccicns sastnctestacdcantesdeancneesdensdansusteacnenvastenss 381 Palm T X Handheld xi T rning a filter ONAN Off ssic ccsessssceceesssscssiedebs eecaneccndenadeesssvecdtucessec ede 383 Editing OF deleting a filter rsrsrs sudditi baaa 385 Setting connection preferences cecsececeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeeaeeesseeeaeeeeeeenaas 386 Setting server preferences ccccccceseeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeneaeeeseennaes 387 Changing email header details ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneens 389 Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly c cccccessseeeeeeeneees 390 Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization 391 Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off nasses 391 Synchronizing handheld and mail server IMAP folders from the Options MENU esis
78. click the HotSync icon in the system tray and select VersaMail under the Custom menu then click Change Click Next to continue ees aa 7 When you have finished setting VersaMail TM Desktop Mail Account Wizard Xi up all accounts click Finish Transfer Settings to Device You must now perform a HotSync operation to transfer your account settings to your device 4 Important your mail cannot be downloaded to your device until you do the following Click the Finish button on this screen to exit the Wizard Make sure your device is connected to your computer securely through the HotSync cable Press the HotSync button on the cable to synchronize Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 313 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 8 Synchronize to transfer all account information to your handheld 4 Done Setting up an account on your computer Common providers WINDOWS ONLY The settings for many common providers are already included in the VersaMail application If you have an account with one of these providers you just need to enter your username and password during account setup 1 Open VersaMail account setup 2 Select your username from the drop down list at the top of the screen and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account Click Next 3 Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this lis
79. computer e Using Quick Install and the Send To Handheld droplet Common Answers to frequently asked questions about Windows Media Player Questions Palm T X Handheld 232 Managing Your Tasks Creating a task Organizing your tasks Marking a task as complete Deleting a task Customizing your Tasks list Working with Tasks on your computer Related topics Palm T X Handheld Some of the most successful people in the world are also the busiest When asked how they manage to do it all busy people usually say I make lists The Tasks application on your handheld is the perfect place to make a list of the things you need to do Benefits of Tasks e Set priorities e Track deadlines e Stay focused 233 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Creating a task If no task is currently selected you can create a new task simply by 1 A starting to write in the Go to Favorites and select Tasks 5 input area 2 Create a task Tasks EI Date category Add a note to a task Select the Note button a Select New enter the note text and then select Done Due date b Enter a description of the task Long description New task You can organize your tasks by filing them into categories You can also Priority number mark tasks as private to Note button hide them from prying eyes 3 amp OPTIONAL Assign a priority and due date a Tap the priority number and select a numb
80. considerations apply if you are setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Tap VersaMail in the input area 2 Open the Account Setup screen Rccomst Sais To setup an account tap New a Open the menus or select an account to edit b Select Accounts and then Work Email select Account Setup c Select New Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 325 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Protocol Settings OSK 3 Enter the basic account information eunetan O email provider uses to il g Choose an account name e g receive email Messages a In the Account Name field enter My Mail and select settings Mast providers use the a descriptive name Account Name Work Email Post Office Protocol POP a few use the b Select the Mail Service pick list Mail Service v Other Internet Message Access and then select your email Protocol POP Protocol IMAP provider Select Other if your provider is not listed c If you chose Other select the Y i Ii apear ia vds aa Protocol pick list and then select POP or IMAP the part of your email address appearing before d Select Next the symbol not your entire email address Check with your ISP if 4 you are not sure what Enter the account username and r VersaMail username to enter password Enter a username and password for this account a Enter the
81. date and time if necessary e If using Auto Sync to automatically retrieve email messages set the time interval to one hour or less often e Minimize use of the expansion slot When I connect my handheld to the AC charger it does not charge e Confirm that your handheld is firmly connected to the AC charger e Confirm that your AC charger is plugged into an AC outlet that has power A lightning bolt over the battery icon indicates that your handheld is charging If your battery is completely drained you ll need to charge it for a few minutes before you can turn it on and see the battery icon My handheld is not responding On rare occasions your handheld may not respond when you press a button or tap the screen If this happens first check that Keylock is not turned on If Keylock is off and your handheld is still not responding you need to reset your handheld A soft reset tells your handheld to stop and start over again This does not affect any of the information or applications on your handheld NOTE if you had a network connection that was cut off your handheld may not respond for up to 30 seconds Wait 30 seconds before performing a soft reset If your handheld does not respond after a soft reset you need to perform a hard reset If your handheld still does not respond after a reset check your third party applications for incompatible applications Palm T X Handheld 607 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions
82. description if you want Name Palm Inc formerly palmC your handheld allows Description you to view a web page b Select OK without being online Preview Palm Inc for www palm com 4 Done 0K Cancel Palm T X Handheld 434 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Viewing a saved file Suppose you have an You can use the web browser to view web pages or image files that are on an expansion card HTML file on your The types of files that can be viewed include HTML HTM GIF and JPG desktop computer that you want to carry with you or received as an attachment to an email Go to Favorites and select Web amp message Download the file onto the expansion card and use the web 2 browser to view the page on your handheld Insert an expansion card into your handheld 3 Go to the file Go to Web Page i 7 www com net org More v file dex htm a Open the menus b Select Go and then select Go to Web Page c Enter the file name using the format file lt cardname gt lt path gt d Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 435 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Sending email by means of an Internet email account You can use your Internet email account to send an email message and attachments Go to Favorites and select Web amp Log in to your Internet email account Compose your email message mh QU N Send or save the email message 4 Done Palm T X Handheld
83. desktop software application Using user profiles Related topics Palm T X Handheld Congratulations on the purchase of your new Palm T X handheld You re about to discover so many things about your handheld that will help you better manage your life and have fun too As you become more familiar with your handheld you ll probably personalize the settings and add applications to make it uniquely yours While you re likely to get years of enjoyment from your handheld it takes only four easy steps to get up and running Benefits e Start using your handheld right away e Establish a link between your handheld and your computer e Set up your handheld for optimal use CHAPTER 1 Palm Desktop software The software that lets you enter update review and synchronize information on your computer Palm T X Handheld Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer What s in the box Zz USB sync cable Flip cover Palm T X handheld lna installation CD System requirements The installation CD contains Palm Desktop software and other applications you need to set up and use your handheld To use Palm Desktop software your desktop computer must meet these requirements WINDOWS ONLY e A PC with a Pentium Il processor or later and one of the following operating systems e Windows 2000 requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software e Windows XP requires administr
84. dialog box 424 finding contacts 138 information 44 overlapping events 178 firewalls 269 309 Flow Ctl pick list 567 folders 358 360 613 Font command 539 font styles 539 fonts 356 426 538 539 forgetting passwords 497 form fields web pages 442 Format Card command 594 formats audio files 213 information specific 549 Formats Preferences screen 549 formatting expansion cards 594 forwarding email 361 freehand drawing 206 255 freeing up space 124 127 170 608 frequently asked questions FAQs 604 front panel controls 19 frozen screen 22 597 607 Full header option 389 full screen pen stroke 544 full screen writing 49 256 427 icon on status bar 29 full screen writing icon 50 G Game Sound pick list 557 T X Handheld games 515 557 586 gestures Graffiti 2 writing 59 Get IP command 578 Get unread mail option 343 getting started 6 GIF files 435 Go To Date dialog box 150 152 Go to Web Page dialog box 421 Go to Web Page icon 421 GPRS mobile phones 290 297 562 Graffiti 2 command strokes 43 59 Graffiti 2 input area 48 Graffiti 2 Preferences screen 552 Graffiti 2 writing 51 changing strokes for 555 command shortcuts and 59 copying and pasting with 69 deleting information with 70 deleting ShortCuts 555 entering information with 48 51 61 entering ShortCut strokes 62 63 554 full screen mode and 49 getting help with 58 guidelines for 53 overview 48 setting alternate stroke shapes for 552 troubleshooting problems
85. download images Removes images from downloads Select Fast Mode a Select Fast Mode icon F b Select Fast Mode c Select Done 4 Done Preferences i Advanced M Auto complete O Disable cookies O Disable Javascript Tap and Drag Selects Text Fast mode Disable cascading style sheets M Don t download images o gt WFO http mobile pacar maae A Normal mode 1 News 3 Downloads 4 Sports CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web 441 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses and form fields Your handheld can store information such as web addresses and form fields If autofill is enabled when you enter the first few letters of a URL you ve entered before in the URL Entry field your handheld completes the URL for you Also when you are filling out forms and applications your handheld can complete the information for you Filling out an order form or application on the web usually requires entering several pieces of information your name address phone number and so on When you enable autofill your handheld stores the information you entered in these fields The next time you use that order form and type the first few letters in a field your handheld remembers the last item you entered in that field that started with those letters and fills in the field Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp
86. entries on 516 removing calendar events from 514 cautions 597 606 CDs 220 challenge response prompts 577 Change HotSync Action dialog box 107 Change Repeat dialog box 155 238 Change your synchronization option 10 613 changing alarms 166 bookmarks 428 calendar events 166 category names 513 date and time settings 522 default folders 355 display options 356 363 email accounts 330 331 email filters 385 email messages 354 fonts 356 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 555 home pages 437 information 68 107 109 locations for World Clock 525 526 owner information 558 passwords 494 pen widths 256 playlists 226 preset connections 562 preset formats 549 privacy settings 166 repeating events 167 screen colors 541 screen fonts 538 539 server profiles 570 speed dial entries 458 start pages 439 text colors 180 time zones 526 545 546 untimed events 153 URLs 428 430 World Clock 530 Channel pick list 281 character entry 51 60 130 See also data entry character searches 44 charging battery 31 596 charging the battery 4 561 607 checking space on handheld 122 644 checking the battery 303 606 Choose Date command 234 city preferences 546 cleaning your handheld 31 596 clear button Calculator 484 Clear cache on exit option 447 Clear Cache option 447 clear entry button Calculator 484 Clear Note command 256 clearing calculations 484 Note Pad screens 256 clock 165 528 545 547 See also World Clock Color Theme Pref
87. eseceeesseccneeeceeeeeeteeeeeeeseaeeaeaaeeeeeeeeenense 426 Bookmarking your favorite PAGES ssssssssssssssssssssssinnrrnnnssssresrnennnnnnnnnsnnns 428 Adding a DOOKIMANK sis sitiatiesccecetecnstecceadasisaatecens cccaeceendsdeanesnsvedacaseanes ext 428 Viewing a bookmarked Or Saved page ou eessececeeceeeeeeeeteeeeeenteaaeeaeees 429 Editing information about a bookmark or saved page 0008 430 Arranging the bookmark ISt accsisccisscesessinsdaccssscnsedvecy sean scans vdeatanete sence 431 Downloading fileS ANd PAGES sscciccisssscccecenssecanecessencdnsenasendsnventnesdasueaseceds 433 DOW MO AGING a TING srce aa aeaa neces 433 SAVING a WED Page sisss ccccsiesscccensciscsciavsesdscuedesescecceevaasescdevesseccueeevsaeess 434 VIEWING aeSaVEG File eresio ena ns E pest een 435 Sending email by means of an Internet email account sesser 436 Changing your home and Start pages 1 0 cccscceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetteaaeeeeeeeeeeeens 437 Changing your home Page lt lt ccsciss caseseisceccacsesnpeeuagenaaxecennceed dencseeapeeeds 437 Changing your start PAG is sicccctavsscsaccuasscecedetensivacuncsvecsdatvektentataverceens 439 Setting advanced browser OPtiONS cccccccsesseeceeeseseeeeeeeeesseeeeeessseeeeeess 440 Speeding up Web downloadS 1 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseenaeeeesesenaneeessenaaes 440 Setting whether to automatically complete web addresses NG TOMI TIGUC S ehdro sxkessaunduccseeiedadeka snap iaaa 442 Setting tap and drag behavior
88. from your computer to your handheld Photos and videos Use the desktop Media application from within Palm Desktop Windows or drag the files to the Send To Handheld droplet icon on your desktop Mac Synchronize to transfer the files from your computer to your handheld Music MP3 files In Windows use your music desktop application to transfer the files to your handheld or the Audio folder on your handheld s expansion card In Mac drag the file to the Send To Handheld droplet icon on your desktop and then synchronize to transfer the files from your Mac to your expansion card Palm T X Handheld 77 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer L Before You Begin Synchronizing with a cable or IR port To synchronize HotSync You can synchronize using a cable IR port Wi Fi or Bluetooth wireless technology or a modem manager must be active e HotSync manager was installed when you installed Palm Desktop software if you didn t 1 install Palm Desktop software you don t have HotSync manager on your computer Synchronizing with a cable Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on your computer and then insert the other end into your handheld e On a Windows computer you know HotSync manager is active when its icon appears in the lower right corner of your screen If the icon is not there turn it on by clicking Start and then selecting Programs Nav
89. gt Unfiled 538 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld 1 Open an application such as Contacts or Calendar Not all applications have this option 2 Open the Select Font dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Font 3 Select the font style you want to use and then select OK Select Font Small bold Font A E Large bold Large Small 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 539 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld ou Kno Adjusting the brightness If you have an expansion card inserted into your handheld s expansion 1 card slot the System info screen shows the available memory for 2 both your handheld and Tap System info IE which shows the current time on the status bar Drag the slider to adjust the Jan 2 2004 9 brightness level and then the card tap outside the dialog box 1 1 2 1 am Expansion card memory Battery pam Available A Handheld Memory 41 18 Go MEMO Ly Brightness slider 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 540 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Changing screen colors Choose a new set of text and background colors for all your applications 1 Open Color Theme Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Color Theme 2 Select a theme and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 541 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Changing handedness orientation of the screen Palm T X Ha
90. handheld s expansion card slot b Select the location pick list at the top of the screen and then select the location of the photo or video you want to view Select All Albums to view all photos and videos on your handheld or on the expansion card Y Continued Location pick list Handheld Expansion card Thumbnail View Thumbnail view Slide Show List View List view 192 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Tip if yon gre viewing a 3 Select the photo or video you want to view Tap anywhere in the photo or video photo you can also press to return to the selection screen Center to return to the selection screen VRTA vY AllAlbums EB Select a photo or video to view Tap the photo or video to return to the selection screen Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 193 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer If a video appears cropped in portrait view tap the video to return to the selection screen rotate the screen to landscape view and then select the video again to get a full screen view The input area is automatically hidden when you view a video Palm T X Handheld 4 amp OPTIONAL Access controls e For photos press Up on the 5 way navigator to zoom in Press Down to access the photo controls e For videos press Center to access video controls Photo Video Rotate Play or Pause Full screen view J Volume Progress ind
91. have completed and my handheld times out CD installation and chosen Palm Desktop software as your desktop application for e Perform a soft reset e Make sure that HotSync manager is running on your computer synchronization in order e Make a copy of the folder containing your information This folder is named with either your full to switch to Outlook username or a shortened version of the name Uninstall and then reinstall Palm Desktop Note that you can choose software Outlook as your synchronization software e Turn on your handheld and go to Applications Select HotSync ry and then select Local for Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos during Se neal aa want to change from synchronizing my handheld with Palm Desktop software to synchronizing with Outlook WINDOWS ONLY During CD installation you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your handheld You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time But if Microsoft Outlook already contains all of your contacts appointments tasks and notes you can change your synchronization method so that your handheld synchronizes with Outlook instead You can also change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software NOTE lf you choose to synchronize with Outlook info from Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos is synchronized with info in Outlook You can also set up the VersaMail application to synchronize email messages on your handheld with email in O
92. icons for 354 T X Handheld related topics for 409 setting notification options 353 setting preferences for 380 setting up email accounts 325 327 synchronizing information for 76 troubleshooting 409 version numbers 122 123 video albums creating 201 moving photos in 203 videos adding notes to 199 adding to album 202 attaching to email 378 copying 210 469 deleting from album 202 displaying details of 199 moving 203 sharing 210 sorting 205 transferring to handheld 75 77 viewing 192 View Bookmarks command 429 View By pick list 536 View Log command 79 viewer web pages 434 viewing application groups 515 applications 518 appointments 171 174 175 176 bookmarks 429 calculators 24 contact information 135 140 current date and time 521 524 email attachments 434 events 164 181 182 expansion card information 26 expense reports 23 hidden or masked entries 492 information 19 518 memos 250 notes 260 PDF files 24 personal calendars 149 photo 192 schedules 171 173 175 176 slide shows 195 tasks 171 180 240 244 245 unread messages 171 180 URLs 424 video 192 web pages 421 422 423 426 World Clock 26 530 views Calendar 173 175 176 177 virtual private networks See VPN accounts virus scanning software 604 volume adjusting alarm 529 557 adjusting modem 566 disabling speaker 557 Volume setting connections 566 VPN accounts 309 581 VPN connections 308 309 582 583 wW Wait For command 577 Wait F
93. is selected deselect it to display the missing tasks e If you marked the task as private check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records Connecting wirelessly My passkey is rejected when attempt to form a trusted pair with my mobile phone Some mobile phones require that you enter the passkey within a specific time frame Make sure you have a passkey in mind and that you enter it immediately when prompted If your passkey is rejected your phone may have a preassigned passkey see the documentation included with your phone for information The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pair Bluetooth link or bonded pair My handheld cannot connect to my mobile phone Use the following steps to test the connection 1 Tap Bluetooth controls E on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen You can select the indicator even if it is dimmed 2 Make sure On is selected Palm T X Handheld 621 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions 3 Select the Service pick list and select the service that you want to use to connect to your phone 4 Select Connect If the connection is successful open the application that requires the connection and complete the desired task If the connection is not successful try the following steps e Make sure that your phone is equipped with Bluetooth technology that Bluetooth technology is enabled and that the power is o
94. lock your handheld whenever you turn it off matically lock handheld when ris off Auto powe At a preset time Seta time when your handheld automatically locks After a preset delay Set a period of inactivity after which your handheld will automatically lock 4 Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 500 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Locking your handheld manually 1 Open Security PIS LEranceS P 7 Password a Go to Applications and then p Quick Unlock select Prefs b Select Secu rity Private Records v Show Lock 2 Select Lock 3 Select Lock Device This feature locks your handheld and prevents others from using it without the password To unlock your handheld you must enter your password Lock Device Cancel J Done Lock Device Cancel Palm T X Handheld 501 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Using Quick Unlock You can unlock your handheld by creating a special combination sequence with the 5 way navigator similar to the combination you use to open a padlock Use this sequence in place of your password to quickly unlock your handheld Quick Unlock works only with your first three attempts to unlock your handheld After three attempts you must use your password to unlock your handheld Before You Begin To use Quick Unlock you must first create a password for your handheld You can change a Quick Un
95. low recharge your handheld Also recharge your handheld if it doesn t turn on when you press the power button e Do not carry or use your handheld at extremely high altitudes unless you re in an airplane NOTE The memory on your handheld is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your handheld When you recharge your handheld all of your existing information reappears Conserve battery life by doing any of the following e Adjust the screen brightness e Reduce the Auto off setting e Use Keylock to prevent your handheld from turning on by accident e Stop music or video playback when not in use e Respond to or cancel alerts promptly e Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology and Wi Fi functionality when not in use e Minimize use of the expansion slot Palm T X Handheld 32 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld ort www palm com support Palm T X Handheld If you re having problems with your handheld go to Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Setup Entering Information Moving Around Managing Info Sharing World Clock Customizing Maintaining Common Questions Installing the desktop software from the CD e Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts e Entering information with the onscreen letter and number keyboards e Opening a
96. many times the alarm sounds after the first time it goes off Once Twice 3 Times 5 Times and 10 Times Play Every Select how often the alarm sounds Minute 5 minutes 10 minutes and 30 minutes 5 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 183 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip Working with Calendar on your computer Windows If you chose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook check IMPORTANT If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync your email and calendar information synchronize directly with your info on your company s Exchange server You must retrieve email and calendar updates from the VersaMail application they do not update when you synchronize out the online Help in your handheld with your computer Outlook to learn how to use Calendar on your e Scheduling events computer e Rescheduling events Did You Know Mac Check out the e Setting alarms Holiday Files folder in the Palm folder It contains various holidays that you can import into Palm Desktop software on your computer e Deleting events e Marking events as private and hiding them e Printing your schedule e Working with Day View Week View Month View and Year View WINDOWS ONLY To open Calendar on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Calendar on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Calendar on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder and
97. maximum message size or a message with multiple attachments whose total size exceeds your maximum message size requires some extra steps 1 To download a single attachment Get Messees that exceeds the maximum az The remaining message message size and or attachment is 32K Do you want to continue to download a On the message screen it select More Yes b Select Yes to continue downloading the entire message with attachment c When downloading is complete the red paper clip icon appears and More is no longer displayed Save view or install the attachment Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 374 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 To download multiple attachments whose total size exceeds the maximum message size a On the message screen tap the red paper clip icon b Select one of the following To view any downloaded attachments without downloading additional attachments Select No Save view or install the downloaded attachments To continue downloading all attachments Select Yes When downloading is complete the Attachments dialog box appears showing all downloaded attachments Save view or install the downloaded attachments 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 375 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages If you open a message from the Drafts folder you must first select Edit before you can add an attachment You can attach any file type from an expansion c
98. more quickly and you may need to recharge the battery more frequently Increased monthly charges Some wireless providers charge a fee for data transactions If you use one of these providers using the Auto Sync feature can substantially add to your monthly charges This is especially true for POP accounts because POP messages take longer to download than IMAP messages Palm T X Handheld 341 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Inbox icons in the VersaMail application The icons to the left of a message in the Inbox tell you the message s status mM Only the subject header information is downloaded M Part or all of the message text is downloaded gs Part or all of the message text and attachment information is downloaded M Downloaded message has been marked high priority by the sender Setting preferences for getting messages 1 Open the Delivery Options preferences a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Delivery Options Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 342 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Jid You Know The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server If you have a POP email account the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them for example on your desktop or on the web Palm T X Handheld
99. network VPN on your handheld A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate server through the company s firewall security layer Without a VPN you cannot pass through the firewall to gain access to the server You need to set the VPN settings from up a VPN to access a corporate server in either of the following situations your corporate system administrator e Your company s wireless local area network LAN is located outside the firewall Did You Know e Your company s wireless LAN is located inside the firewall but you are trying to access the Once you have installed network from outside the firewall for example from a public location or at home and set up a VPN you can connect or disconnect Check with your company s system administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the VPN from within the web corporate network If you need a VPN you must either use the Enterprise Software link on the browser software installation CD to download and purchase a VPN client or purchase and install a third party VPN client to use this feature Palm T X Handheld 580 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Setting up a VPN account on your handheld 1 Open VPN Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select VPN 2 Set up a VPN account on your handheld a Select the Add Account box b Follow the instructions to enter the settings provided by your corporate system administrator c Sele
100. of the following e To view entries by category open an application that contains categories e To view applications by category go to Applications Display the category you want to view Calendar Select Show Category List and then select the category you want to view from the pick list All other applications Select the category you want to view from the pick list in the upper right corner Tasks All Date KOUA Personal Pick list Business 1 Quarterly profits 2 Marketing strategy 3 Sales meeting minutes 4 Conference info 4 Done 518 CHAPTER 24 Using Categories to Organize Information Related topics If you re having problems Click a link below to learn about these related topics with categories or anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Moving Around e Opening applications e Using menus Calendar Color coding your events in Calendar Media Organizing photos or videos into albums Sharing Beaming a category to another Palm Powered handheld Palm T X Handheld 519 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Checking the current date and time Setting the primary location Choosing secondary locations for other time zones Modifying the locations list Setting the alarm clock Changing the clock display Related topics Palm T X Handheld Forget your watch Or just forget to reset it when y
101. on the right If the ALL category is selected before importing records the category field will be available in the field list Drag the category field to match the data Position on the right Only existing categories will be matched Unmatched categories will be placed in Unfiled Source file character set Windows ANSI z 3 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 118 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Palm T X Handheld MAC ONLY 1 Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats described in the introduction to this section Import the file into Palm Desktop software a Double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer b Click the icon on the toolbar for the application into which you want to import information c Click File and then click Import d Follow the onscreen instructions to import the file Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done 119 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Installing the additional software from the CD Your handheld comes with many applications that are already installed and ready to use The CD that came with your handheld includes lots of other applications to make your handheld even more useful and more fun You can install these applications at any time Palm T X Handheld WINDOWS ONLY 1 2 3 4
102. on the right side of the input area 58 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 gestures Write gestures on LEFT side or across the middle of input area Gesture Stroke Gesture Stroke Cut g Paste o Copy N Undo e gt Palm T X Handheld 59 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters Symbols and other special characters can be written on either side of the input area using the Punctuation Shift stroke If you accidentally enter the Punctuation Shift stroke enter it again to cancel it or wait a moment and it automatically disappears Writing two Punctuation Shift strokes cancels the automatic capitalization of the first letter of a new entry or sentence Palm T X Handheld y Done Enter the Punctuation Shift l stroke When Punctuation Shift is active an indicator appears in the lower right corner of the screen Punctuation Shift indicator Write the symbol or other special character shown in the following table You can write a symbol or special character anywhere in the input area Enter another Punctuation Shift stroke to finish the character and to make it appear more quickly Once the Punctuation Shift indicator disappears you see the character 60 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters Write symbols on EITHER side of input area
103. only after the first send attempt fails you have configured the Keep in mind the following regarding automatic send retry security preferences on your handheld to encrypt e Automatic send retry occurs only if you select Send to send the message manually It doesn t work if you select Get amp Send databases Ti e To select automatic send retry select Yes in the dialog box notifying you that manual send failed Ip Select the notification to e If automatic send retry succeeds the message is moved to the Sent folder view a detailed error message Viewing the e If automatic send retry fails after the third try you must send the message manually error message deletes the notification from the ie Se enn Re Send retry notifications If automatic send retry fails after the third try a notification appears on the Reminders screen Send retry notification features include the following e A broken envelope icon Ef shows that automatic send retry failed A separate notification appears for each email account e You can choose to disable notifications for send retry failures e The Reminders screen shows only the most recent notification for an email account no matter how many automatic send retries have been attempted for that account Palm T X Handheld 353 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Modifying messages in the Outbox If you perform a soft reset A message in the Outbox waiting for
104. or Expansion Card B b Select the Location pick list in the upper right corner and select the location of the photos or videos you want to view In the Thumbnail or List View select Slide Show Slide Show Press Center or tap a photo or video to stop the slide show and return to the Thumbnail or List View 4 Done 196 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Rotating a photo You can also rotate a photo by pressing Down on the 5 way to zoom the 1 Tap Media photo out and then selecting Rotate at the in the input area bottom of the screen 2 Go to the folder or album where the photo is located a Select Handheld E or Expansion Card b Select the Location pick list in the upper right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view 3 Rotate the photo Rotate Picture Select arotation a Select the photo you want in j F the Thumbnail or List View Hic b Open the menus c Select Rotate Picture from the Media menu d Select the rotation you want 4 Tap anywhere in the photo to return to the Thumbnail or List View 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 197 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Viewing and editing photo or video details You can also view details for an entire album including last date 1 changed number of items in the album and size by opening the Album menu and 2 selecting Album Details Tap Media in the input area Go to the folder o
105. or in a meeting Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly Imagine your desk and workstation without cable clutter Wireless technology on your handheld replaces many of the connecting cables with a wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing Connect to other handhelds to share files wirelessly Transfer a document wirelessly from your desktop computer to your handheld for review when you are away from your desk What types of connections can make With built in Wi Fi wireless technology you can make connections at the following times e When you are in range of Wi Fi access points for networks in a corporation or home If these networks are secure you must have the necessary keys to access the network Once you are on the network you can browse the Internet send and receive email or even access network devices such as your computer e When you are in range of Wi Fi access points for public networks such as wireless caf s and city networks you can use the networks to browse the Internet or to send and receive email Some public networks require a subscription fee Check with the public network provider for details e When you are in the range of other Wi Fi devices such as printers or projectors create a device to device network also called ad hoc Wi Fi network between your handheld and the other 264 CHAPTER 14 Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections device Also check the user
106. port number for incoming mail then changes to 995 Use APOP POP accounts only To encrypt your username and password when they travel over the network check this box Some services work properly only if APOP is used while others do not work properly if APOP is used Click the Outgoing Mail tab and verify or edit any of the following settings Outgoing Server Enter the address of your outgoing mail server Port Number The default is 25 the port number most SMTP servers use Secure connection To send outgoing mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection check the box This server requires a secure connection SSL Y Continued Advanced Settings Other General Incoming Mail Outgoing Mail Outgoing Server Outgoing Server ms cruz com Port Number 25 IT This server requires a secure connection SSL T My server requires authentication ESMTP User Name odan Password 323 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages If you synchronize a folder any changes you make to a folder on your handheld for example moving or deleting messages are automatically updated on the mail server and vice versa Palm T X Handheld Cont d Authentication Check the box if the outgoing server SMTP requires ESMTP authentication If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are already filled in based on the acc
107. sastass cascades snaecuesdseaeensanes cocesnshsesscavantnedeeactidseeazaneendess 55 Grafiti 2 GO StUNES eies aesa aaa aaaea aa adsis 59 Writing Graffiti 2 symbols and other special characters s es 60 Graffiti 2 symbols and special characters sssssssssssssserserrisrrsssssree 61 Writing a Graffiti 2 SHOMCut ccciisiscecisssiseesseteasvescccvcavssarieunnsscccetedavascess 62 Graffiti 2 ShortCuts sicciiesscesssadecscessanzcocesssnadeten ssvevecocessanvancedbansicienssuariis 63 Using the onscreen keyboard cecceeeeeseeseeneeeceeeeeeeeeeseeneenneaaeaeeeeees 64 Entering info from Contacts into another application sesser 66 Editing Informatio sissisodan anadai 68 Selecting information ccccccesssseceeessseseeeeseeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseseeeeeeseesseeeeeess 68 Copying and pasting informatio sssrsainirisaangise nana 69 Deleting informatio cosasnin sena a SRi 70 Related TOPICS siccietesniesdeczesdescausoessssiuetedscestaitun aia a S aaa AAEN 71 Chapter 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer ge dain E EEE EE E EE 72 Why synchronize information ccssssccccisssssccessssssccessstseeccevnnssesceesseesesccess 73 What information is synchronized cccceeceeesteceeeeeneeeeeeesenaaeeeesseenaes 74 HOW t SVNCHIONIZE dsrs sated innia 75 When would I use each method cceeesseceeeeeneeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaaeeeeeeenas 76 Synchronizing with a cable or IR port cscssscccstissccessisssecssessasseeseensseseeesene 78 Synchroniz
108. sccccuesGasedccactssnedeccevetecectas sated conessaedcausvstacceuessaeeds 392 Working With root folders sis secscsersiccedicarecteasaestcckcaesndeeanpiassegecemennne cee 392 Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL ccscecccseseeeeeeessseeeeeeseseeeeeeeeees 392 Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync cccceceeeeesesteeeeeeeeeaes 393 What do I need to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 006 393 How does a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account differ from other ACCOUNTS cccecccesesteeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeesaeeeeeseneeeeeeeees 394 Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account nss 395 Setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account on VOUF COMPUTE fisssicccscsavicedicendy enar a NEE EEEE a E E aaa 395 Setting up an account on your handheld ccceceecseeeeeeeeneeeeseeeees 398 Setting advanced mail options on your handheld sssr 401 Getting email MESSAGES ippies braden irodasi aaide 402 Sending MESSAGES sviiss cccssssssccccssesssccesesasceccsesasedeesvaseesccuevssecceeeees sens 404 Previewing AtLACHIMENUS cesssicscasuns secdedenay sana ionieni aani ea n EE Eaa 404 Working with meeting invitations sssssssssssssssssssssrrsnnsnssnssrrnennnnnnn 405 Working with Calendar events 2 e sseeeeccececeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeaeeeeaeees 407 Synchronizing Calendar events using Microsoft Exchange ANGLIVE SVING E E scucesatetedeassantadeat eadcaseedsaancedeveanes 408 Updating Calendar events when you de
109. sure that Sort by is set to Manual If you choose to view your memos alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize the memos on your handheld still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting In other words the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your handheld Note Pad I m having problems listing notes the way want to see them If you cannot manually arrange the order of notes on the list screen select Preferences from the Options menu and make sure that Sort by is set to Manual If you choose to view your notes alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then synchronize the notes on your handheld still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting In other words the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your handheld Media can t find the Media icon in Applications Select the pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View and select Multimedia You should now see an icon for the Media application In Favorites View the entry associated with the Media application is called Photos amp Videos You can edit the Favorites list to change this to Media as well as to create or change any other favorite file folder web link or application Palm T X Handheld 619 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Pocket Tunes would like better quality sound during playback Saving music files at a lower bit rate
110. text or sidebars take you to other sections of this guide The In this chapter list on the first page of each chapter contains links that send you to a specific section Palm T X Handheld xxi Sidebars Before You Begin Things you must complete before you can do the steps described in a procedure or group of procedures Tip A suggestion on how to use a feature more fully a shortcut a pointer to a related feature Did You Know An interesting fact about the topic being described may include a link to more information Key Term A technical term related to the topic being described The term may appear in this guide or only on your handheld User Guide A pointer to the User Guide on the web where you can learn about more things you can do with an application or feature Tips amp Tricks A pointer to a website where you can share info with other handheld users and learn the latest tips tricks and more Support A pointer to the web where you can find help if you experience problems with the features discussed in the chapter or with your handheld Palm T X Handheld xxii CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer What s in the box System requirements Step 1 Connecting and charging your handheld Step 2 Setting up your handheld for the first time Step 3 Installing your software Synchronizing your handheld and your computer Switching to another
111. the Play button e To play a different song tap Choose Song and select a song from the list Pocket Tunes Electric Angel Dream Progress indicator Awakening i f s 0 32 4 43 Next song Go volume Shuffle playlist Play Pause Choose song a Previous song 5 Songs Awakening 4 43 Blue Rondo ALa Turk 3 37 Drawing Down the Moon 5 20 When you ve finished listening tap Stop 4 Done 222 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Managing playlists You can create dozens of playlists with your favorite songs Creating a playlist 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Open the Edit Playlist screen a Open the menus b Select Actions menu and then select Manage Playlists c Select New Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 223 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music The Add Songs to Playlist screen displays all songs on your handheld and on your expansion card To add all the songs in an album to your playlist select Add Song select an album and then select Select All Palm T X Handheld 3 Create a playlist Edit Playlist a b P a b C d Enter a name for the playlist Follow The Dream Select Add Song Select the songs you want to include on the playlist Select OK ut the songs in the order you want to hear them Select a song you want to move Select Up or Down to move the song up or down one slot Repeat this process unti
112. the body of the email message In some cases you can select the URL to open the graphic Tip Because downloading large messages can consume handheld resources the VersaMail application displays the size of the message and asks if you want to continue downloading any message that exceeds your maximum message size up to a total size of 5MB Palm T X Handheld Cont d Maximum message size Enter the maximum size of an incoming email message in kilobytes KB The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default but you can enter any size up to 5000KB approximately 5 megabytes or 5MB including attachments The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments Message Format Select to retrieve messages in HTML or plain text format If you select HTML any messages sent to you in HTML format are displayed with basic HTML formatting intact Other messages are displayed as plain text If you select Plain Text all messages are displayed as plain text regardless of the format in which they were sent The default setting is HTML N NOTE The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only with all HTML tags stripped even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML 4 Done 344 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Reading email messages If you use the 5 way To
113. the lower left corner of the screen to create a new entry e Click an existing entry and then click Edit in the lower left corner of the screen 3 Enter the information and then click OK 4 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 114 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY 1 Open an application a Double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder on your computer b Click the icon in the toolbar to open the application 7 amp Paimpesktop file Edit view Create Locate Hotsync Window Help zw a y g a New Address a New ToDo Ta S P Qurma BD 00 Date Book john doe Monday December 6 2004 Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 115 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 2 Do one of the following e Click New in the upper left corner of the screen to create a new entry e Click an existing entry and then click Edit in the upper left corner of the screen 3 Enter the information and then click OK 4 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 116 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Importing information from other applications Do you have information on your computer in spreadsheets or databases and want to transfer it to your handheld Don t spend time retyping it Instead import the info into Palm Desktop software P
114. the same application in Palm Desktop software You can insert the CD at any time to choose synchronization with Outlook Ip if you did not do so during the initial installation You can synchronize your handheld with your NOTE You can also set up the VersaMail application to synchronize it with Outlook computer wirelessly using the built in Wi Fi You can synchronize more than one handheld with your computer For example family members and Bluetooth wireless can all synchronize their handhelds with the same copy of Palm Desktop software or some can technologies on your choose to synchronize with Palm Desktop software while others synchronize with Outlook Just handheld make sure that each handheld has its own username the desktop software reads the username and recognizes the handheld during synchronization Loss of info may occur from sharing the same username Palm T X Handheld 74 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Key Term How to synchronize HotSync Technology You can synchronize your handheld with your computer in the following ways that allows you to synchronize the e Wirelessly using Wi Fi Windows only or Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld information on your handheld with the e Using the sync cable attached to your handheld and your computer inf ati A ee e Using your handheld s infrared IR port computer Ti e Using another computer on a networ
115. the same way ActiveSync accounts that you send messages from any other type of account However Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync if you turn off your accounts feature a Live Outbox If a message isn t sent successfully the first time the message handheld or go outside is stored in the Outbox and VersaMail keeps trying to send the message until it is successful a coverage area while a Because of the Live Outbox feature you do not need to set up scheduled sending retry for a message is still in the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account Outbox the VersaMail application will try to Previewing attachments send the message when you turn your handheld Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts let you view a list back on or re enter a of all attachments to a message with approximate file size A coverage area so you can decide which ones you want to download Unlike Subj Interview schedule l other accounts you do not need to fully download a message Tip to view the list of attachments it appears dimmed at the let me know if anyone is interested bottom of the message screen whether or not the message is fully downloaded Also unlike other accounts a paper clip icon appears next to a message with an attachment in the Inbox whether or not the attachment is fully downloaded You can add names and email addresses directly to Contacts from the To field of an invitation Done Reply Fwd Delete Select an attachment fro
116. them you can easily check to see what time it is where they are Palm T X Handheld Choosing secondary locations for other time zones Set World Clock to display the date and time for two other locations 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Select the pick list next to one of World Clock the secondary locations v San Francisco Thu Dec 17 2009 11 14am Pick list 3 Select the location you want to use as the new secondary location If you need more choices modify the locations list 4 Done 524 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Modifying the locations list If you know what you re 1 Y You can edit the locations list so that the locations you use most often are easy to find looking for in a long pick list use Graffiti 2 writing to find it faster Adding new locations Enter the first letter of the word and then locate your item 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Open the Edit List dialog box a Select a location pick list b Select Edit List 3 Add the new location ecations Select the closest location in a Select Add the desired time zone USA Central Dallas USA Central Evansville b Scroll through the list to USA Centra ae woe entra louston select a location that is in the USA Central Managua same time zone as the city USA Central Minneapolis USA Central New Orleans USA Central Wichita c Select OK you want to add
117. to scroll down a bit but you should now see an icon for each of the applications on your handheld e Some of the applications that come with your handheld are not preinstalled You need to install these extra applications from the software installation CD e If you have an expansion card inserted in the expansion slot on your handheld the application you want may be installed on the card instead of on your handheld To view the applications installed on the card select the pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View and select the expansion card s name from the list Palm T X Handheld 609 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Entering information My handheld doesn t respond to taps correctly If your handheld is not responding to taps correctly you need to align the screen When I tap Menu on the status bar nothing happens e Tap the upper left corner of the screen to try to open the menus e Align the screen and try tapping Menu again e If nothing happens you may be in an application or screen that does not use menus Switch to a different application and try tapping Menu If it works in the second application then the first does not use menus e If tapping Menu does not work in the second application try aligning the screen again can t get my handheld to recognize my handwriting For your handheld to recognize handwriting input with the stylus you need to use Graffiti 2 writing Use the Graf
118. to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket Tunes application on your handheld Palm T X Handheld 216 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Before You Begin Transferring MP3 files to your handheld Windows only You must set up Windows Media The Pocket Tunes software that comes with your handheld is compatible with the popular MP3 Player to transfer MP3 audio file format If your MP3 files are already on your computer s hard drive you need to transfer files them to your handheld to listen to them on your handheld If an expansion card is inserted in the handheld Windows Media Player copies the MP3 files to the expansion card If you don t have an expansion card inserted the MP3 files are copied to handheld memory If you have more than one expansion card Pocket Tunes chooses the card with the most available space 1 Prepare your computer and your handheld a Connect your handheld and your computer to the USB sync cable b On your handheld go to Favorites and select Music l amp OPTIONAL Insert an expansion card into the handheld Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 217 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Tin You can also use a card 2 reader accessory sold separately to transfer MP3 files from your computer to your b Select the Sync tab handheld Select your handheld a Open Windows Media Player on your computer c Select Palm Handheld from the handheld drop down list Sync
119. types of events For example make all your family appointments green your work appointments blue and your appointments with friends yellow Palm T X Handheld 161 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Managing your color codes Each color code represents a category of events You can assign each category a name and select which color you want to assign to it Palm T X Handheld 1 Open Day View a Press Calendar O b Select the Day View icon LJ Open the Edit Categories dialog box a From Day View select the event description b Select Details c Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories Y Continued Tee lt sit aT lFls gt Category marker Day View icon Event Details i Time ni Date Alarm Location Category eBusiness oPersonal Repeat Unfiled Private MLIET G COO Caneel Caere E 162 CHAPTER 7 Palm T X Handheld DEWET L AITTE ELi 3 Select the color code for the category a Select New or select a category and then select Edit Edit Categories i Edit Category Personal Enter a new category name ERE Eee oe feet b Enter or edit the category name c Select the color you want to give this category d Select OK and then select OK two more times 4 Done The category name and its color coded marker appear on the category list 163 CHAPTER 7 DEUET L DITTE OFT ELA Assigning a color code to an event
120. user profiles 13 displaying tasks 246 entering information 115 handheld system requirements 3 importing 119 installing applications 75 112 installing extra software from CD 25 installing handheld software 7 121 opening calendars 184 synchronizing handheld 75 82 104 108 synchronizing with user profiles 16 transferring MP3 files to handheld 219 troubleshooting problems 605 turning off IR port 83 writing memos 253 mail folders 358 360 mail See email mail servers 308 318 327 Mail Service pick list 326 398 maintenance information 596 Make Default check box 110 Manual synchronization option 103 manually locking device 498 501 marking information as private 490 marking message status 370 masking private entries 489 491 492 T X Handheld math calculators 24 Maximum Message Size option 321 344 MCI connections 571 Media application adding photo to contact 131 backing up information in 27 benefits of 190 companion applications for 28 displaying photos or videos 192 organizing photos and videos 201 overview 190 related topics for 212 transferring information to 77 Media icon 24 619 media player See Windows Media Player meeting invitations 405 memory 124 608 freeing 447 purging calendar events 170 memory button Calculator 484 memory cards 594 memory clear button Calculator 484 memory recall button Calculator 484 memos See also notes Memos application adding contact information to 138 249 backing up 27 creatin
121. username you use to access your email Username If your email provider appears on the Mail b Select the Password box Service pick list the enter your email account Protocol pick list is not password and then select OK displayed c Select Next Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 326 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Your oe mail 5 Enter your email address and server is also called your mail server info POP or IMAP server your outgoing mail server is N NOTE Ifyou chose a also called your Simple common email provider from Mail Transfer Protocol the Mail Services pick list on SMTP server Check the Account Setup screen this with your email service screen is already filled in provider if you need the semana theta savers a Enter your email address b Enter the names of your te ee mail servers Some service providers such as Yahoo require c Select Next you to pay for a POP account in order to download email 6 Select Done messages from your account to your handheld 4 pene Palm T X Handheld VersaMail Review your settings and edit if necessary Email Address 327 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages lip Check with your email provider or your system administrator for any incoming or outgoing mail settings you do not know Also check to see if your account uses SSL APOP or ESMTP or whether you need to change the default port number Pa
122. with 610 graphics files 435 440 GSM mobile phones 290 562 H handheld controls described 19 customizing 26 do s and don ts 31 preinstalled applications for 23 recharging 31 recharging battery 32 turning on and off 21 viewing applications on 19 viewing information on 19 Wi Fi radio 22 Handheld overwrites Desktop option 107 109 handhelds charging battery for 4 596 connecting to PCs 8 disconnecting from sync cable 81 do s and don ts 596 maintenance information for 596 not responding 597 recharging battery 4 5 reconnecting sync cable 81 resetting 597 setting power preferences for 559 561 561 turning on and off 6 559 handwriting 256 610 See also Graffiti 2 writing hard resets 599 601 607 header options email 389 headphone jack 21 596 headphones 31 557 596 headsets 21 596 help 17 58 71 127 497 631 Help menu 612 hiding address fields 422 currency symbols 480 private entries 491 652 highlighting menu commands 41 See also selection highlight high speed connections 296 high speed data services 569 high speed wireless carrier 287 hints 497 See also help History area 485 Holiday Files folder 184 holidays 152 154 156 home page 425 437 439 Home Page icon 437 Home Page setting web browser 439 Home screen See Applications View hosts 574 HotSync Controls tab 82 104 HotSync icon 23 HotSync log 79 105 HotSync Manager See also synchronizing HotSync manager 90 installing 75 78 not responding 6
123. your handheld 4 Done When synchronization is complete a message appears at the top of your handheld screen Be patient synchronization may take up to a few minutes Palm T X Handheld 83 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Before You Begin You need to perform the following e You must set up a Wi Fi network connection e You must turn on the Wi Fi application on your handheld and connect to a Wi Fi network e If your computer is behind your company s Internet firewall you may need to set up a virtual private network VPN Check with your system administrator for information Palm T X Handheld Synchronizing using wireless technology Wi Fi and Bluetooth wireless technology provide a easy way to connect to your computer without cables Synchronizing using Wi Fi wireless technology WINDOWS ONLY 1 2 Go to Applications and select HotSync ON Select Network Wayne Hoff Last HotSync 9 8 08 9 10 pm using Cradle Cable Network wv WaynePC Y Continued 84 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 Tap the Service pick list and Wayne Hoff select your PC If you have Last HotSync 9 8 08 9 10 pm synchronized with your using Cradle Cable computer using a cable your PC is listed If your PC is not listed select Select PC and follow the Network HotSync Setup wizard to add your PC 4 Tap the HotSync icon on your hand
124. 04 uninstalling Palm One software 126 writing memos 253 Windows Media Player 28 214 wireless carriers 287 connections 264 286 411 features 276 295 service providers 569 synchronization 89 265 390 wireless connections 286 See also Wi Fi wireless connections Bluetooth devices wireless synchronization 75 287 Word documents 186 188 attaching to email 376 transferring to handheld 77 Word files 24 creating and viewing 187 synchronizing 73 word searches 44 word selection 68 World Clock benefits of 520 changing display for 530 changing locations list for 525 displaying 26 T X Handheld selecting primary location for 545 setting alarms for 528 setting alarms with 165 528 World Clock icon 26 521 WPA PSK encryption 273 writing area 49 writing in your own handwriting 255 writing tool 21 31 596 writing with Graffiti 2 characters 48 62 Y Year View 177 year selecting 522 548 yearly events 154 yearly tasks 237 239 Z ZIP files 617 zooming 194 668
125. 13 06 KIBWM GEC that include more than one person these person s names appear in the With field of the event Details screen when you synchronize with your Duration handheld You can send f Cancel email to one or more of the participants directly Category marker Hour Minute from the Details screen list list You cannot edit these names on your handheld c Tap the hour and minute lists to select the time the appointment ends 3 Description Start time 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the appointment Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Palm T X Handheld 151 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling an event without a start time Keep track of events that take place on a particular date but not at a particular time For example you may want to enter holidays anniversaries and deadlines If you need to reserve a date before you know the details of the appointment you can schedule an event without a start time Palm T X Handheld 1 Open Day Vien Aug 31 06 sM wis a Press Calendar b Select the Day View icon a Day View icon Go To Select the date of the event a Select Go To b Select the arrows to select the year 12 GED 14 15 16 19 20 21 22 23 c Select the month 26 27 28 29 30 d Select the date Y Continued 152 CHAPTER 7 DEUET L DITTE OFT ELA You can change an event 3 A
126. 157 tasks 237 239 repeating events changing 167 deleting 168 169 displaying 181 scheduling 154 155 repeating tasks 236 238 241 242 Reply To Address option 364 replying to email 362 rescheduling events 166 167 reserving dates 152 reset button 22 598 599 resetting clock 522 547 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 555 handheld 597 local preferences 545 547 passwords 494 preset connections 562 preset formats 549 quick buttons 543 screen fonts 539 server profiles 570 resizing text 250 restarting device See reset button restoring archived items 127 defaults 543 information 497 498 601 restricting device connections 288 restrictions 597 606 retrying Auto Sync 341 email delivery 353 T X Handheld rotary dialing 566 rotating the screen 30 running out of memory 124 running out of space 586 S Save Page command 434 Save Page dialog box 434 saved web pages 429 430 431 434 saving appointments 151 battery power 559 contacts 132 139 files 433 information 36 127 611 memos 249 252 notes 256 synchronization settings 108 110 tasks 234 242 243 web cookies 445 web pages 434 scheduled sending retry email 309 schedules 149 171 180 545 See also appointments calendar scheduling appointments 150 151 Auto Sync 336 337 341 backup and synchronization 8 events 150 152 157 182 reminders 132 150 repeating tasks 236 238 untimed events 153 scheduling conflicts 149 screen adding photos as b
127. 16 restoring information from 601 running automatically 103 starting 23 103 synchronization options for 103 105 turning off 103 HotSync Manager icon 89 94 HotSync manager icon 75 78 80 612 HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide 612 HotSync screen 81 83 94 97 HotSync Software Setup window 104 HotSync technology 27 75 HTM files 435 T X Handheld HTML files 434 435 HTML messages 321 HTML viewer 434 hyperlinks 425 See also URLs l icons application 536 543 Command toolbar 43 Inbox VersaMail 342 missing 609 Outbox VersaMail 354 Wi Fi wireless connections 268 ICS files 117 idle timeouts 574 image files 191 435 440 IMAP mail folders 390 391 392 IMAP protocol 308 317 326 IMAP servers 318 327 371 import fields 118 importing contacts 148 information 12 117 119 Inbox 329 355 Inbox icons 342 incoming mail options 328 401 incoming mail servers 308 318 327 incompatible applications 628 incorrect dates and time 609 Info command 122 Info dialog box 122 information accessing 37 adding contact 138 148 adding owner 558 beaming application specific 466 categorizing 511 515 copying and pasting 69 deleting 70 displaying 19 editing 68 entering 19 21 47 48 551 finding 44 hard resets and 498 losing 40 managing 27 protecting 586 providing emergency 512 sharing 21 131 460 469 updating 72 viewing by category 518 infrared port See IR port Infrared setting 566 initialization string
128. 29 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Setting background preferences 1 Go to Favorites and select Music 2 Open the menus 3 Select Background Prefs and set screen preferences Enable background play When you are playing music you can continue using any of the other handheld applications This feature is not available when viewing a slide show in the Media application Bring up console with pen swipe A pen swipe between the selected icons in the input area brings up the pTunes console 4 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 230 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Working with Windows Media Player on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use Windows Media Player WMP on your computer to play and manage your songs Learn how to use WMP on your computer by using the online Help in WMP The online Help includes info about the following topics e Learning about the parts of the WMP window e Finding media e Playing media e Saving and burning media e WMP premium services e Preferences e Troubleshooting Palm T X Handheld 231 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Support Related topics If you re having problems with Pocket Tunes go to www pocket tunes com Click the link below to learn about these related topics Expansion e Inserting and removing expansion cards Cards e Naming expansion cards e Viewing the contents of a card Managing e Installing the Windows Media Player software and plug in on your Info handheld and
129. 39 data entry 21 64 input area for 19 methods for 47 48 551 personal computers and 112 shortcuts for 73 databases 117 Date amp Time Preferences screen 545 547 date formats 549 550 dates assigning to appointments 150 154 assigning to repeating tasks 238 239 changing 166 472 522 checking 521 displaying current 524 displaying due 245 displaying in World Clock 530 entering current 62 545 548 flagging series of 157 incorrect 609 recording completion 245 reserving in calendar 152 resetting 545 547 scheduling reminders for 132 selecting on calendar 234 setting alarms for specific 165 236 259 setting due 234 235 setting location specific 522 545 setting repeat intervals for 155 156 157 166 setting sequence 550 sorting by 260 viewing scheduled 171 174 175 176 viewing specific 175 Day View displaying overlapping events in 178 scheduling appointments on 150 scheduling events for 152 selecting 173 setting display options for 164 178 180 setting timeframes for 182 Day View icon 150 Daylight Saving Time entry box 526 Daylight Savings settings 522 Days To Synchronize Mail option 321 DBA files 117 Deactivate Keylock button 559 deadlines 152 decimal separators 550 Default Currency pick list 476 default settings overwriting 107 109 restoring 543 selecting 103 Default View pick list 179 Delay command 578 delays 500 561 after breaking network connection 607 after reset 609 Delete command 124 Delete Contact
130. 524 email attachments 375 434 events 164 181 182 expansion card information 26 expense reports 23 expenses 480 hidden or masked entries 492 HotSync log 79 images 435 information 19 518 memos 250 notes 260 PDF files 24 personal calendars 149 schedules 171 173 175 176 slide shows 195 space information 122 123 tasks 171 180 240 244 245 unread messages 171 180 URLs 424 version information 123 web pages 421 422 423 426 435 World Clock 26 530 DNS defined 574 T X Handheld DNS addresses 274 282 574 Do not allow wakeup command 303 Do Nothing option synchronization 107 109 do s and don ts 31 596 Documents application 24 benefits of 186 creating files 187 editing files 187 opening files from 188 overview 186 related topics for 189 viewing files 187 Documents To Go application 73 187 See also Documents application domain name system DNS 574 Download attachments option 321 Download dialog box 433 download options 433 440 downloading attachments 371 372 374 email 334 343 files 433 440 images 440 large messages 372 374 multiple attachments 375 web pages 433 drafts 348 dragging applications 111 112 drained batteries 606 drawing freehand 206 255 drawing tools 206 drivers 562 drop down lists See lists due dates 234 235 239 245 dummy expansion card 587 Duplicate Contact command 137 duplicating contact information 133 137 duration 151 E eBooks 24 Edit Bookmarks command 430 431
131. 599 uniform resource locators See URLs uninstalling applications 608 Palm Desktop software 125 unread email messages 171 180 370 Unread pick list 356 unrecognized devices 288 unscheduled events 153 unscheduled time slots 180 untimed events 132 152 153 157 181 update options 107 109 updating information 73 106 owner information 558 third party applications 8 updating information 72 upgrades 4 7 122 upgrading email accounts 306 uppercase letters 51 53 URL defined 421 URLs accessing web pages with 421 422 auto completion option for 442 changing 428 430 displaying 424 selecting in email messages 365 USB port 8 USB sync cable 78 custom connections and 566 device setup and 4 665 disconnecting 612 synchronizing and 612 Use calling card check box 571 Use proxy check box 449 Use Secure Connection option 323 328 329 401 Use short preamble box 282 user profiles 11 16 usernames assigning to handhelds 11 Bluetooth 294 email accounts and 306 308 email addresses and 570 finding in email addresses 326 hard resets and 599 network connections and 298 searching for 138 service profiles and 573 synchronization and 311 synchronize 79 synchronizing and 75 upgrades and 7 validating 333 Users folder 125 user specific information 11 v vacations 157 validating usernames and passwords 333 VCF files 117 VCS files 117 VersaMail application 25 adding attachments 376 378 downloading attachments 372 374
132. 7 411 recently visited web pages 425 recharging battery 4 5 32 561 606 recharging handheld 31 recipes 252 Recipient List screen 350 351 reconnecting sync cable 81 Record menu 466 recovering memory 608 recurring events 150 redialing phone numbers 454 related items categorizing 512 Remember Last Category check box 536 reminders See also alarms canceling 529 creating 255 scheduling 132 150 setting alarms as 528 specifying notes as 258 Reminders screen 340 353 remote access accounts 569 remote connections 386 remote devices 302 remote servers 95 448 569 removing ActiveSync accounts 408 applications 124 594 appointments 168 bookmarks 430 categories 514 confirmation messages 261 connections 561 564 contacts 139 desktop software 7 email 365 366 368 388 email accounts 332 email filters 385 events 168 170 514 expansion cards 587 expense items 477 479 files from handheld 127 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 555 information 70 127 498 594 608 locations 527 mail folders 360 memos 252 notes 261 Palm Desktop software 125 passwords 497 playlists 228 private entries 497 repeating tasks 242 saved web pages 430 selection highlight 37 39 service profiles 575 songs 227 tasks 242 243 Rename Card dialog box 592 Rename Custom Fields dialog box 135 renaming categories 513 expansion cards 592 mail folders 360 preset connections 561 web pages 434 Repeat icon 173 repeat intervals 660 calendar 154
133. 7 If you selected Yes in step 6 Network Service Setup are not sure about one or i Select the area where your more of the items to enter a Select the pick lists and then phone service is registered in step 7 select the correct information v USA for your wireless service f provider Select your carrier v your carrier b Select Next and then select Done 8 If you selected No in step 6 a Select Next b Enter the phone number you use to dial in to your Internet service provider and then enter the username for your dial up account c Select the Password box enter your account password and select OK This is the password you use to access your dial up account it is not your passkey d Select Next and then select Done 4 Done See the next procedure for steps on using your phone connection to browse the web or to send and receive email messages Palm T X Handheld 294 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth wireless Before You Begin You must set up an tech nology email account on your handheld before you can send or receive email messages After you set up a connection with a mobile phone you can send and receive email or browse the web wirelessly using this connection N NOTE Bluetooth functionality must be on before you can use it to make wireless connections You can select Bluetooth controls on the status bar Open the email applicat
134. 72 You can save any type of attached file regardless of file type Palm T X Handheld 3 Select one of the following options for working with the downloaded attachment Attachment name Tap the attachment name at the bottom of the message screen to view it in the default viewer on your handheld Folder icon Tap the folder icon to the left of the attachment name to open a menu of tasks you can do with the attachment CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Inbox d 1 of 134 gt Paper clip icon From Brian Yao Subj marketing tools Check out these great new tools for marketing Call me if you have any questions Brian D Boost Your Marketing d 26 KB e View Install or Unzip depending on the attachment file type e Save to Card to save the attachment to an expansion card inserted in your handheld s expansion card slot e Select Viewer to select the application you want to use to view the attachment When you finish with the attachment do one of the following Done button appears on screen Select Done This returns you to the Attachments dialog box where you can select another attachment No Done button appears Tap VersaMail in the input area to return to the Inbox of the account you were viewing 4 Done 373 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Downloading large attachments Downloading and viewing a message with a single attachment that exceeds your
135. 9 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Before You Begin Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection If you have an IR phone you must download the Phone Link application from the web Go to IMPORTANT To set up a phone connection you must have a GSM or GPRS mobile phone enabled with data services http www palm com You can form a partnership between your handheld and your mobile phone Once you have set up us support downloads the trusted devices connection you automatically connect to your phone when you want a phonelink html to Bluetooth connection download the software Partnership Two 1 Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar devices for example your handheld and your 2 mobile phone that can Open the Phone Setup Phone Setup g connect to each other dialog box Select a phone to connect to because each device can find the same passkey on the other device Once you form a partnership with a device you do not need to enter a passkey to connect with that device d Select Phone Connection again Partnership is also know as paired e Select Next relationship pairing Trusted Device and Y Continued Trusted Pair on some devices a Select Prefs Manufacturer v Select b Select Setup Devices c Select Phone Setup Palm T X Handheld 290 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections If you receive a message 3 Select the phone you want to connect to tha
136. ANES 21 Back orea E a A eaa a e 22 What software do have cecececceeeeceenceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeeseeaas 23 Personal information 0 ccceceeeeeeeeeeeceeee eee ee ee eee aaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeneaaes 23 PRO GUCEIVITY sigsigan n aa taa a ia lees i aa aani aa aaa 24 Multimedia and entertainment sssssssssssssssirssnssrssssrtsrnnnnnnnnnnnnsrnnennnnnnn 24 CGOnnEectivity isare aiia a aa aia aad AE a 25 CUStOMIZA OM sissi soitan aa Ki Adin 26 D sktop ofisin dda aa aaa daaa 27 Using the Status Daf sionis annda aiia 29 Rotating the SCTE IN raniged a 30 Do s and COMMS vecssissaceaceestcscncpens ens casienSsnequs acces oda na danara 31 DO Sis cgaccusestcatacnenssesagaesssezaeetehanaminasks a 31 DON TS disias oaea aa ea a a aa n a aa aaa 31 Conserving battery POWE sciiti eisean againd aia ia adoa 32 Related TOPICS scsciccsivssccatnessssccvtens scseeesabssacgncente aaa n RAEAN a DEE 33 Chapter 3 Moving Around in Applications 34 Opening applications ceeeeeccesssteeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeneeeeeeeessesaeeeeeseneeeeeness 35 USING Favorites View 5 sciicsesssaviact nsecmeapeehssnduazenacesccneesneecxagnessncdeasnasecuns 35 Using Applications WiGW sssississscceseticcesie rhea tecate onsa aa oaa ooa e 36 Switching between applications cccccccessseecceeeseeeeeesssseeneesessseeeeens 36 Using the 5 Way MaVigator sx tcccsassicecessnecanexsnsndenava asiaani 37 Moving around with the 5 way 0 ccc
137. Addr City State Zip Code and Country You can designate an address as work W home H or other O By default the first address is designated as work amp OPTIONAL Add a photo e nied a Tap the Picture box Tap here b Select and add a photo from Palm Media 7 wv Home Y Continued GATE 555 616 2117 Details Q 131 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts If you want a reminder a DAER a e 4 eats Contact Edit ETT the Reminder box enter the number of days a Select the Birthday box before the birthday that you want to see the b Use the left and right arrows reminder and then select to move to and select the birth OOS nnan OK year Hold down either arrow n to scroll quickly through the years Birthdays you enter in Contacts appear as untimed events in Calendar If you update the birthday in Contacts 5 it automatically updates in Calendar as well c Select the month and date After you finish entering all the information you want select Done 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the contact Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Palm T X Handheld 132 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Entering additional contact information Additional fields appear The Contact Edit screen displays certain fields by default You can customize the Contact Edit in a contact only if you screen to display additional fields enter info into them
138. Customizing Your Handheld Tip Adding plug in applications For more info on creating You can create plug in applications containing script commands that extend the functionality of plug in applications the built in script commands A plug in application is a standard PRC application that you install contact Developer on your handheld just like any other application After you install the plug in application you can Support at PalmSource use the new script commands in a login script For example you might use a plug in application in the following situations e You need the login script to properly respond to different connection scenarios defined by the authentication server e You want to perform conditional tests and branching as part of the login process Plug in applications have the following characteristics e Written in C language e Compiled into a handheld executable e Called properly from a login script e Able to return control to a login script after it terminates e Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS software such as Metrowerks CodeWarrior tools Palm T X Handheld 579 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Before You Begin Setting up a VPN You must purchase and install a compatible VPN client onto your handheld You also need If you want to use your handheld to access your corporate email account or other files on your corporate server you may need to set up a virtual private
139. D amp Media Pocket Tunes Handmark Solitaire Power by Hand eReader View and organize photos and videos Carry music create playlists and listen to music on your handheld This application works with the Windows Media Player desktop application that you can install from the CD Windows only download required for Windows Media Player Both Mac and Windows users can use Pocket Tunes on the handheld Expansion card sold separately required for Mac users to listen to music on their handheld Enjoy hours of entertainment with this solitaire game Purchase and download eBooks from the web so you can read them when you want where you want 24 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Tip G AudiblePlayer Listen to newspapers audio books public radio and more Windows only To install extra software download requires Internet connection additional fees may apply from the CD insert the CD into your CD drive Sue and then do one of the Connectivity following These applications let you stay connected by browsing the web checking your email and more Windows On the They may already be installed on your handheld or you may need to install them from the CD Discover your device screen click Add wick Wi Ficontrols Set up wireless connections to a Wi Fi network for sending and receiving software to your device information Access these controls from the status bar Mac Double click the Bluetooth Set up wir
140. Desktop or Outlook When using Calendar with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync note the following important features Time zones Time zones are always included for Calendar events when you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync When you synchronize your handheld with the Exchange server and download new events the time zone information is included with each event If you travel to a different time zone the event times are automatically adjusted in Calendar on your handheld when you update your location on your handheld Attendees For meetings you can see a full list of attendees to the meeting From the Day View select the event and then select Details Select the With field Ry NOTE The Attendees field does not appear if the event is not a meeting It is not available for events you create on your handheld Palm T X Handheld 407 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know Synchronizing Calendar events using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync All Calendar events are When you synchronize Calendar events with the info on Exchange server all of the following also purged from your take place handheld when you change the time interval e Any events you create on your handheld are synchronized with info on the server for retrieving email for a Microsoft Exchange NOTE You cannot create meeting invitations on your handheld You can only receive meeting ActiveSync account or invitations sent to you when you change the u
141. Desktop software is running You must open Palm Desktop software in order for HotSync manager to run Manual You must manually turn HotSync manager on each time you want your computer to respond to a synchronization request Click OK 4 Done 103 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Setting synchronization options MAC ONLY 1 Open the synchronization options screen a Double click the HotSync manager icon G in the Palm folder b Click the HotSync Controls tab 2 Select the synchronization options you want 09 HotSync Software Setup f HotSyne Controls Connection Settings HotSync Enabled Q Disabled Status HotSync software is enabled To disable the HotSync software click the Disabled radio button above Listening on USB and PalmConnect PA HotSync Options B ync Op vw Enable HotSync software at system startup C Show more detail in HotSync Log Ww Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 104 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Cont d Palm T X Handheld HotSync Enabled Disabled Sets your computer to respond to synchronization requests from your handheld Enable HotSync software at system startup Sets your computer to automatically respond to synchronization requests each time you start your computer If this option is not selected you must open HotSync manager and select the Enabled option before you can sync
142. F this a uture records apply the changes to All occurrences i Current Apply your changes to only the selected instance of the Cancel_ repeating event Future Apply your changes to the selected event and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date All Apply your changes to the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating event 4 Done 167 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Deleting events If an appointment is canceled you can delete it from your schedule When deleting a repeating event you can indicate you want to delete just the selected event or to also delete other instances of the event You can also delete all your old events that are before a selected time frame You can also delete a specific event by selecting the event selecting Details and then selecting Delete Many people find it useful to refer to old events for tax purposes If you save an archive copy of your deleted events you can refer to them later by importing them Palm T X Handheld Deleting a specific event 1 2 Press Calendar O Go to the event you want to delete a From Day View select Go To b Select the year month and date of the event c Select the event description Open the Delete Event Delete Event dialog box Delete selected event a Open the menus M Save archive copy on PC b Select Delete Event on the Record menu Y Contin
143. HAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Palm T X Handheld 4 Enter the details settings Details Speed v 57 600 bps a Select Details Flow Ctl Automatic b Select the Speed pick list and Init String select the appropriate speed c Select the Flow Ctl pick list and select whether the connection uses flow control Automatic Your handheld determines when to use flow control On Flow control is always on Off Flow control is always off d For a modem connection enter the initialization string e Select OK Select OK and then select Done 4 Done 567 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Connecting your handheld to a mobile phone If your phone doesn t appear on the list you Ry NOTE You do not need to use Phone Preferences if you are using the built in Bluetooth need to enter the phone wireless technology to connect your handheld to a mobile phone enabled with Bluetooth settings for your phone technology See the Bluetooth chapter for connection setup instructions onto your handheld Phone Preferences let you configure your handheld to exchange messages and dial phone numbers when your handheld is connected to a GSM mobile phone sold separately The GSM mobile phone account must also include data services 1 Open Phone Preferences patna 2 Select the connection for your a Go to Applications phone applications b Select Prefs 6 ee BT to Nokia 3650 c Select Phone 2 Sel
144. INSTS issasaccesik cesnences esdendue sane goacessteasy tans n a aa aa 223 Creating a playlist siccssesccccessssccaedearseciceusadecedasenpsscnuensvaesncgpestn aaia 223 Playing SONGS TOM lt a playlist sasesseesccscesscedcantesenssdecessacesenceveeateameetecens 225 Editing a playlist isspiss ondine s 226 DElStING a playlist szga aia 228 CUStOMIZING YOUR player spriin a a aaa 229 Turno Or ANE SCTCOM sidisen ae 229 Setting background preferences ccceseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaaeeeeeeenaas 230 Working with Windows Media Player on your computer sses 231 Related Opies ocsigen aa aa a Aa TaN 232 Chapter 11 Managing Your Tasks ssccseseserssseeeees 233 Creating a taSK irinae R E E N 234 Setting AN alari scccssessceccevcessccvesssssssecadvesdsccetebassaccevssssecceaswssecdatessyence 235 Scheduling a repeating task standard interval cccsseeeeeeeneees 236 Scheduling a repeating task Unusual interval c ccceceeeeeeeeees 238 Organizing your tasks ceesseeeeeceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeeeeseseeeeeeeesceeeeeesseeeeeeeees 240 Marking a task aS COmplete sisssscccesesssicedaanestneccasesssaccuneedieteduncanteeenaaabacecs 241 Del StU Ga task igemed aaia 242 Deleting a specifie TASK sesno aaa aara 242 Deleting all your completed tasks ceeesececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeneeens 243 CUSTOMIZING your TASKS St drsi sasarina 244 Working with Tasks on your computer sssssssssssssrssrrsrsssesrsrrernnnnnnsnn
145. IR device attached to it WINDOWS ONLY Check your computer s 1 documentation to see if it Prepare your computer for IR synchronization supports IR communication a Click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen e HotSync manager must be active On a Windows b Make sure that Infrared is selected computer you know HotSync manager is Y Continued active when its icon appears in the lower right corner of your screen You can also use your IR phone with Bluetooth wireless technology to synchronize Palm T X Handheld 80 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer You can continue te boas 2 Synchronize your handheld with the sync cable even if your computer your computer is set up for IR synchronization If a Go to Applications and you disconnect the cable then select HotSync H after selecting Infrared on HotSync icon a Windows computer be b Tap Local sure to click the HotSync T Reto PO Handhald manager icon and select c Tap the pick list below the Local USB before HotSync icon and select IR to reconnecting the cable a PC Handheld Tap pick list d Position the IR port of your handheld within a few inches of the IR port of your computer e Tap the HotSync icon on your handheld 4 Done When synchronization is complete a message appears at the top of your handheld screen Be patient synchronization may take up to
146. If you leave a field blank it does not appear the 1 next time you open the Contact Edit screen Also additional fields apply Press Contacts 2 only to the current 2 Display additional contact fields contact you can duplicate contact a Select the contact you want and then select Edit information if you need to apply the same fields b Select the plus button in the lower right corner of the Contact Edit screen to multiple contacts Contact Edit Unfiled First name Lee Contact Edit Unfiled First name Lee Each field type can be displayed a certain number of times up to a preset maximum Once v Home _ you reach this maximum v Mobile 55 the field type no longer Custom 8 appears on the pop up Select here Details Custom 9 list For example you can Note icon display up to seven Phone Email fields c Select the field you want displayed from the list The field appears in a preset location on the Contact Edit screen Select the Note icon next 4 Done to the plus button to add a note to the contact Palm T X Handheld 133 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Selecting a contact field type You can select the types of phone numbers work home mobile pager and so on as well as field types apply only to specify the instant messenger IM account that you associate with a contact the current contact You can duplicate contact information if you need to 1 apply the same c
147. If Found Call your phone a Select New number Contacts Contact hes Unfiled 302 555 9512M First name Lae ita J T jtm jtm com Picture Maroni Anthony 415 555 7775 W Eue Nguyen Mai 555 3434 W Nosuch Don donn example com Sanagala Srivinas 954 555 1234 H Speier Lane 831 555 7534M Taylor David 650 555 9278 W Technical Support Venkat Raja raja anyisp com 555 2367 W b Select each field where you want to enter information and enter it Select the scroll arrows to view more fields Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 130 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts If multiple contacts share information such as a company name and address you can enter the first contact and then copy the information into other contacts You can also enter one or more contacts on your desktop computer and then copy them to your handheld by synchronizing Palm T X Handheld Cont d The following fields contain features to help you enter information quickly All fields except numeric and email fields The first letter is automatically capitalized Title Company City and State As you enter letters a match appears if you have one on your Contacts list For example if you enter S Sacramento might appear and if you then enter a and n San Francisco might replace Sacramento When the word you want appears select the next field Address You can enter up to three addresses each containing five fields
148. Insert the CD into your computer On the Discover your device screen click Add software to your device Follow the onscreen instructions to install the applications you want to install Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done 120 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY A W N Palm T X Handheld Insert the CD into your computer Double click the Essential Software folder Install the applications you want to install Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done 121 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Palm T X Handheld Checking space and version numbers Before you install a file or an application it s important to make sure you have enough space for it You may also want to check the version number of applications that are already on your handheld or expansion card in case you re interested in upgrading them 1 Open the Info dialog box a Go to Applications b Open the menus c Select Info on the App menu View space info and version numbers Pick list a Select the Device pick list and select one of these options Device Get information about applications stored on your handheld Expansion card name Get information about applications stored on your expansion card Y Continued Device v Device Free Space 23 2M of 29 7M Calc 5K Calendar 203K Contacts 93K Date Book 65K Dialer 3K
149. Move a photo or video within an album a Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the album containing the photo or video you want to move b Use the stylus to drag the photo or video you want to its new position Y Continued 203 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer You can also move a photo or video by adding it to a different album The item is removed from the original album Palm T X Handheld 3 Move a photo or video between albums e Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the album containing the photo or video you want to move Open the menus Select Edit Details from the Media menu and then select the photo or video you want to move Select the Album pick list and then select the new album for the photo Select Done 4 Done Media Details iJ Name 1 Date 3 16 05 4 14pm Size 109K 488x488 Album Photos amp Videos Select to move photo ee Notes or video k o 204 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Before You Begin Sorting photos and videos You must be in an album to sort manually You cannot sort when All 1 Tap Media in the input area Albums is selected from the pick list 2 Sort photos and videos a Select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the album containing the photos and or videos you want to sort asta aa b Open the menus c Select Album and then sel
150. My Settings Click OK after settings have been tested Click Next Ny Continued 318 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 9 amp OPTIONAL Set up other accounts a Select the option to set up another account and then click Next b Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account you want to set up When you have set up the last account go to step 10 1 0 Finish setting up accounts a Select the option to synchronize information for this account and then click Next b Click Finish 1 1 Synchronize to transfer all account information to your handheld 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 319 The Desktop Connection field displays the mail client you use to download messages to your computer for example Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes based on the settings the VersaMail application detects If no client is detected the VersaMail application displays Direct POP or Direct IMAP connection to server depending on your account protocol Palm T X Handheld Entering advanced account settings on your computer When you set up an account the VersaMail application automatically enters advanced settings such as incoming and outgoing server names any authentication required maximum message CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages size and so on You can check the advanced settings either to verify that the VersaMailapplication entered the information you want or to change a default entry fo
151. O1 o0 o BO Palm T X Handheld 55 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 punctuation marks Write these marks on LEFT side of input area Mark Stroke Mark Stroke Period Ampersand a amp Comma 3 Carriage 7 return Apostrophe 7 At e Space an Quotation mark gi eee mark iD Tab Exclamation 1 point e Palm T X Handheld 56 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Having trouble with the Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area plus sign or asterisk symbol Use the Punctuation Shift stroke Mar Stroke M SMOG first and then make the character Period A Backslash N f Comma Slash N parenthesis Dash Right z parenthesis vi Tilde Left C Plus Equal sign 2 tT Asterisk X2 Palm T X Handheld 57 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Tip Graffiti 2 accented characters Having trouble accenting characters You can always open the onscreen keyboard tap int and then tap the character you need Tip Accent Get help writing any of the Graffiti 2 characters in Acute most applications Open a the Edit menu and select Graffiti 2 Help Grave a Tilde a Palm T X Handheld Stroke Accent Dieresis a Circumflex a Ring Write these marks on RIGHT side of input area Stroke A O For accented characters write the letter on the left side of the input area and then write the accent
152. OP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the Cont d Unread Messages Only For IMAP accounts only select whether to download all messages to your handheld or unread messages only By default the box is unchecked meaning that all messages are downloaded For POP accounts this server If you have a POP box does not appear on the screen email account the VersaMail application Download attachments Select whether to download attachments when you downloads all messages retrieve new messages By default the box is checked if you uncheck it only from the server the body text of any message containing an attachment is downloaded to your regardless of whether handheld you have read them for example on your desktop or on the web Mail from the last X Days Set how many days worth of email should be downloaded Max Message Size KB Enter the maximum message size that can be downloaded to your handheld from 1 to 5000KB The smaller the maximum size the faster the download but you must use the More button to download Did Yau Know Did You Know The actual message size you can download may any messages over that size On the other hand choosing a larger size means be smaller than 5000KB that more messages can be completely downloaded automatically but because some message downloading takes longer space is necessary for transferring the message Format of Incoming Messages Select HTML or Plain Text I
153. Palm T X Handheld 260 CHAPTER 13 You can also delete a note by opening the Record menu and selecting Delete Note Want to get rid of those deletion confirmation messages Open the Options menu select Preferences and then uncheck the Confirm note delete box Palm T X Handheld Writing Notes in Note Pad Deleting a note 1 2 Go to Applications and select Note Pad es Open the note a Select Done to display the Note Pad list b Select the note you want to delete 1 Welcome to Note Pad 2 Groceries 3 Bob 4 Flowers 5 Bank Select Delete and then select OK to confirm deletion 4 Done 261 CHAPTER 13 Palm T X Handheld Writing Notes in Note Pad Working with Note Pad on your computer Use Note Pad on your computer to view and manage the handwritten notes you create on your handheld Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Note Pad on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics e Learning about the parts of the Note Pad window e Viewing copying and deleting notes e Editing note details and titles e Setting an alarm for a note e Marking notes as private e Showing masking and hiding private notes Printing notes Changing between the List and Preview views e Sorting notes e Sharing notes WINDOWS ONLY To open Note Pad on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and
154. Quick Unlock box b If necessary enter your password and then select OK Delete the Quick Unlock Neu Paccword e combination Q Do you want to create anew password now a Select Unassign b Select Done 4 Done Quick Unlock box 504 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private 1 Before You Begin Encrypting your information To use encryption you must first create a password for your handheld You can encrypt selected information whenever your handheld locks This means that your information is scrambled so that it cannot be read When you unlock your handheld and enter your password or Quick Unlock combination the encrypted information is unscrambled The more information you select for encryption the longer your handheld takes to scramble and unscramble the information Also applications that use large files such as Palm Media take a long time to encrypt In these cases consider the trade off between security and convenience 1 Open Security Preferences Password a Go to Applications and then Quick Unlock select Prefs 6 Auto Lock b Select Security Private Records Show Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 505 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Palm T X Handheld 2 Open the Encrypt Data dialog box a Select Options b If necessary enter your password and then select OK c Check the Encrypt data when locked box d Select Choose Appli
155. R 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer You can charge your 2 handheld using your USB cable The USB cable must be directly connected to your 3 computer or an externally powered not bus powered USB hub amp OPTIONAL Press the power button to turn on your handheld if it is not already on Continue with the onscreen instructions Synchronize your handheld with your computer by pressing the sync button on the USB sync cable 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 9 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer L Before You Begin Switching to another desktop software application You must have completed WINDOWS ONLY CD installation and chosen Palm Desktop During installation you chose a desktop software application to synchronize with your handheld software as your desktop You may have chosen Palm Desktop software at that time But if Microsoft Outlook already application for contains all of your contacts appointments tasks and notes you can change your synchronization method so that your handheld synchronizes with Outlook instead You can also synchronization in order change from Outlook to Palm Desktop software to switch to Outlook Note that you can choose Outlook as your synchronization software NOTE Ifyou choose to synchronize the info on your handheld with Outlook info in Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos is synchronized with info in Contacts Calendar Tasks and Notes in Outlook You can
156. San Francisco Attendees Enter the people associated with the expense c Select OK 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the expense Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Palm T X Handheld 473 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses Choosing currency options Expense is even easier to use when you customize the currency list You can choose what currencies appear in the pick list and what symbol automatically appears in new expenses and you can even create your own currency symbol If you travel a lot update the currency pick list so that you can quickly getto the symbols you need Use separate categories for related expenses For example create a London category for a trip to London After you file your expense report for the London trip you can easily delete the related expenses with the Purge command Palm T X Handheld Customizing the currency pick list Place the currency symbols that you use most often in the currency pick list 1 2 Go to Applications and select Expense Psy Open the Receipt Details dialog box a Tap an expense item b Tap Details Select the currency symbol s Receipt Details that you want to see in the Category Paris pick list Type Airfare i Payment v VISA a Select the Currency pick list Currency and then select Edit Vendor currencies City Attendees Z KETE Y Continued 474 CHAPTER 21 Managing Yo
157. See Media application MultiMediaCard expansion cards 586 music See also music files Pocket Tunes Windows Media Player changing playlists for 226 deleting playlists for 228 files 77 listening to 217 585 playing 222 225 620 removing from playlists 227 selecting 225 storing 586 transferring to handheld 77 music applications 213 214 music files See also music setting up Media Player for 214 music player See Pocket Tunes N names See usernames contacts naming connections 566 email accounts 326 398 656 expansion cards 592 photo albums 202 playlists 224 user profiles 12 13 video album 202 navigating through web pages 425 navigator 20 37 using 41 negative numbers 484 Network Preferences dialog box 97 Network Preferences screen 569 572 573 575 576 network settings 569 579 Network Setup screen 96 100 networks accessing corporate 309 accessing email from 287 closing connections for 572 connecting to 97 99 293 297 572 corporate email accounts and 308 309 creating login scripts for 576 578 customizing connections for 566 569 deleting service profiles for 575 dialing in to 95 562 losing connections to 607 selecting communications protocol for 574 setting IP addresses for 574 setting service for 97 setting up service profiles for 569 570 specifying as trusted device 298 synchronizing over 75 95 101 wireless connections for 265 New events use time zones setting 160 new lines 249 T X Handheld Ne
158. Sync manager icon G in the taskbar in the lower right corner of the screen b Click Custom 2 Select the correct username from the list at the top of the box Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 601 CHAPTER 28 Palm T X Handheld Maintaining Your Handheld 3 Set the transfer options f HotSync Action for Calendar OK a Select an application in the OE foun Cancel Conduit list and then click oe e Desktop overwrites handheld Change I Set as default GS Handheld overwrites Desktop b Select Desktop overwrites OnE amp Donating handheld NOTE This change applies only to the next synchronization c Click OK 4 Repeat step 3 for the other applications in the list that you want to restore and then click Done 5 Synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done 602 CHAPTER 28 Maintaining Your Handheld Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics If you re having problems with resets or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Managing Info Creating a backup of your information Customizing Customizing your handheld again after doing a hard reset Palm T X Handheld 603 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Palm T X Handheld Although we can t anticipate all the questions you might have this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly asked questions Setup Nothing happens when
159. TIONAL If you have selected Ask Every Time in VersaMail Preferences select whether to download subjects only or entire messages 4 Done A list of your messages appears in the Inbox Palm T X Handheld 335 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know Auto Sync with notification If more than one scheduled Auto Sync Ry NOTE Some email service providers such as CompuServe and AOL do not support the happens at the same time Auto Sync feature Check with your provider to see if Auto Sync is supported for example for two separate email accounts Auto Sync performs any past due Auto Sync first and then performs current Auto Sync You can set up the VersaMail application to automatically download new email messages to your handheld with the Auto Sync feature If Auto Sync downloads any new messages your handheld lets you know with a sound or vibration A list with the number of new messages retrieved appears on the Reminders screen retrievals according to The Auto Sync feature downloads only the first 3KB of each message You can select the More the order of email button on the message screen to download the entire message accounts in the Accounts menu list Auto Sync recognizes any filter criteria you set up for downloading messages Messages that don t meet these filter criteria are not downloaded during Auto Sync You need to turn off all filters and manually retrieve these messages Ry NOTE See Worki
160. Track business or travel expenses and print expense reports after you synchronize your handheld with your computer 8 HotSync Synchronize info on your handheld with the info on your computer Palm T X Handheld 23 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Tip Can t find an application on your handheld First tap the Home icon in the input area and select All from the category pick list in the upper right corner to view all applications on your handheld except the wireless applications Wi Fi and Bluetooth which you need to access from the status bar If you don t see the application there you may need to install it from the CD Palm T X Handheld Productivity These applications let you carry your office with you so you can work with crucial information on the go They may already be installed on your handheld or you may need to install them from the CD TEA Documents Calculator Adobe Reader for Palm OS View and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files and create compatible files that you can save in Word or Excel format View and manage PowerPoint files Do basic math calculations such as splitting restaurant bills and figuring tips View PDF compatible files that are tailored to fit your handheld s screen Multimedia and entertainment Here is the software that lets you relax and have fun These applications may already be installed on your handheld or you may need to install them from the C
161. View May 12 06 4SM Wi As 10 00 Overlapping 12 00 events 2 00 4 00 E 6 00 Customizing your calendar Control the appearance of your Calendar screens Select display options for the Agenda View Day View and Month View The options you select for each view apply only to that view You can also choose alarm and start and end time settings Palm T X Handheld 178 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Customizing display options for your calendar 1 Press Calendar 2 Open the Display Options Display Options ti dialog box Default View v Agenda a Open the menus REM Day Month M Show Due Tasks M Show Messages M Background i b Select Options and then select Display Options 3 Select the Default View pick list and select the view you want to see when you open Calendar Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 179 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar If the _ is difficult to 4 Set any of the following Agenda View display options see against your new background select a Show Due Tasks Display tasks that are due today and tasks that are overdue different Color Theme to change the text color Show Messages Display the number of read and unread email messages Tip Background Use your favorite photo as the Agenda View background Check If you want to see the the Background box select the photo thumbnail and then select a photo hours when you have Adjust the fade setting so that the text is eas
162. a username to the handheld Palm T X Handheld 16 CHAPTER 1 If you re having problems with setup or anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Moving Info Customizing Common Questions e Synchronizing your handheld with Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook on your computer Synchronizing wirelessly using Bluetooth technology on your handheld Using your company s network to synchronize information Choosing whether or not to synchronize information for a specific application Adding applications to your handheld Installing additional software from the CD Deleting applications from your handheld Viewing application information Adjusting the screen display Reducing the Auto off setting Keeping your handheld from turning on accidentally Answers to frequently asked questions about setup CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld What s on my handheld What software do have Using the status bar Rotating the screen Do s and don ts Related topics Palm T X Handheld Like a good personal assistant your handheld helps you keep track of your schedule your business and personal contacts your to do list even your Microsoft Office and multimedia files Stay productive by carrying more of your imp
163. abases spreadsheets and other organizer software Keeping contacts private by turning on security options Sending contacts to other Bluetooth handhelds by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Sending contacts as attachments to email messages Sending contacts as part of a text message 148 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling an event Color coding your schedule Setting an alarm Rescheduling an event Deleting events Checking your schedule Customizing your calendar Working with Calendar on your computer Related topics Palm T X Handheld Stay on top of your schedule by creating appointments setting alarms and spotting conflicts in Calendar You can view your calendar by day week or month or as an agenda list that combines your list of tasks and email notifications with your appointments Schedule repeating meetings or block out a vacation by creating one event set to repeat at an interval you specify Color code your appointments by category and add notes with helpful information You can synchronize your calendar with Palm Desktop software Outlook or your corporate email system using Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Benefits of Calendar e Track current future and past appointments e Stay on top of deadlines e Set reminders for appointments e Spot schedule conflicts 149 CHAPTER 7 DEUET L DITTE OFT ELA Scheduling an eve
164. ackgrounds 180 533 537 adjusting brightness 538 aligning 556 blank 608 caring for 31 596 changing colors of 534 541 changing fonts for 538 539 clearing 256 frozen 22 597 607 landscape and portrait views 30 maintaining 596 not responding 21 22 559 597 607 tapping elements on 556 596 viewing information on 19 screen rotation 30 Screen rotation button 30 scripts 579 scrolling 150 Applications View 39 in dialog boxes 40 menus 41 SD memory cards 586 SDIO accessories 586 SDIO cards 586 searching for information 44 138 searching web pages 424 secondary locations 524 527 530 secure connections 392 Secure Digital input output SDIO 586 Secure Sockets Layer See SSL connections security 292 440 570 security information Wi Fi 269 security levels 489 security options See also encryption passwords 661 privacy settings device 489 records 489 Security Preferences dialog box 491 493 494 558 Select a Color Theme dialog box 534 541 542 551 Select button navigator 41 Select Colors dialog box 257 Select Font dialog box 356 539 Select User dialog box 8 75 79 selecting alarm sounds 529 alternate stroke shapes 552 background colors 257 541 clock display options 530 communications protocol 574 connections 570 currency options 474 475 476 information 68 Internet Service Providers ISPs 570 items in lists 40 menu commands 41 42 43 options in dialog boxes 40 selection highlight 39 self help resources
165. age Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Go to the web page where you must enter the password 3 Enter your password to access the web page a Enter your sign in name in the appropriate field b Tap in the password box enter your password and then select OK c Select the button that lets you view the page Sign In Enter Go or the like Password Enter your ID and password Yahoo ID Password Unassigned Q Enter a password m Remember my ID on this computer Palm T X Handheld 423 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Find locates any text whether it is letters or numbers Find is not case sensitive Because of the limited space on the handheld screen sometimes the current web address URL is not fully visible Use the Page Properties dialog box to view the full URL Open the Page menu select Page and then select Page Info Palm T X Handheld Finding information on a web page 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Open the Find field a Go to the web page you want to search b Open the menus c Select Page and then select Find Text on Page Search the web page Find Text on Page a Type the text you want to find M Wrap Search b Select Find 4 Done 424 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Quickly jumping to a page The action bar icons allow you to quickly move from page to page Following a link Many web pages contain u
166. ails EXIF Details EXIF Summary Camera Specific Properties Equipment Make Camera Model Camera Software Adobe Photoshop CS Macintosh Maximum Lens Aperture Image Specific Properties Image Orientation Top Left Hand Horizontal Resolution 144 a Vertical Resolution 144 dpi Image Created 2005 02 F 16 22 02 Exposure Time F Number File name 1 jpg File size 110616 bytes 488x488 When finished editing and viewing details select Done 4 Done 200 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Organizing photos and videos You can organize your photos and videos in the following ways If a photo is stored on your handheld you can add it only to an album located on the handheld Likewise if a photo is stored on an expansion e Sort photos and videos in the List View card you can add it only to an album that is on the i same card Organizing photos and videos into albums e Create albums and place your photos and videos in those albums e Move photos and videos within or between albums 1 Tap Media in the input area 2 Select Manage Albums a Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 201 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer oon 3 create an atu set in any album select a Select whether to create the Manage Albums from album on your handheld rorday Thumbnail or List view Device or on an expansion select the album you card inserted into the want and then select OK expansion card sl
167. ally c Select OK 4 Done 369 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Marking messages as read or unread In one line view read When you select a message to read it it is automatically marked as read You can also manually messages appear in plain mark messages as read or unread text in the message list unread messages appear in bold text 1 Select the message or messages to mark POP mail servers do not a In the Inbox or on another folders screen select the folders pick list and then support the read or select the folder containing the message you want to mark unread message feature For POP accounts messages that you mark appear in plain or bold text on your handheld 2 b Select the icon next to the message you want to mark To mark multiple messages select the bullets next to the messages you want to mark but the difference is not Do one of the following to mark 21 212 Inbox recognized on the server the message or messages o Jason Burkey 12 3 1p RE Coffee Single message Select Mark o amp Paula Lagasse 12 18p Quick meeting invite Read or Mark Unread from the Vea list Multiple messages Open the menus select Messages and then select Mark Read or Mark Unread Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 370 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Selecting Both and then OK also processes any other pending actions on the server such as deleting messages
168. ally can cause adverse health effects if excessive levels are absorbed The unit of measurement for human exposure to RF energy is Specific Absorption Rate SAR The Federal Communications Commission FCC Industrie Canada IC and other agencies around the world have established limits that incorporate a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons using this equipment In order to certify this unit for sale in the US Canada and Europe this unit has been tested for RF exposure compliance at a qualified test laboratory and found to comply with the regulations regarding exposure to RF Energy FCC RF Safety Statement In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines if the device is to be worn on the body users MUST use a body worn accessory that contains NO metal snaps clips etc and provides AT LEAST 1 5 cm of separation between the users body and the unit Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact with the body i e on the lap or in a breast pocket Such use will likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See www fcc gov oet rfsafety for more information on RF exposure safety FCC ID O8FAOKI Palm T X Handheld 634 Palm T X Handheld Responsible Party North America Palm Inc Palm 950 W Maude Ave C Sunnyvale California 94085 2801 TIX United States of America www palm com Europe Bornibus Francois Buckhurst Court London Road Woki
169. alm Desktop Help has lots of information about importing from other applications including step by step instructions Palm Desktop software can import the following types of files Open the Help menu in Calendar vCal iCal VCS ICS and Calendar archive DBA Palm Desktop software and select Palm Desktop Contacts vCard VCF Contacts archive ABA Help for more details Memos Memos archive MPA Text TXT Tasks Tasks archive TDA WINDOWS ONLY 1 Save the file on your computer in one of the accepted formats 2 Import the file into Palm Desktop software a Double click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop b Click the icon in the launch bar for the application you want to import the information into Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 117 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Cont d c Click File and then click Import Specify Import Fields Im po rted Palm Fields Data in Conference Contacts csv i Last Name fields A First Name Title WV Company M work M Home m d Follow the onscreen instructions to map the fields in your file to the fields in Palm Desktop software and import the file palmOne Inc 408 555 2453 415 555 9873 1789 Market St San Francisco Address 1 4 Scan Records gt Record 2 To change the field order click a field name on the left and drag it up or down the list to match the data
170. alog box 118 speed communications 562 563 567 Speed Dial screen 456 458 Speed pick list 563 567 speed dial buttons 456 spreadsheets 24 See also Excel files attaching to email 376 creating and viewing 187 email messages and 305 importing information from 117 managing files for 186 opening 188 sending information to 473 transferring to handheld 77 square root button Calculator 484 SSL connections 323 328 329 392 401 start page web browser 437 439 Start with pick list 439 starting HotSync manager 103 locked devices 498 Outlook applications 106 starting HotSync manager 23 static electricity 31 596 638 639 status bar icon descriptions 29 status icons Wi Fi 268 stopping download operations 433 information searches 44 MP3 player 222 stopping slide shows 192 storage 585 586 storing device names 302 stylus 6 21 31 51 206 596 Subject fields 348 subject lines email 334 348 supported file types 217 switching between applications 10 36 589 613 symbols 51 60 61 130 sync cable connecting to PCs with 8 disconnecting 81 reconnecting 81 synchronizing with 75 78 96 Sync IMAP Folders screen 392 synchronization troubleshooting 612 617 usernames and 311 synchronization methods 75 76 synchronization options applications 106 108 handheld 10 102 110 synchronization software 74 106 125 613 synchronize defined 8 Synchronize incoming email setting 322 Synchronize the files option 107 109 663 Sy
171. also set up the VersaMail application to synchronize with Outlook Other info for Contacts Calendar such as photos and notes is synchronized with Palm Desktop software Tasks and Memos during CD installation Insert the CD into your computer 2 Select Change your synchronization method 3 Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 10 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Using user profiles IMPORTANT Only IT managers may need to use user profiles for their company If you are not an IT manager you can skip this section Suppose your sales organization wants to distribute two dozen handhelds and you want the handhelds to have a common company phone list set of memos and set of key applications You can create a user profile that contains this information and then install the user profile onto the handhelds before distributing the handhelds to your employees A user profile does not individualize a handheld with a unique username and user specific information When the new user synchronizes for the first time he or she gives the handheld a unique username NOTE Handhelds that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new handhelds that have never been synchronized or handhelds that have had their usernames and information removed by a hard reset Palm T X Handheld 11 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer
172. ancstiesdheaveecntay 559 Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident 5 559 Selecting power saving Settings cccceeeseeeseeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaaaes 560 Connecting your handheld to other handhelds sesser 561 Changing the preset Connection settings eeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 562 Creating your OWN CONNECTION Settings ceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeees 564 Connecting your handheld to a mobile phone cceeeeeeeeeees 568 CUSTOMIZING network Settings sssri adicon aaaea 569 Setting up a service profile sssssssssessssssrnrsssssrnssstnnessttnnnnsten nenene nnmn 569 Connecting tO your Service sssi ennaa 572 Adding details to a service profile sssessssssssesssssrnnrnerneseserenennnnnnn 573 Deleting a service profile gis scaieneste sccessesd peneegeassecduaseereccncunsanescesaunpeeeds 575 Creating a login SCHIPE sessstex csdeactessieadeaceseacsntevanaisaaubesvecsdaseenten tacavarceens 576 Adding plug in applications cceeceeeeeeecesecee cee eeeeeeeeetteeeceaaaeaeeaeenes 579 Setting Up ia VPN secssinsvescesssndesaes sacdecccesnnndescessinadeaesstuas eee cesuaadae cess andedecssnnads 580 Setting up a VPN account on your handheld ccsscceeeessteeeeeeenees 581 Establishing a VPN CONNECTION siccsscccssssesicecssensdcnces tees dcnecaseesteaces scene 582 Ending a VPN CONNECTION ssscccasecscccesseccnetessssncuvcenteacatechibeseaasnassesce 583 Related TOPICS sacencceenzacduviecs vancaad
173. and Expense on your computer Expense and Media are Windows only You can also view manage and back up info for Contacts Calendar Tasks Note Pad When you synchronize your handheld with your computer and Notes in Microsoft this info is updated in both places Palm Desktop software is installed Outlook on your automatically during the initial CD installation process computer Windows only Other applications Palm Desktop includes HotSync manager software which allows you are still synchronized with to customize the settings for synchronization You can access HotSync Palm Desktop software manager by selecting its icon in the task bar at the bottom of your computer screen Key Term HotSync manager HotSync Technology that allows you to synchronize the Gb 2 37 PM information on your handheld with the information on your cal Quick Install Install applications and transfer files from your Windows computer to computer Windows only your handheld or to an expansion card sold separately that is seated in the expansion card slot Quick Install is installed automatically during the initial CD installation process Send To Handheld droplet Install applications and transfer files from your Mac computer to your Mac only handheld or to an expansion card sold separately that is seated in the expansion card slot The Send To Handheld droplet is installed automatically during the initial CD installation process ase
174. and Receiving Email Messages Sending an email message To mark an outgoing message as high priority on the message screen 1 open the Options manu Tap VersaMail in the input area and select Set Priority To High 2 Open a new message a Open the menus b Select Accounts and then select the account you want c Select New New Message Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 347 CHAPTER 16 You can t see the whole list of addresses in a field if the list is longer than two lines To see the whole list select the word To cc or bcc When you put addresses in the copies cc field they are visible to all other recipients Addresses in the blind copies bcc field are hidden from all other recipients Some account types do not support the bcc field so it may not appear Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Address and compose your New Message i E message To employees meinc com Subj Payroll dates ini H Have been changed to the 5th and the a Enter the recipient s email 19th beca se of theholiday address b In the Subject field enter the subject of your email c Inthe area below the Subject line enter the text of your email amp OPTIONAL Attach one or more files to send with your message 5 Select one of the following options to send your message Send Sends the email immediately If the message is not sent successfull
175. and edit it in Word e Sorting memos e Showing masking and hiding private memos Printing memos Changing between the list and single memo views Adding a date and time stamp to a memo Organizing memos into categories e Sharing memos WINDOWS ONLY To open Memos on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Memos on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Memos on your computer launch Palm Desktop software from the Palm folder and then select Memos Palm T X Handheld 253 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos If you re having problems with Memos or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Moving Around Entering Information Categories Privacy Sharing VersaMail SMS Common Questions e Opening applications e Using menus Adding a phone number or other contact information to a memo using Phone Lookup Organizing memos by arranging them into categories and sorting them Keeping memos private by turning on security options e Beaming memos to other Palm Powered handhelds e Sending memos to other Bluetooth handhelds using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld e Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Sending memos as attachments to email messages Sending memos as part of a text message Answers to freq
176. and open them quickly Customize your handheld s sound levels colors security and more Receive notifications of upgrades and patches and then install them onto your handheld obtain personalized news and other information as well as user tips at a glance preview try and buy software for your handheld Windows only for downloads using the sync cable both Windows and Mac users can download software using your handheld s wireless capabilities Internet connection required Access the Palm enterprise website where you can purchase corporate software such as a VPN client software that provides robust security for Wi Fi authentication and connection to a network and Java Virtual Machine JVM software for running Java applications on your device Download requires Internet connection additional fees may apply Set the time in your home city and two other locations and set an alarm to wake you up View information about an expansion card seated in the expansion card slot 26 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Did You Know Desktop During CD installation The desktop software lets you use your computer to create and manage info for applications on you can choose to your handheld Install this software from the CD synchronize the info in Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos on your handheld with info in W Palm Desktop software View enter manage and back up info for Calendar Contacts Tasks a Media Memos
177. and select Expense 8 Open the Custom Currencies dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Custom Currencies Y Continued 476 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses 3 Create the custom symbol Custom Currencies Create your own custom a Select a Country box currencies by tapping on the country name below b Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want c Select OK and then select OK again 4 Done Deleting expenses Delete individual expenses or an entire category of expenses at once Deleting an individual expense 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 8 2 Tap the expense you want to delete Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 477 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses 3 Delete the item a Open the menus b Select Delete Item in the Record menu 4 amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the expense on your computer 5 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 478 CHAPTER 21 To combine expenses from different categories rename one category to match the other category s name There is another way to delete acategory in which the category is deleted but the entries are not Select the Category pick list and select Edit Categories Select the Delete command to delete the selected category and move all of its entries to the Unfiled category Palm T X Handheld Managing Your Expenses Deleting an entir
178. andheld 256 0 KB Used 13 7 MB Free of 14 0 MB Summary of contents If your handheld s battery i Secure Digital Card is very low access to the Device Id SD016_0008F720230B07 expansion card may be disabled If this occurs recharge your handheld as soon as possible Palm T X Handheld 591 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Renaming a card The expansion card name appears in the category pick list and in other lists that let you choose where to store your info When you buy a new card give it a name that helps you remember what s on the card You can rename the card later if you decide to store different info on the card 1 Go to Applications and select Card Info 8 2 Open the Rename Card Rename Card dia log box New Card Name My Games Card a Open the menus b Select Rename Card on the Card menu 3 Enter the new name for the card and then select Rename 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 592 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Copying applications to an expansion card If you use a card reader to view your card on a computer the file names 1 may differ from the names you see on your Insert the expansion card and then go to Applications handheld 2 Open the Copy dialog box Copy From v Handheld Some applications such a Open the menus To PA 13 7M Free as Media let you copy Bgnd Service amp 37K or move info between b Select Copy on the App menu DGraphCon
179. andheld This is another reason why it s important to synchronize often so you have an up to date backup available Before you do a hard reset be sure to synchronize 1 Press and hold the power button 2 While holding the power button use the tip of the stylus or a similar object without a sharp tip to gently press and release the reset button inside the hole on the back of your handheld 3 Wait for the Palm Powered logo to appear and then release the power button Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 599 CHAPTER 28 Maintaining Your Handheld 4 When you see the message that warns you about erasing all of the info on your handheld do one of the following e Press Up on the 5 way navigator to finish the reset and show the touchscreen e Press any other button to do a soft reset 4 Done Palm T X Handheld Erase all data Alle Daten l schen e Effacer toutes les donn es e Desea eliminar todos los datos Eliminare tutti i dati Apagar todos os dados Yes Ja Oui S S Sim mS 600 CHAPTER 28 Maintaining Your Handheld Restoring your information after a hard reset If you synchronized before doing a hard reset you can now put that information back on your handheld However you may need to re enter some of your personal settings as well as your color coded categories in Calendar WINDOWS ONLY 1 Open the Custom menu in the HotSync application a Click the Hot
180. anged to the 5th and the 19th because of the holiday Have been changed to the 5th and the 19th because of the holiday Select to switch to short header To switch between short and full headers on either a folder screen or a message screen select the header icon in the upper right corner of the screen Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly If you create an IMAP folder in an account on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server you can wirelessly synchronize email messages that you move into or out of the IMAP folder or that you delete in the folder with messages on your handheld When you synchronize a folder with your handheld any email messages in the selected folder on the mail server are downloaded to the same folder on your handheld Any messages moved out of the selected folder on your handheld or deleted on your handheld are moved or deleted in the folder on the mail server Palm T X Handheld 390 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know Prerequisites for wireless IMAP folder synchronization You can synchronize Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your handheld and or the mail server you folders whose names may need to do one of the following before you can wirelessly synchronize email messages on are up to 16 characters your handheld with messages on the server in length You can synchronize up to 11 e f you need to create a folder on bot
181. ansion card or your computer e Check the number of files created by any third party application you have installed on your handheld Some third party applications create a large number of small files to store data Remove the third party application or remove some of the data files in the application For more information go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld 608 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions My handheld keeps turning itself off Your handheld is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity This period can be set at 30 seconds or at one two or three minutes Check the Auto off after setting on the Power Preferences screen My handheld is not making any sounds Check the System Alarm and Game Sound settings get a blank screen when I reset my handheld It takes a little while for your handheld to reset when you press the reset button During a soft reset you see a progress bar then a screen with the Palm Powered logo Resetting is complete when the Date amp Time Preferences screen appears The current date and time are incorrect The current date and time are tied to the Location setting If you change the date and time without changing the Location setting the current date and time may appear incorrect Moving around can t find the icon want in Applications View e Select the category pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View and select All You may need
182. ant is listed Select the network and then select Connect If the network does not require an encryption key the connection process begins When the process is completed you are returned to the application you were in when you opened the Wi Fi controls You are finished with this procedure If the network requires an encryption key select Yes when asked if you want to enter security settings Continue with step 5 The network you want is not listed Select Edit and then select Add Continue with step 4 Y Continued Wi Fi Networks Select a network belkin54g Ta NETGEAR Secure Network You need to enter security settings to connect to this network Would you like to enter them now Wi Fi Networks Select anetwork Ta NETGEAR Add Delete Connect 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections 4 Add the network name An SSID is required for hidden networks 5 Select a security option If your network does not require any encryption settings select None and go to step 8 If your network requires WEP encryption select WEP and go to step 6 If your network requires WPA PSK encryption select WPA PSK and go to step 7 Y Continued Palm T X Handheld Edit Wi FiNetwork Network Name SSID Security C None WPA PSK 264 CHAPTER 14 Check with your system administrator for WEP encryption information Jid You Know 64 bit WEP keys
183. application a Select Send b Select Bluetooth and then select OK Select the receiving handheld on the Discovery Results screen and then select OK The information is sent to the receiving handheld 464 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information Tip Using the Send command with the VersaMail application For best results when You can send information as an attachment to an email message using the Send command beaming the handhelds Follow the procedures for sending information a category or an application Select VersaMail in should be between 4 and the Send With dialog box The VersaMail application opens displaying a blank message with the 39 inches 10 centimeters information you want to send as an attachment Address the message enter a subject line and and one meter apart and then select Send or Get amp Send there should be a clear path between them Using the Send command with SMS NOTE Y t d t licati ith SMS seaening worke bestioi N ou cannot send a category or an application with SMS smaller items If you have You can send information as part of a text message using the Send command Follow the larger items you can use procedure for sending information Select SMS in the Send With dialog box The SMS application Bluetooth wireless opens displaying a new text message with the information you want to send as the body of the technology Expansion message Address the message and then select Send car
184. ard If you select Files on Card the VersaMail application displays all file types on the card You can select a particular file type or select All Files to view all files on the card To remove an attachment from an email message select the attached file in the Attachments box and then select Delete Palm T X Handheld Attaching files to outgoing messages You can attach files on your handheld to email messages you send For example you can attach photos or videos Word Excel and PowerPoint files and entries from Contacts Calendar Memos and Tasks You can also attach files from an expansion card inserted into your handheld s expansion card slot The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and approximately 5MB of total data for any attachments The maximum number of attachments for any email message is ten regardless of the attachments total size You can attach a file to forwarded messages and replies as well as to messages you create N NOTE The procedure for attaching photos and videos is slightly different from the procedure for attaching other types of files 1 Open the Attachments screen a Create the message to which you want to attach the file b On the New Message screen tap the red paper clip icon in the upper right corner Y Continued Let me know if the attached look OK Red paper clip 376 CHAPTER 16 Palm T X Handheld Sending a
185. arly 1 Open the Empty Trash dialog box a Ona folder screen open the menus b Select Empty Trash on the Message menu N NOTE if you select to automatically empty the trash a message asks if you want to delete the trash amp OPTIONAL Select Details to see how many messages are in the trash and whether the messages are set to be deleted from the server Select one of the following options for emptying the trash To delete messages from your handheld as well as from the server Select Both Select Yes if you want to update the server now To delete the message from only your handheld now Select Handheld 4 Done 368 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages By default trash is set to be emptied automatically and the time interval is set at Older Than 1 Day Palm T X Handheld Setting the trash to be emptied automatically 1 Open the Deletion preferences a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Deletion Select the settings for automatically Deletion emptying the trash Confirm deletion Auto Empty Mail from Trash Immediatel a Check the Auto Empty Mail from Trash box if it is not checked b Select the pick list and then select one of the following e Select Immediately if you want the trash emptied automatically each time you delete messages e Select a time period if you want messages emptied from the trash periodic
186. asks 1 To change these settings open the Options menu and select Preferences 2 Go to Favorites and select Tasks 6 Check the box on the left side of rea a Date E the task Personal 4 Done 11 7 Ry NOTE Palm Desktop software and Microsoft Outlook handle completed repeating tasks differently Palm Desktop software checks off all overdue instances of the task and Microsoft Outlook checks off only the oldest instance of the task Palm T X Handheld 241 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Deleting a task If a task is canceled you can delete it from your Tasks list When you delete a repeating task you delete all instances of the task You can also delete all your completed tasks You can also delete a specific task by selecting the task selecting Details and then selecting Delete If you save an archive copy of your deleted tasks you can refer to them later by importing them Palm T X Handheld Deleting a specific task 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Tasks 6 Select the task you want to delete Open the Delete Task dialog box Delete Task fii Delete selected task a Open the menus Save archive copy on PC b Select Delete Task on the Record menu amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the task on your computer Select OK 4 Done 242 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Deleting all your completed tasks Many people find it useful to ref
187. assword now 496 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting a forgotten password If you forget your password your handheld displays the password hint if you entered one to help you remember the password If you still can t remember the password you can delete it from your handheld Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries marked as private IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize your handheld with your computer before and after this procedure so you can restore any private entries that were deleted along with the password 1 Open Security a Go to Applications and then select Prefs b Select Security 2 Open the Incorrect Password dialog box a Select the Password box b Tap any number on the keypad and then select OK Y Continued Palm T X Handheld Preferences Password i Password box Quick Unlock Private Records v Show Current Password Enter current password 497 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Before You Begin To use the locking feature you must first create a password for your handheld To start your handheld when it is locked turn it on Enter your password and then select Done Palm T X Handheld 3 Delete the forgotten password r hacarrere Paskward This is not the correct a Select Lost Password password To try again tap OK b Select Delete Password Hint Synchronize your handheld
188. at you can carry on your handheld so that you can play them using the Pocket Tunes application on your handheld Windows Media Player download requires Internet connection The plug in installs automatically during the initial CD installation process It is included on the CD in case you should ever need to manually reinstall it 28 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld iip Use the Find dialog box to locate specific items of information on your handheld for example a Find Using the status bar The status bar at the bottom of the handheld screen gives you access to valuable tools and is accessible in all views name or a phone number Menu 10 24 System info Alert Did You Know The System info icon shows the current time on Wi Fi control the status bar i Fi controls Full screen writing Screen rotation Tip Bluetooth controls EN Input The Wi Fi controls signal strength bars show an Find exclamation point if Wi Fi functionality is Menu turned on but you are not System info connected to a network Alert Bluetooth controls Wi Fi controls Full screen writing Palm T X Handheld Tap to open the Find dialog box Tap to open the menus for the current screen Tap to open the system information dialog box The dialog box shows the date and time available memory and battery level and allows you to turn system sounds on
189. ate that beaming is complete 4 Done 466 CHAPTER 20 Create a category of Calendar events such as your meeting schedule and then beam the entire category to your business partner s handheld When you receive a beamed item you can file the item in a category using the Receive dialog box Palm T X Handheld Sharing Information Beaming a category 1 Select the category you want to beam a Open an application b From the list view select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the category you want This takes you to the list view within the selected category Beam the category a Open the menus b Select the Beam Category menu item in the leftmost menu c When the Beam dialog box appears point your handheld s IR port directly at the IR port of the other handheld IR port Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete 4 Done 467 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information Beaming an application Select the Beam From pick list to beam an 1 application from an Select the application you want expansion card inserted to beam Beam From v Device into the expansion slot Memos amp 60K Note Pad amp 144K Palm PIMs Support 5K Pics amp Videos amp 459K a Go to Applications Prefs b Open the menus RealPlayer c Select Beam in the App menu d Select the location of the app from the Beam From pick list e Sel
190. ategorizing with Calculator 512 changing information 472 choosing currency options 474 customizing lists for 480 deleting categories 514 deleting information in 477 479 entering expenses in 472 473 getting help with 481 opening 472 481 related topics for 482 saving information in 473 synchronizing information for 76 transferring information to 66 troubleshooting 482 Expense icon 23 expense lists 480 Expense Preferences dialog box 472 475 expense reports 23 474 479 480 Expense type pick list 472 extending battery 532 606 external devices 561 external speaker 557 F fade setting 180 534 537 FAQs 604 Favorites View changing entries 534 defined 26 moving around in 39 using 35 FCC Statement 633 fields 133 134 135 file names 593 file types 117 217 files accessing 448 adding 73 attaching to email 376 377 379 displaying contents 434 displaying on expansion cards 591 downloading 433 440 installation prerequisites for 122 opening 188 opening on expansion cards 590 removing 127 594 restoring archived 127 saving 433 selecting for synchronization 98 sharing 265 287 transferring to handheld 75 76 117 troubleshooting uninstalled 616 filing events 151 filtering email 336 381 383 385 filtering messages 383 385 Filters dialog box 381 383 finances 471 512 See also Expense application Find dialog box 44 Find icon 44 Find icon on status bar 29 651 Find More button 44 Find on Page command 424 Find on Page
191. ation e Use text messaging to chat with friends 410 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Before You Begin Creating and sending a text message Before you can send and receive text messages you must set up a phone connection on your handheld to send and IMPORTANT Many SMS service providers charge per text message or part of a text message Each message or part is 160 characters If you create a text message under 161 characters you are charged for one message If you create a message that is 161 to 320 characters you may be charged for two messages and so forth A counter appears at the top of the page to indicate the receive information number of characters Even though a message has more than 160 characters the message wirelessly appears as one message to the person receiving the message SMS More commonly oo known as text messages 1 Go to Applications and select SMS B Short Message Service messages can be received by most mobile 2 Select New phones JEJ 0 unread OA Length 0 Unread 336558986 Let s meetat message 1336558986 ihave some ide 5559191 Sorry will be l Read 6505551234 _ diduhear fro i message Send amp Check Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 411 If you are concerned about the length of your messages you can have a warning appear when multipart messages exceed the specified number of parts Open the Options menu and select Preference
192. ator rights to install Palm Desktop software e Internet Explorer 5 0 or later e 32 megabyte MB available RAM 64MB recommended CHAPTER 1 Palm T X Handheld Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer e 170MB available hard disk space e One available USB port e USB sync cable included with your handheld e CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your handheld MAC ONLY e Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor e Mac OS X version 10 2 8 or 10 4 requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software e 128MB total RAM e 190MB available hard disk space e Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 X 600 or better e One available USB port e USB sync cable included with your handheld e CD or DVD drive for installing Palm Desktop software from the CD that came with your handheld CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer L Before You Begin Step 1 Connecting and charging your handheld If you re upgrading from another Palm Powered device synchronize your 1 Connect your handheld old handheld with your old desktop software a Plug the USB sync cable into your handheld and into a USB port on the back of your Ona laptop computer the computer USB port may be located on the side b Plug the AC charger into the Multi connector on the sync cable and into an outlet After the initial charge charge your
193. ats c Select the End on pick list and select an end date if needed d If you selected Week in step c select the day of the week the event repeats If you selected Month in step c select Day to select the week within the month such as the 4th Thursday or select Date to select the same date within the month such as the 15th e Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 156 CHAPTER 7 DUETE L DITTE OFT ELA Scheduling an event that is longer than a day Reserve a block of time for events that span several days such as a vacation conference training class or an extended project You can reserve a specific block of time during the day or use events without times to flag a series of dates For example you can reserve vacation time from 6 23 6 30 using a repeating event without a time and then schedule a specific excursion from 9 00 to 3 00 on 6 24 and dinner with a friend at 6 00 on 6 25 Need to enter an event that extends beyond midnight Enter an end time that is earlier than the start time Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Press Calendar On Enter the event and then select the event description Set the repeat interval Event Details Timer gigg a Select Details Date Alarm b Select the Repeat pick list and Location select Daily until Category w Unfiled Repeat Daily until 11 25 06 c Select the year month and date Private O when the event ends OK Cancel Delete B d Sel
194. b Select the Repeat pick list and select Other Change Repeat i Task Details il None Day Week MART Priority Fixed Schedule Category v Personal Every 4 Month s Due Date None Endon w NoEnd Date Alarm Daily until Repeat by Date Every week Every other week Private Every month Repeat The 6th of every 4th month Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 238 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks To schedule an annual 4 task such as decorating for a holiday on the first a Sunday of a particular month select Month as b the repeat unit enter 12 on the Every line and then select Day as the Repeat By setting f Set the repeat interval Select Day Week Month or Year as the repeat unit Select Fixed Schedule to base the due date on the due date of the current task or select After Completed to base the due date on the date you complete this task With this option if you complete this task early or late the due date for the next task adjusts accordingly Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the task repeats Select the End on pick list and select an end date if needed If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Week in step a select the day of the week the task repeats If you selected Fixed Schedule in step b and Month in step a select Day to select the week within the month such as the 4th Thursday or select Date to select the same date within the month such
195. bration The process of aligning your handheld s touch sensitive screen so that when you tap an element on the screen your handheld detects exactly what you want it to do Palm T X Handheld Correcting problems with tapping Is your screen not responding to taps Are you getting unexpected results when you tap For example when you tap the number keyboard icon does the Bluetooth dialog box open instead If this happens it s time to align the screen 1 Open Touchscreen Preferences Goo Touchscreen Tap the target Tap the center of each target with your stylus This aligns the touchscreen digitizer a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Touchscreen Tap the targets on the screen as precisely as possible and then select Done N NOTE You need to tap at least three targets maybe more if you don t tap carefully 4 Done 556 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Selecting sound settings You can choose different types of sounds for Are sounds too soft or too loud Set the volume levels for the system game and alarm tones Calendar Tasks and or turn sounds off altogether with the Silent profile World Clock Go to the application open the Options menu and then 1 select Preferences Open Sounds amp Alerts Preferences Preferences Sounds amp Alerts a Go to Applications When you connect System Sound Medium headphones to your b Se
196. browser Blazer application See web browser application blinking cursor 64 blocking private entries 491 Bluetooth application entering basic settings for 289 features 287 288 icon on status bar 29 setting up phone connections with 290 294 Bluetooth devices assigning names to 302 303 558 connecting to 287 566 discovering 288 299 302 entering passkeys for 300 related topics for 304 sending photos and videos to 210 642 sending records to 461 setting up 289 302 sharing information with 33 synchronizing with 17 verifying status of 295 waking up device from 303 Bluetooth dialog box 289 Bluetooth HotSync option 89 Bluetooth icon 25 Bluetooth LAN Access Point connections 287 Bluetooth setting Edit Connection 566 Bluetooth technology 265 286 287 441 Bluetooth wireless connections 264 420 BMP files 191 bold fonts 539 bonding trusted pairs 300 Bookmark icon 429 430 Bookmark Page dialog box 428 bookmarks adding 422 428 arranging 431 displaying list of 429 editing addresses for 430 moving 432 selecting 429 viewing 429 Bookmarks dialog box 439 Bookmarks page icon 429 Bookmarks setting web browser 439 Bookmarks View 429 brightness 538 browsing options 440 442 445 448 450 browsing the web 25 287 295 421 See also web pages websites T X Handheld budgets 472 built in applications 23 124 Business Card command 466 business cards 136 466 business expenses 473 See also Expense application buttons activa
197. but does not fall into one of these categories From meeting notes to recipes and favorite quotations Memos provides a quick and easy way to enter store and share your important information Benefits of Memos e Store essential but hard to remember information e Send memos to colleagues wirelessly e Synchronize your information to back it up on your computer 248 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Creating a memo In the Memos list you can also just start writing to create a new memo 1 The first letter is automatically capitalized Go to Favorites and select Memo 6 2 Create a memo Use Phone Lookup to quickly add a name and a Select New phone number to a memo 1 Power Tips 2 Action Items 11 5 3 Quote of the Day 4 Birthday Wish List 5 Edits for Draft 2 6 Hot New Restaurants b Enter your memo Tap Enter on the onscreen keyboard or draw the Graffiti 2 writing Return stroke to move to a new line in the memo c Select Done y Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the memo Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Palm T X Handheld 249 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Viewing and editing a memo The Memos list shows the first line of each memo so make sure that 1 first line is something you will recognize Go to Favorites and select Memo 6 OL 2 View or edit the memo You can connect your handheld to a portable a In the Memos list select th
198. called Finance 1 Tap VersaMail in the input area 2 Open the Filters dialog box a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Filters d Select New Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 381 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Filters you create on your handheld also apply when you synchronize email on your handheld with email on your computer Palm T X Handheld 3 Enter the filter information Filter Editor i a Enter a short description of the filter in the Name field Ifthe From v Contains i onlinebroker b Enter filter criteria Then get mail and move to To pick list Select the message header field with the information contained in the edit line To From Subject cc Size For example you might select From to download only messages from a particular sender Contains pick list Select a filter action Contains Starts with Does NOT Contain Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field For example if you want to sort email with the subject Sales enter Sales If you enter more than one criteria separate each with a comma for example Sales New York Then get mail and move to pick list Select the folder or mailbox into which you want your filtered email to go You can also create a new folder for storing the incoming email Select Edit Folders and then create a new f
199. can add comments before sending your response Select Send to send the response to the meeting organizer by means of the Exchange server Don t respond Updates the server with your reply but does not send a response to the meeting organizer NOTE If you decline an invitation the invitation is automatically put into the Trash folder 4 Done 406 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with Calendar events When you set up an account in the VersaMail application that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync the Calendar application is synchronized directly with the info on the Exchange server as well Any new Calendar events on the server for the preceding seven days are downloaded to your handheld The interval for synchronizing Calendar events is always seven days even if you set a different interval on your handheld for synchronizing email messages IMPORTANT You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account If you want to stop synchronizing Calendar events with the server you must delete the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account Only Calendar and VersaMail information is synchronized directly with info on the Exchange server Other information on your handheld such as contacts tasks and memos continues to be synchronized with information in your desktop software application either Palm
200. cards SDIO autour expansion cards let you add accessories to your handheld SD and MultiMediaCard expansion pai cards let you store information and applications Tip Looking for a handy way to carry your expansion How can expansion cards help me cards You can purchase Listen to music Store songs on expansion cards and use the included Pocket Tunes software a variety of carrying to listen to music on your handheld cases Back up info Make a copy of your important information for safekeeping in case your handheld becomes damaged or is stolen Add games and other software Purchase popular games dictionaries travel guides and more Add accessories Attach SDIO accessories such as a presentation module to your handheld Store all your info Never worry about running out of space on your handheld Purchase as many expansion cards as you need to store your music photos videos and other information Expansion cards come in a variety of capacities and they re very small easy to store and affordably priced Palm T X Handheld 586 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Removing an expansion card Ry NOTE Your handheld comes with a dummy card inserted into the expansion card slot You must remove this card before you can put a real card into the slot To prevent damaging the card and the info on it always wait for your handheld to finish writing to the expansion card before you remove the 1 Push lightly down on the ca
201. cations Select the applications you want to encrypt and then select OK Y Continued Security Options i M Encrypt data when locked Choose Applications O Encrypt private records only Encryption type Encrypt Data Select applications to encrypt Favorites Calc Calendar Contacts Dialer Expense Memos Note Pad 506 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Synchronize your Al amp OPTIONAL To encrypt seuri Option O handheld with your only the private entries in the P M Encrypt data when locked computer frequently applications you selected a i Choose Applications to prevent loss of check the Encrypt private records OER x ner rivate records on information if intrusion only box ae y Encryption type w RC4 protection is triggered d Incorrect Quick Unlock attempts are not included in the intrusion protection counter 5 Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Limiting the number of password attempts You can set the number of incorrect password attempts that are allowed before selected information is deleted from your handheld This feature called intrusion protection protects sensitive information from an intruder who uses an automated means to try every possible combination until the password is found Use intrusion protection if you keep highly confidential information on your handheld IMPORTANT If you limit the number of password attempts be sure
202. ccccceceeeseeceeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeaeeaeeaees 37 Moving around in Favorites View o eceeeeeeeeeecennece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaees 39 Moving around in Applications View cc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaees 39 Moving around in list screens and entry screens eeeeeeerees 40 Moving around in dialog BOXES sissccsccccidsscaszesseecccseensecetaseadsscuaensareennd 40 Moving around in Men s siaina octeruntx cave aa na ianiai 41 USING MENUS sicccceestvcnceasesscccuesaslaccasastsscuentedxenenedeabye eceseensdeseceseseenmaaennasedens 42 Using the Command Stroke siisii iaeia anaondoa iiaia 43 Using the Command toolbar ssiri eaa 43 Finding UOT VAC O i esisi e as 44 Related TOPICS esinaine aiei oiana ainiai 45 Chapter 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld 47 How can enter information on my handheld ccccceeseeeeeseesesseeeeeees 48 Entering information with Graffiti 2 Writing ccccscseececssessesscseeeeeees 48 Writ MGA tS input ANCA isiss ces casteeeacadxans vase dacecacesdenetas ce tdastesvicstetevernedis 48 Using TuUll SCreGn Writing siiss cctechiccsceveeissscescave cewnensencxevendsraaveesaeeenen 49 Learning Graffiti 2 writing ccccccccsseceeeenneeeeeeeeneeeeeeesenaeeeessenaaeeeseeeaas 51 Writing Graffiti 2 Characters ssis miosan ani 51 Graffiti 2 alphabet icccecsicsesctecanss cate svansganses siudeeaes fonds jaesteansdeccstanndeenestandes 54 Palm T X Handheld iv Graffiti 2 MUMIDEMS
203. ccess to the mail server You need to set up a VPN to access corporate email in either of the following situations e Your company s wireless local area network LAN is located outside the firewall e Your company s wireless LAN is located inside the firewall but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall for example from a public location or at home Check with your company s server administrator to see if a VPN is required for you to access the corporate network Ry NOTE The Auto Sync feature in the VersaMail application may not work with a VPN connection Also you cannot use scheduled sending retry of email with accounts that use a VPN connection The Enterprise Software link on your handheld software installation CD contains a link to purchase and download VPN software for the handheld Once you purchase and download the software you set up a VPN connection in Preferences on your handheld If you are using a VPN connection make sure the connection is on in the VersaMail application In the message list open the Options menu and then select Connect VPN Ry NOTE if your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 you may be able to set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your handheld For more information see Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Palm T X Handheld 309 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Connecting to a VPN After
204. cel files and send them to your colleagues You can also receive attachments to view and edit at your convenience If your corporate mail system uses Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 you may be able to set up an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your handheld Benefits e Access email e Send and receive photos sound files Word and Excel files and more e Save messages from your computer to view at a convenient time 305 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Upgrading an existing email account If you already use the VersaMail application on a different handheld and want to keep your username you can upgrade your existing email account for use on your new handheld 1 Synchronize your new handheld ee lt with your computer When E prompted select the username ra Cx associated with your old Kamae New handheld this contains your Delete existing account information ene Help 2 On your handheld tap VersaMail in the input area Select Yes to accept the upgrade 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 306 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know About email accounts You can create up to eight email accounts The VersaMail application is software that lets you use your handheld to access email from an account with an email provider either an Internet service provider or ISP such as Earthlink or Yahoo or a wireless car
205. cgasccasadenanes tecccanendsecuaeentenceds aia 332 Adding ESMTP to an account ccccceeesseeeeeeceneeeeeeeeaeeeessenaateeeseenaaes 333 Getting and reading messages ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneaaeeaeeeeeeeeeeenees 334 Auto Sync With notification ccececcseeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeeneeeeeseenaeeneeseaaas 336 Scheduling Auto SYNC i icsissdecccsssesdensceveassesecadeeasescceevasscaccasdssedccevess eens 336 Auto SYNC NOTIFICATIONS cceccececcsteeeeeeenneeeeeeceaeeeeseeeaeeeesseaaeeeesenaaes 338 Setting alert OPtONS s lt cciesscciesisseccereesdecinesseaccesedeseescevussbenctenvsdeonts 339 Viewing and using the Reminders screen eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 340 Auto SYNC TOMIGS cccscissscectesseccevensisscncedassecceedassvensdeavsssascextassececatassyens 341 Resource issues with Auto SYNC cccccccesssseeeeesseeeeeeessseeeeeseneeeeeeas 341 Palm T X Handheld x Inbox icons in the VersaMail application ccccccccecsesseseeeseeeeees 342 Setting preferences for getting MESSAGES cceceeeesseeeeseestteeeeeseeeaes 342 Reading email MESSAGES siridir niederen aaae i 345 Adding or updating a contact directly from a message sss 346 Sending an email message ceeseeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeesseeeneeeesseeeneeess 347 Entering an address using Smart Addressing ssseeeeeeeeseeereeeees 349 Entering an address directly in the To field ssssssisssssrisssrrrrns 350 Entering an address using Contacts
206. click Change Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 106 CHAPTER 5 You should generally keep the default setting Synchronize the files for all applications Choose an overwrite option only if you have a specific reason for sending updates only one way Choose Do Nothing if you never use an application Palm T X Handheld Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Choose how information is updated during the next synchronization x Change HotSync Action amp HotSync Action for Memos OK a Synchronize the fies ema Help Q 2 C Desktop overwrites handheld I Set as default B C Handheld overwrites Desktop o ey C Do nothing Synchronize the files Information that is changed in one place your handheld or computer is updated in the other during synchronization Desktop overwrites handheld Information that has been changed on your computer is updated on your handheld during synchronization If information has been changed on your handheld it will be replaced by the information from your computer and you will lose the changes you made on your handheld Handheld overwrites Desktop Information that has been changed on your handheld is updated on your computer during synchronization If information has been changed on your computer it will be replaced by the information from your handheld and you will lose the changes you made on your computer Do Nothing No sync
207. connect you to the wireless world using either Wi Fi or Bluetooth wireless technology During the day you need the Wi Fi application to access your corporate network During the evening connect to the Wi Fi wireless network at your home or the local coffee shop to access your personal email and browse the Internet Benefits e Connect to your corporate network wirelessly e Stay up to date by connecting wirelessly anywhere e Transfer documents wirelessly 263 CHAPTER 14 Key Term Wi Fi Wireless technology that enables networks with access points to allow devices such as handhelds computers and printers to connect wirelessly to the Internet and corporate networks This handheld complies with Wi Fi 802 11b specifications To learn more about Wi Fi technology go to www wi fi org Did You Know If you are out of range of a Wi Fi access point you can remain connected using Bluetooth wireless technology Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections What can do with the built in Wi Fi wireless technology Access your corporate network Whether you are attending a meeting or roaming the hallway you can stay connected to the information you need Send email messages Whether you send email messages once a week or constantly throughout the day wireless connectivity means that you can share information Access the web Connect to the Internet for news and information in a caf
208. connection on your wireless technology to send photos and videos to other wireless devices within range Sending handheld a file using wireless technology can take some time so be patient There are other ways to 1 send photos and videos Tap Media in the input area wirelessly Attach the items to an email message Beam the items 2 Send a photo or video A aom Ea to other Palm Powered devices Copy the items a Select the pick list at the top of HJT kiai to an expansion card the screen and then select the and then insert the card album containing the photos into another device and or videos you want to send b Highlight the photo or video To send a photo to a FT z ou want to send ia device with which you y n ok H5 have formed a c Select Send 5 partnership select the Show pick list and then d Select Bluetooth and then select OK select Trusted devices on the Discovery Results e Select the device to which you want to send the photo or video and then screen select OK The file is sent automatically 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 211 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Support Related topics If you re having problems with Media or with anything else on your handheld go to Click a link below to learn about these related topics www palm com support aa f i Sharing Sending information using wireless technology on your handheld VersaMail Sending photos and videos as attachments to email messages Pa
209. contact b Select OK Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 140 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts 4 Customize the appearance of the Contacts list a From the Contacts list open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select the display options you want Remember last category Check the box if you want Contacts to display the last category shown when you return to it from another application If the box is unchecked Contacts opens to the All category List by Select whether to sort the Contacts list by last name and first name or by company and last name 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 141 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Before You Begin Making a connection from a contact You must complete all the prerequisites for the email and messaging applications You can set up your contacts so that you can do tasks like dialing a phone number creating an email or text message accessing the web or sending an instant message requires additional software sold separately directly from a contact screen Contacts gives you two tools to perform these tasks To use Quick Connect a with your handheld s Quick Connect Lets you select a connection type and opens the application for making that type builtin Bluetooth of connection directly from a contact s information screen wireless technology you must set up a phone connection To use it with your handheld s IR port run Phone Link Up
210. creates a smaller file size but also gives a lower playback quality Increase the bit rate to improve playback sound quality but remember that this increases file size My handheld doesn t play the music files burned from a CD The Pocket Tunes application installed on your handheld plays music files in MP3 format only You must change the settings in your desktop music application to save files from a CD as MP3 files To play files in other formats such as WMA upgrade to the deluxe version of Pocket Tunes you can purchase it by using the Addit application on your handheld or visiting www Palm com My handheld doesn t play the music files downloaded from my favorite online music store The Pocket Tunes application installed on your handheld plays music files in MP3 format only To play files in other formats such as WMA upgrade to the deluxe version of Pocket Tunes you can purchase it by using the Addit application on your handheld or visiting www Palm com When I save songs from a CD I do not see the song title or artist name When capturing songs from a CD you must have an active Internet connection to obtain song title and artist information This information is supplied from the GraceNote server on the web Palm T X Handheld 620 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Tasks The info entered does not appear in an application e Open the Options menu and select Preferences If Show Completed Tasks
211. ct Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 581 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Establishing a VPN connection 1 Open VPN Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select VPN 2 Establish a VPN connection a Select a VPN account from the VPN Account pick list b Select Connect VPN c If prompted enter your VPN username and password 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 582 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Ending a VPN connection 1 Open VPN Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select VPN 2 Select Disconnect VPN 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 583 CHAPTER 26 If you re having problems with customization or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Your Handheld Moving Around Entering Information Bluetooth Wi Fi Privacy Categories World Clock Locating the input area and other controls on your handheld e Opening applications e Using menus e Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter information e Using ShortCuts to quickly enter text phrases Customizing Bluetooth communication settings Customizing Wi Fi communication settings Keeping information private by locking your handheld with a password Creating categories so you can organize your applications and information
212. d files such as photos wirelessly or print wirelessly on a Bluetooth printer You can also find your way using a Bluetooth GPS navigator Use the built in Bluetooth wireless technology to set up connections to devices within approximately thirty feet of your handheld on howto enable the What types of connections can I make Bluetooth features With Bluetooth wireless technology you can make connections using the following types of devices Did You Know You have two ways to e To browse the Internet or access your email account link through your desktop computer s connect wirelessly Wi Fi network connection or establish a connection to a Bluetooth LAN Access Point and Bluetooth wireless technology Having two ways to connect means you have a better chance of connecting wherever To access the Internet or an email account connect to your mobile phone To use a mobile phone you must dial your ISP or sign up for an account with a high speed wireless carrier To send and receive text messages connect to your mobile phone you are at e To synchronize your handheld with your computer wirelessly connect to your computer To share files with another Bluetooth device such as a handheld or printer form a partnership with that device using a trusted connection Palm T X Handheld 287 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections What is device discovery Discovery is the process in which your handheld searches for oth
213. d make sure that the application is selected e Reinstall Palm Desktop software and select the option to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook can t synchronize wirelessly using my handheld s Bluetooth technology e Make sure that the HotSync manager is running on your desktop computer The HotSync manager icon G must appear in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen e Click the HotSync manager icon G and verify that there is a checkmark next to Local Palm T X Handheld 614 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions e Your handheld may not be able to recognize the virtual serial port on your Windows computer Try validating the virtual serial port you re using or create a different virtual port and change the HotSync manager settings to use the new virtual port To change the virtual serial port click the HotSync manager icon g Select Setup and then select the Local tab Select a port from the Serial port pick list When you synchronize wirelessly your handheld attempts to connect to a Bluetooth virtual serial port on your computer First it looks for a Bluetooth serial HotSync port If it cannot find that port it then looks for a generic Bluetooth serial port However some generic Bluetooth serial ports do not support synchronization Refer to the documentation that came with your computer operating system for instructions on creating changing the virtual port for serial communication If the virtual serial port you want t
214. d personal information it s time to share it with others Your handheld comes equipped with a variety of options for sharing information so that you can choose the quickest most convenient way of sending your info Benefits of sharing e Keep others up to date with meaningful business and personal information e Choose the most convenient sharing method from a variety of options e Create an informal backup copy of important info 460 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information Before You Begin Using the Send command You must complete all the prerequisites for the You can send information from within an application such as a photo or video a contact or an messaging application appointment to other Palm OS handheld users You can also send a category of information or even an entire application To use your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless You can use the Send command in many applications to send information wirelessly using one technology you must set of the following methods up a phone connection To Pa use it with your handheld s e Using the built in Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld IR port run Phone Link Updater and then use the Phone Link application to set up a phone connection e As an attachment to an email message e As part of a text message Did You v Sending information from within an application using You can also easily send Bluetooth technology info
215. d then select OK Look Up again 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 512 CHAPTER 24 If you want to combine items in different categories rename one category to the other category name Some categories like All and Unfiled come with your handheld and cannot be changed Palm T X Handheld 1 Using Categories to Organize Information Renaming a category Do one of the following e To rename a category within an application open that application e To rename a category for applications go to Applications Rename the category a Select the pick list in the upperright corner and then select Edit Categories b Select the name of the category you want to change and then select Rename c Enter a new category name and then select OK d Select OK again 4 Done 513 CHAPTER 24 Using Categories to Organize Information Deleting a category If you delete a category the items in that category will move to the Unfiled category In Expense you can delete a category including its contents with the Purge command tip To display the category pick list in Calendar Day View open the Options menu select Display Options tap Day and then check the Show Category List box Palm T X Handheld 1 Do one of the following e To delete a category within an application open that application e To delete a category for applications go to Applications Go to the Edit Categorie
216. d version of the web page so that it is optimized for handheld viewing Wide Page Mode Displays the web page as it would appear in a desktop computer web browser Y Continued 426 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web 5 amp OPTIONAL If the web page is larger than your screen you can tap and drag the stylus to move the web page in any direction to view different parts of the web page To activate the Tap and Drag scrolling you must set the Tap and Drag setting in the General Preferences tab under the Options menu This feature is disabled when you turn on Writing Area Preferences and use the full screen for Graffiti 2 writing 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 427 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Bookmarking your favorite pages Bookmarking your favorite web pages allows you to quickly return to those pages Bookmark A pointer to a web page The actual page is not stored only the URL Also called a Favorite in some browsers You can set your bookmark list as your start page Palm T X Handheld Adding a bookmark 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Go to the web page that you want to bookmark Open the Bookmark Page dialog box a Open the menus b Select Page and then select Add Bookmark amp OPTIONAL Change the New Bookmark 0 bookmark name description or URL Search Y Continued 428 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web You can also view your 5 Select OK
217. dater Using Quick Connect and then use the Phone Tap to Connect Opens the application to perform a connection task directly by selecting the appropriate entry phone number email address and so on from a contact s information screen If you have a compatible mobile phone sold separately that includes Bluetooth wireless Link application to set technology you can use Quick Connect to dial a phone number address an email or a text up a phone connection message go to a website or send an instant message requires additional software sold separately directly from a contact 1 Press Contacts a Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 142 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts You can also open Quick 2 Connect from the Contact List view by highlighting the contact you want and Make a connection using Quick Connect a Select the contact you want then pressing right on the b In the Contact view select the Quick Connect icon E at the top of the 5 way navigator screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box Quick Connect i If you want to close the i Lee Tsai Quick Con nect dialog box Work 555 234 1939 gt a without making a obile 555 234 9191 SSMS 555 2349191 connection press Left on mail tsailee example com Eem dil Ste seigen anne sys the 5 way c Select the type of connection you want For example select a phone number to dial the number on your mobile phone or select an email address to open the
218. dd an unscheduled event line without a time to a scheduled appointment a Select New Select the event description select b Select No Time Details select the Time box and select the start aug 31 06 4sm wis Sat Tine and end times eit i 2 End Time 3 4 w No time zone gt 7 8 No Time 9 10 11 4 Enter a description on the line FERA sM wis that appears at the top of the tion screen 8 00 9 00 10 00 Ry NOTE A diamond appears in 1100 the time column to show that the 1 00 event doesn t start at a specific te time 400 5 00 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 153 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar To select intervals such as the 2nd Tuesday of every month or the 3rd Thursday in November of every year see Scheduling a repeating event unusual interval Palm T X Handheld Scheduling a repeating event standard interval There s no need to re enter events that take place on a regular basis Just set up a repeating event This is a great way to block out time for things like a daily walk with the dog a weekly team meeting a monthly game night with friends and annual events like anniversaries and holidays 1 2 Press Calendar O2 Enter the event you want to repeat and then select the event description Set the repeat interval Event Details 9 Time a Select Details Date Alarm b Select the Repeat pick list and select how Location often the event repeats Daily until Every categ
219. de panel controls 21 signal strength wireless connections 268 Signature dialog box 352 signatures 352 Silent profile settings 557 Simple Mail Transfer Protocol See SMTP servers sketching 255 slide shows 192 195 203 small fonts 539 540 small icons 536 small triangle bookmarks 429 Smart Addressing feature 349 SMS application See also text messages benefits of 410 installing 25 opening 411 related topics for 419 sending text messages 411 662 SMS messaging 25 411 SMTP servers 318 327 333 Snooze setting 529 soft resets 597 607 software See also applications See also specific application adding additional 120 586 included on handheld 23 installing 7 73 120 third party applications and 8 Solitaire 24 song files See music files song formats 213 song lists See also music creating 223 deleting 228 editing 226 naming 224 removing items on 227 reordering music on 227 selecting items 225 troubleshooting 620 Sort by date option 205 Sort by name option 205 Sort by pick list 260 Sort by type option 205 Sort manually option 205 Sort order option 356 sorting expenses 480 memos 512 notes 260 photos 205 T X Handheld videos 205 sound files See audio files sounds changing alarm 258 setting alarm 165 183 245 529 setting preferences for 557 Sounds amp Alerts screen 557 space characters 554 570 space information handheld 122 123 speaker 22 557 special characters 51 53 60 61 Specific Import Fields di
220. ded with the computer for information on how to prepare it to accept a Bluetooth connection The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pairing or a Bluetooth link e Select the Device box Select the computer a When the Discovery Results screen appears select your computer If your computer does not appear on the list select Find More b Select OK amp OPTIONAL If prompted enter a passkey a Enter a passkey number This can be any number you choose it does not have to be for example a password you use to access a network or an email account IMPORTANT You must enter the same passkey on your handheld and your computer in order to wirelessly synchronize with your computer We recommend that you use a passkey of 16 digits where possible to improve the security of your handheld The longer the passkey the more difficult it is for the passkey to be deciphered b Select OK Y Continued 92 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 6 Synchronize your handheld with your computer a Go to Applications and select HotSync 2 b Make sure that Local is selected and then select the connection you created in step 3 from the pick list c Tap the HotSync icon onscreen 4 Done Now you can easily synchronize with your computer wirelessly Palm T X Handheld 93 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Before You Begin Synchro
221. dialog box 139 Delete dialog box 124 647 Delete Event command 168 Delete Event dialog box 168 Delete From pick list 125 Delete icon 43 Delete Item command 478 Delete Memo command 252 Delete Memo dialog box 252 Delete messages on server option 388 Delete Note command 261 Delete Old Messages dialog box 366 Delete Task command 242 Delete Task dialog box 242 deleting ActiveSync accounts 408 applications 124 594 appointments 168 bookmarks 430 categories 514 connections 561 564 contacts 139 desktop software 7 email 365 366 368 388 email accounts 332 email filters 385 events 168 170 514 expense items 477 479 files from handheld 127 Graffiti 2 ShortCut strokes 555 information 70 127 498 594 608 locations 527 mail folders 360 memos 252 notes 261 Palm Desktop software 125 passwords 497 T X Handheld photos from album 202 playlists 228 private entries 497 saved web pages 430 service profiles 575 songs 227 tasks 242 243 video from album 202 description fields 150 151 Desktop overwrites handheld option 107 109 desktop software See also Palm Desktop software archiving information in 127 overwriting information in 107 109 removing old 7 updating handheld from 107 109 desktop software installing 23 Details dialog box 515 567 573 device ESD and 638 device name cache 302 Device name field 289 device names 302 303 558 Device pick list 122 devices 80 265 288 561 devices See also Bluetooth devices dev
222. disappear from the list when you check them off but they stay in your handheld s memory until you purge them Record Completion Date Replace the due date you assign to a task with the date you really complete and check off the task If you don t assign a due date to a task the completion date still records when you complete the task Show Due Dates Display each task s due date in the list if you assigned one and display an exclamation point next to each task that is overdue Show Priorities Show the priority setting for each task in the list Show Categories Show the category for each task in the list Alarm Sound Select a sound for the alarms you assign to your tasks 4 Done 245 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Tip Working with Tasks on your computer Windows If you chose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook check out the online Help in Use Tasks on your computer to view and manage your tasks Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Tasks on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics Outlook to learn how e Learning about the parts of the Tasks window to use Tasks on your computer e Entering editing and deleting tasks e Creating repeating tasks e Marking tasks as private e Showing masking and hiding private tasks e Assigning tasks to categories e Printing your task list e Selecting how to view tasks e Sorting tasks by due date priorit
223. ds are convenient for sharing very large items Beaming Using the IR port on your handheld you can beam information from within an application such as a photo or video a contact an appointment or a task to other Palm Powered handhelds You can also beam a category of information or even an entire application NOTE The receiving handheld must be turned on Depending on the receiving handheld model not all information may be sent correctly Palm T X Handheld 465 CHAPTER 20 If you re beaming while using your handheld in landscape mode remember to point the narrow end of your handheld toward the receiving handheld In Contacts you can create a contact with your own information and select it as your business card by opening the Record Menu and selecting Business Card Beam your business card to other handhelds by holding down the Contacts Quick button until the Beam dialog box appears Palm T X Handheld Sharing Information Beaming information from within an application 1 Select the information you want to beam a Open an application b Select the entry you want Beam the information a Open the menus b Select the Beam menu item in the leftmost menu The leftmost menu in most applications is named Record c When the Beam dialog box appears point your handheld s IR port directly at the IR port of the other handheld IR port Wait for the Beam dialog box to indic
224. e highlighted by the 5 way for example the Quick Connect icon in a contact Border glow This highlights elements of the user interface like command buttons pick lists Contact Details a Show in List Y Work Category v Unfiled Private O OK Conca Detete B Contacts v All Lima Jose 302 555 9512M Malita J T jtm jtm com Maroni Anthony 415 555 7775 W Nosuch Don donn example com Sanagala Srivinas 954 555 1234 H Speier Lane 831 555 7534M Taylor David 650 555 9278 W Technical Support lF Venkat Raja raja anyisp com Weiss Chris 555 2367 W and arrows Button i highlighted with border glow Reverse type white text on a dark background This highlights an entry on a list Contact list screen or a phone number email address or entiy web link on a web page or in a message highlighted with reverse type Blinking cursor The blinking cursor tells you that you can enter text at that point Blinking cursor 302 555 9512 M jtm jtm com Maroni Anthony 415 555 7775 W Nguyen Mai 555 3434 W Nosuch Don donn example com Sanagala Srivinas 954 555 1234 H 831 555 7534M 650 555 9278 W Speier Lane Taylor David Technical Support D Venkat Raja raja anyisp com Weiss Chris 555 2367 W LookUp S 38 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip Moving around in Favorites View In Applications View to remove the selection Up or Down Scrolls to the next favorite i
225. e you want to attach the file To select adjacent items b On the New Message screen Let me know if the attached look OK drag the stylus across tap the red paper clip icon in each item the upper right corner Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 378 CHAPTER 16 Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Attach the file a Select the Type pick list and then select the file type Attachments Select Media Address vCard All Albums Accessori Application prc wv Technica Appointment vCal Database pdb Documents O 6 1 1 04 59K Memo Text 5 Attach tial y 1 1 04 75K Files on Card One 4 SS 1 1 04 67K Nie N NOTE The Files on Card option appears only if an expansion card is inserted into your handheld s expansion card slot Select it to display all files on the card in the upper box of the Attachments dialog box b Check the box next to the items you want and then select Done 4 Done 379 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Advanced VersaMail application features You can customize and optimize your experience using the VersaMail application in any of the following ways Palm T X Handheld Creating and using filters to determine the types of email messages that are downloaded to your handheld Managing settings for incoming and outgoing mail Adding APOP to an account Setting advanced account preferences Changing email header d
226. e MyExchange Mail Service v Exchange Activ 398 CHAPTER 16 Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Enter the account username and password a Enter the username you use to access your email b Select the Password box enter your email account password and then select OK c Select Next Enter your email address and Exchange mail server name Select Next Y Continued MyExchange 9 Enter the username and password assigned to this account Username Password MyExchange i Review your settings and edit if necessary Email Address 399 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 6 Do one of the following MyExchange woe done Basic setup for your mail Finish setup Select Done to finish account is completed setup and go to the Inbox of the Teese select Don account you set up where you can For additional settings select Advanced To try your connection select Test settings begin getting and sending email Set additional mail options Select Advanced to set advanced mail options Test settings Select Test My Settings to test settings for this account and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 400 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting advanced mail options on your handheld In most cases you do not need to change the default advanced mail 1 f f options Check with your Set incoming
227. e a note as a reminder set an alarm for that note 1 2 Go to Applications and select Note Pad es Open the note a Select Done to display the Note Pad list b Select the note you want to set an alarm for 1 Welcome to Note Pad 7 2 2 Groceries 7 5 3 Bob 7 5 4 Flowers 7 5 5 Bank 7 5 Y Continued 258 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad You can also open the Set 3 Set the alarm Alarm dialog box by selecting a note and a Open the menus tapping the right edge of the screen next to the b Select Options and then select Alarm note title c Select the Date box and then select the year month and date you want the alarm to sound Set Alarm 12 13 19 20 21 22 25 26 27 28 29 d Select the time you want the alarm to sound e Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 259 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Viewing and editing a note Sort the Note Pad list alphabetically by date or manually Open the 1 Options menu select Preferences and then select the Sort by pick list 2 Go to Applications and select Note Pad es th te If you sort manually you Open the ate can rearrange the list by dragging notes to another position in b Select the note you want to view or edit the list a Select Done to display the Note Pad list 1 Welcome to Note Pad 2 Groceries 3 Bob 4 Flowers 5 Bank 3 Read or edit the note and then select Done 4 Done
228. e an authentication error when try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point Make sure you entered the correct username and password for the selected network service profile in the Network Preferences screen When I try to synchronize wirelessly through a LAN access point it connects but nothing happens e Make sure that Network is selected in the HotSync manager menu on your computer e Contact your system administrator to make sure your network computer is properly set up want to synchronize my computer with more than one handheld If the computer running Palm Desktop software synchronizes with more than one handheld each handheld should have a unique name Synchronizing more than one handheld with the same username causes unpredictable results and potentially loss of your personal information Assign a username to your handheld the first time you synchronize If you are synchronizing with Outlook make sure the right profile is selected for the applications you want to synchronize in HotSync manager In Palm Desktop software click HotSync and then select Custom Palm T X Handheld 617 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Calendar selected the Today button but it does not show the correct date Make sure the Set Date box on the Date amp Time Preferences screen displays the current date created an event but it doesn t appear in Week View e If scroll arrows appear on the right of your screen
229. e category of expenses 1 2 Go to Applications and select Expense 8 Open the Purge Categories dialog box Purge Categories New York a Open the menus b Select Purge on the Record menu Delete the category and all of its items a Select the category you want to delete b Select Purge c Select Done 4 Done 479 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses d You Know Customizing the expense list SASRA NARIN ME SNEONS You can change the appearance of the expense list list makes it easy to see how much you spent on each type of expense For example to see how 1 much you spent on taxis sort your expenses by type so that all your 2 taxi expenses appear together in the list Go to Applications and select Expense amp Select Show Use categories to further 3 Select the pick lists to change any of the following items and then select OK refine your list Sort by Sort expenses by date Show Options ii or type Sort by v Date Distance Show distance in miles Distance v Miles or kilometers M Show currency Show currency Show or hide the currency symbol in the expense list 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 480 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses Working with Expense on your computer WINDOWS ONLY Use Expense on your computer to view and manage the expenses you create on your handheld Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Expense on your
230. e memo you want keyboard and type your Memo LEZE JE i memos on the go without A 1 Power Tips Act carrying around a heavy lapt 3 Quote of the Day aptop 4 Birthday Wish List 5 Edits for Draft 2 6 Hot New Restaurants You can change the size of the text in Memos to enhance readability b Read or edit the memo and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 250 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Moving a memo in your Memo list If you use Palm Desktop software for You can move memos up or down in your memos list For example you might want to keep all synchronizing you can memos on a certain topic grouped together send a memo to your computer by synchronizing and then 1 Go to Favorites and select Memo 6 open the memo on your computer in an application such as Microsoft Word for 2 further editing formatting and so on a Locate the memo you want Right click the memo on your computer click Send Move a memo 1 Power Tips 1 Power Tips To and then select the 2 Action Items 11 5 2 Action Items 11 5 3 Quote of the Day 3 Quote of the Da application to which you 4 Birthday Wish List want to send the memo 5 Edits for Draft 2 5 Birthday Wish List 6 Hot New Restaurants 6 Edits for Draft 2 b Move the memo up or down by dragging the stylus across the screen A black dotted line appears to represent the memo you are moving c When the line is in the locati
231. e parts inside Opening your handheld voids the warranty and is not recommended under any circumstances want to see how much battery life have left A battery icon Gaal appears at the top of Favorites and Applications views Check the icon periodically to see if your handheld needs to be recharged If the battery becomes low a message appears on the screen prompting you to recharge the battery l m not sure when need to recharge my handheld We recommend that you recharge your handheld for at least half an hour every day Ideally connect your handheld to a power source every night and recharge it while you sleep My battery is drained The memory on your handheld is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained completely When you recharge your handheld all of your existing information should appear My battery drains too quickly You can conserve battery life by doing any of the following e Adjust the screen brightness e Reduce the Auto off setting e Use Keylock to prevent your handheld from turning on by accident e Stop music or video playback when not in use e Respond to or cancel alerts promptly Palm T X Handheld 606 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Tip e Turn off Bluetooth wireless technology and Wi Fi functionality when not in use After a soft reset the Preferences screen appears with the Date amp Time option highlighted so you can reset the
232. ececascaaeaaars a a EOE 519 Chapter 25 Managing Clock Settings ccccceeeees 520 Checking the current date and time sssssssssssssssrssrnsrnesssressrnnnnnnnnnneennnnnns 521 Setting the primary location cccccccceseseteceeseeeeeeesseeeseeseeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeess 521 Setting the date and time for the primary location ssssssssssesessees 522 Choosing secondary locations for other time Zones ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 524 Modifying the locations St iirinn 525 Adding NEW locations sssrini N 525 Deleting a lOCAtION sc cisescicctesessctvcsdvescastedensscccecad eaa eadi 527 Setting the alarm ClOCK cccecccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeessceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeessseeeaeess 528 Responding to the alarm ClOCK saiseicccseess cckiveiaseacduasetteconceesnpesaesaaayaecds 529 Changing the ClOCK dISDIAY sicsv2eccncsvassestasune vaceteccansendecaks s enedeccstesttenavar eens 530 Related TOPICS sssini oiana sodna naan addan aa 531 Chapter 26 Customizing Your Handheld 000006 532 CUSTOMIZING Favorites VICW sssrinin aen ia aaia 533 Changing the background photo in Favorites View essssse 533 Changing entries in Favorites s ssssssssssssssesssessnnnnnnennnsesnennnnnnnnnnenne 534 Customizing Applications View c ccccceceeeeeeeeee eee eneeeeceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeese 536 Making the screen easier to read oo cececcecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeennenaes 538 Changing the Screen fOnts snimis a 538 AdJUStING the Brigh
233. ect sels one of the following Sort by Date Lists photos and videos from the earliest to the most recent date Select Sort by Date again to list items from the most recent to the earliest date Sort by Name Lists photos and videos by name in ascending A Z order Select Sort by Name again to list items by name in descending Z A order Sort by Size Lists photos and videos from smallest to largest file size Select Sort by Size again to list items from largest to smallest file size Sort manually Lets you tap a photo or video and drag the stylus to where you want the item to appear A dotted black line indicates the position of the item 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 205 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Did You Know Create multicolored art Select a color and draw on a photo and then select a different color and draw some more Each drawing keeps its original color Tip Select the drawing tool button to change line size Select the text tool button to change font size Use the eraser selection on the drawing tool to erase drawings only select Undo to delete text You can use Undo only once to delete text for a given photo If you need to delete text after using Undo select Done and do not save the photo and then open the photo and try again Palm T X Handheld Personalizing a photo To add a personal touch to a photo use the drawing tool or add a voice clip Drawing on a photo 1 2
234. ect OK 4 Done 157 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Entering a location or a note for an event Enter a description of the event s location such as a restaurant a conference room or your friend s house Enter a note such as dial in info for a conference call or directions to a location 1 2 Palm T X Handheld Press Calendar On Enter the event and then select the event description amp OPTIONAL Enter the Event Details Ci location Time Date a Select Details Alarm Location Lake Tahoe b Select the Location field and Category Personal enter a description of the Repeat v Daily until 11 25 06 location Private O Y Continued 158 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE T ELA 4 amp OPTIONAL Enter the note Family reunion Snowt a Select Note b Enter the note text c Select Done 5 Select OK 4 Done The location name and a note icon appear next to the event description in Agenda View and in Day View Palm T X Handheld 159 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Did You Know Scheduling an event with a time zone Did You K V You can also set a preference to automatically include a time zone whenever you create a new event Open the Options menu and IMPORTANT Do not use times zones if you are synchronizing with Palm Desktop software Time zones work only if you are synchronizing with Outlook or Exchange ActiveSync Palm Desktop software does no
235. ect the application you want to beam N NOTE You cannot beam an application that has a lock icon next to the application size Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 468 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information 2 Beam the application a Select Beam b When the Beam dialog box appears point your handheld s IR port directly at the IR port of the other handheld IR port 3 Wait for the Beam dialog box to indicate that beaming is complete 4 Done Other ways of sharing information Here are some other ways of sharing information e Copy information or an application onto an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot and view the information by inserting the card into the slot on another Palm Powered handheld e Copy information such as a photo or video from your handheld to your computer or from your computer to your handheld by synchronizing Palm T X Handheld 469 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information Support Related topics If you re having problems with sharing information or with anything else on your handheld go to Click a link below to learn about these related topics www palm com support Moving Info Sharing information by synchronizing your handheld with your computer Expansion Sharing information by saving it to an expansion card that can be viewed from another handheld Bluetooth Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Wi Fi Setting up a ne
236. ect the connection a Select the Connection pick list and select your mobile phone from the list b Select Test to make sure the settings work with your phone c Select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 568 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Before You Begin Customizing network settings You need the following a Your handheld includes software that lets you connect your handheld to your Internet service e A mobile phone with a provider ISP or to a dial in remote access server using a mobile phone After you configure Bluetooth radio or an IR your network settings you can establish a connection either by using the menus from the Network port sold separately Preferences screen or by using a third party application e A wireless service provider account that Setting up a service profile includes high speed data Service profiles store the network settings for your ISP or dial in server You can create save and services or that supports reuse service profiles You can create additional service profiles from scratch or by duplicating an dial up connections existing profile and editing the information additional fees may apply An SP accountora 1 Open Network Preferences corporate remote access account additional fees a Go to Applications may apply e Connection Preferences b Select Prefs 8 settings for your mobile Connection v IR to Nokia 6310i c Select Network phone enabled with IR
237. ed you are returned to the application you were in when you opened the Wi Fi controls Y Continued 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections When you enter a URL in the web browser or select Get and Send in the or to browse the web VersaMail application a connection is automatically initiate with the last used service Setting up a device to device Wi Fi network 4 Done You are now ready to send and receive email messages When Wi Fi functionality is on the Wi Fi icon on Tap Wi Fi controls on the status bar the status bar displays signal strength bars showing the strength of 2 your network connection Scan for available networks a Select the Wi Fi pick list and Before You Begin then select On You need to know the following information b Select Scan Setup e Name of the network also known as an SSID Continued e Security information such as WEP keys e Channel number You may also need to know the IP address and DNS server information Palm T X Handheld 264 CHAPTER 14 Encryption key A series of letters and numbers that enables data to be encrypted and then decrypted so it can be safely shared within a network Your handheld supports two encryption systems WEP and WPA PSK A network that does not appear on the list may be hidden for security purposes Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections Do one of the following The net
238. edavends teccvensccetaseessecgecessisanazvessnesnuennns sexs 496 Deleting a forgotten password cceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeenenneaeaeeens 497 Locking your handheld cisscscscscsdisceacacsieccatancdsceecagessasedanadeteceueueens sennepaasacede 498 Locking your handheld automatically ccccccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteaeeaeees 499 Locking your handheld manually issiron 501 Using Quick WNMIOGK secscitsicedccessvieds cecas seeds cei hscadezassvacecevgasiaetdexdssanadetas ners 502 Creating a Quick Unlock combination eeeeeeeeeeetteeeeseenteeeeeeeenees 502 Deleting your Quick Unlock combination ceeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeeeeeeees 504 Encrypting your INFOFMATON sssini siinsesse neii neiaa aa 505 Limiting the number of password attempts sssssssesessssseresessrrrrernssnssses 507 Related topis esgos a aaa E Ea Taaa aN 510 Chapter 24 Using Categories to Organize Information 511 Adding arcate G ONY srarsironoiosaronri oino 512 RENAMING a category ssiriorands ersero inais aa aaa adede 513 XV Deleting a Cate GOry sciarra ninia tunes asteguvcesieteuendassesvBedsseecee 514 Placing information in a category ssssiciccsctssacacacsassandanes shangennesestateasesncers 515 Placing an Entry IM a Cat QGONy isisisi 515 Placing an application in a category cceceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneenneees 517 Viewing Information by category sisi ccccsscassceceecstsecncndeanssenaeecsanescencedanecce 518 Related LOD ICS saccceccxeatec
239. ee new levels of see more of the message MSN Hotmail Extra Storage Learn on a single screen mate Vv Done Reply Fwd Delete Select More to view the entire message Palm T X Handheld 345 CHAPTER 16 Tir You can also update an existing Contacts record with a new email address or create a second Contacts record for a name that has an existing record The procedure is the same as for adding a new Contacts record If you select Add to Contacts from an email message and a record already exists for the recipient name you are prompted either to update the email address for the recipient or to create a new record for the recipient Palm T X Handheld 1 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Adding or updating a contact directly from a message You can add an email address to Contacts directly from the body of a received email message Open the Add Contact dialog box a Open the message you want b On the message screen open the menus c Select Options and then select Add to Contacts amp OPTIONAL Ifa display name exists for this Contacts record the dialog box displays the name in the Last name and First name fields If the Last name and First name fields are blank enter the first and last name associated with the From email address Select OK to add the email address to Contacts and then select OK in the confirmation dialog box 4 Done 346 CHAPTER 16 Sending
240. ee the memory Clear Cache Indicates how much cache memory is being used and allows you to clear the cache immediately and free the memory Clear cache on exit Check the box to clear the cache each time you exit the web browser Uncheck the box to keep the cache from session to session Select OK 4 Done Preferences i Page General Advanced Cookies 0B Clear Cookies Cache Clear Cache O Clear cache on exit 447 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Setting preferences for using a proxy server Proxy server A server Your handheld comes with the proxy server turned off You can turn the proxy server on and that provides access to configure a proxy server files from other servers by retrieving them either from its local cache or 1 froin theremoteserver Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Advanced tab Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 448 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Palm T X Handheld 3 Set your proxy server preferences a Select Set Proxy b Check or uncheck the Use custom proxy box to use or not use a proxy server c If you want to use a proxy server select the Use custom proxy box and enter the appropriate server address and port number Preferences fi Proxy Settings y y L You may need to select a custom Page General_ proxy server to access t
241. eeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeeseenaees xxi EIK S ecco ceuexne Body sxsuatesidoesanes saicelane saeeudasnncaneaaue a Ra A EEEE xxi SIGE Dal S eie aa E EE EES xxii Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer 1 Whats mitha DOR svi dasassesbaderssucetncateeds nected strata a a e 2 System requirements o ccceeessceeceenteeeeeeecaaeeeeeseeaeeeesecenaeeeeseceaeeeessenaeeeeeeeenas 2 Step 1 Connecting and charging your handheld cccesssceeeeeenteeeeeeeeees 4 What you should know about your handheld s battery sseeessessens 5 Step 2 Setting up your handheld for the first time sccseceeeeeeeeeees 6 Step 3 Installing your software ou ececcecsteceeeecnneeeeeeseaaeeeeseseaaeeeeseeenaeeeessenas 7 Synchronizing your handheld and your computer 0esssseeeeeeeeeeeeens 8 Switching to another desktop software application ccccssseeeeees 10 Using user profiles ycenssveaceseesionesvests deaseecousteedadey Hoveaved sh qeeevieds linddawes Syleasuerdes 11 Creating a user profile oo eee ce cece eeeece eee ee teeter eee eeeaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeaaes 12 Synchronizing with a user profile ccccceeseeeeeesseeeeesseeeeeeeeeseeneeees 14 Related TOPICS bez ceive akts lt cideas siiin aa tic ai Ea aa Kaai aa iaa 17 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld 0 18 What s on my handheld sorissesssiriincnetioeinii diein a 19 EKORT siaina A e A a a E aa aA aa 19 TOP efai ai a a a A ni E
242. eeeess 188 Related topics seriinin aa aa a a ENa 189 Chapter 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer 190 COPYING a photo OF VideO sscetecsescccexsenepavans aea e a aiaa 191 VIEWING a PHOTO OF VideO sisirin nedan edi 192 Viewing a Slide SHOW sasccvcessccdecaeesscececceantnsadtess snedecgensadadananasdengenie steaks 195 Rotating a PRO sisectsscscacceciesccnahiuads erana a Ea 197 Viewing and editing photo or video details ssssssesssesssssssssrrrrrrnsnnenn 198 Organizing photos and videos ccccccceseeeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseneeeeessseeeeeess 201 Organizing photos and videos into albums c cseeeeeeenteeeeeeeeneees 201 Moving a photo or video within and between albums 00 203 Sorting photos and videos ose eeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaeeesseaaeeeesennaas 205 Palm T X Handheld vii Palm T X Handheld Personalizing a POCO iwissina aaia aaia dai iana 206 Drawing oma PROtono aaaea adasia 206 Copying a photo OF VideO issii aa a aian 208 Deleting a photo OF VideO seinoria aai saade 209 Sharing a photo or a VideO cisiivesccceeecvascncsevens secegeeass vadeewess ceneeerdecnedveess ceed 210 Sending a photo or video using Bluetooth wireless technology 211 Related tODiGS concious ea a a e anani 212 Chapter 10 Listening to Music c ccsccceseeeeeees n 213 Benefits asais E E E E 213 Transferring music from a CD to your handheld eeeeeeeeeeeees 220 Managing PIAV
243. elect the text that you want to review 4 Done Matches for palm Memos Download Applications Extend Your Handheld Coverage Contacts Accessories www palm comM Technical Su www palm com M Calendar Tasks Don t forget to register 44 CHAPTER 3 If you re having problems with your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld Moving Around in Applications Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Your Handheld Entering Information Sharing Privacy Categories Managing Info Locating the controls on your handheld Discovering the built in software on your handheld and the additional software on the CD e Getting familiar with the input area and onscreen application controls Entering information with Graffiti 2 characters and shortcuts Entering contact information in other applications Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered handhelds Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth handhelds by using Bluetooth technology on your handheld Keeping information private by turning on security options Creating categories and organizing your applications and information e Adding and deleting applications on your handheld e Viewing application information 45 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Customizing e Using a photo as the background for Applications and Favorites views e Displa
244. eless connections to a mobile phone network or computer for sending Essential Software controls and receiving information Access these controls from the status bar folder icon B VersaMail Send receive and manage email messages wirelessly using your handheld s wireless capabilities or by synchronizing with your Windows computer a Web Browse your favorite websites using your handheld s wireless capabilities SMS Send and receive short text SMS messages using your handheld s Bluetooth wireless capabilities to connect to a compatible mobile phone WiFile Access your wireless network so that you can download pictures documents and more that are located in shared folders on a networked computer D Dialer Dial phone numbers directly from your handheld Palm T X Handheld 25 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Tip After you install an application and discover how valuable itis be sure to add it to Favorites Tip Use the Enterprise Software link to check for new software available from the Palm enterprise website Palm T X Handheld Customization These applications let you customize your handheld to make it uniquely yours They may already be installed on your handheld or you may need to install them from the CD as Favorites Pes Prefs m Addit Enterprise Software link O World Clock amp Card Info Customize a list of your favorite applications and web pages so that you can locate
245. elp This guide is meant to tell you everything you need to know to set up customize and use your handheld However you may occasionally run into an issue that is not addressed in this guide Here are some resources to help you if that happens Self help resources If you run into a problem with your handheld be sure to check these resources first e Answers to common questions about your handheld and its features e The Palm Desktop online Help e The Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User s Guide located in the Documentation folder on your installation CD e The Palm Knowledge Library accessible at www palm com support e The most recent Palm T X handheld HelpNotes on your regional website Palm T X Handheld 631 CHAPTER 30 Getting Help Technical support If after reviewing the self help resources you cannot solve your problem go to www palm com support or send an email to your regional Technical Support office Before requesting technical support please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem When you do contact Technical Support please provide the following information e The name and version of the desktop operating system you are using e The actual error message or state you are experiencing e The steps you take to reproduce the problem e The version of handheld software you are using and available memory To find version and memory information follow these steps 1 Go to App
246. email application to a new message containing that address in the To field 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 143 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Customizing Quick Connect settings You can specify which application opens when you choose a Contacts record field and whether to add a prefix to each phone number Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Press Contacts 2 Customize Quick Connect settings Settings O Number Prefix a Select the contact you want Dial Phone Dialer SMS Messages b Select the Quick Connect icon G at the top of the screen to open the Quick Connect dialog box E mail v VersaMail v None Available v None Available z v None Available c Select Settings and enter the settings you want Number prefix Check the box and enter a prefix to add a prefix to all dialed phone numbers N NOTE A prefix is not added to any number that begins with a character All other fields Select each pick list and select the application you want to use to connect by that method d Select OK 4 Done 144 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Before You Begin Using Tap to Connect You musi have a With Tap to Connect you can select a contact and dial a phone number or address an email or compatible mobile phone text message by selecting the appropriate entry on the contact screen By default Tap to Connect sold separately that is not enabled includes Bluetooth wireless technology
247. ems with the VersaMail application or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics Moving Using the Graffiti 2 command stroke in email messages Around Entering Info Cutting copying and pasting text from an email message Managing Info Downloading email messages from your computer to your handheld Bluetooth Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Wi Fi Setting up a network connection using Wi Fi wireless technology on your handheld Customizing Setting preferences for connecting to a network Common Answers to frequently asked questions about the VersaMail application Questions 409 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Creating and sending a text message Receiving and viewing a text message Editing a draft text message Setting advanced messaging features Related Topics Palm T X Handheld If you need to get a short message to a friend or co worker fast send a text message from your handheld by means of your mobile phone GSM phone with IR or Bluetooth wireless technology required sold separately to their mobile phone Messaging is a popular way for people to stay connected using the text messaging features of their mobile phone Benefits e Enjoy quick communic
248. en folders In the Inbox or on another folder screen select the folder pick list in the upper right corner and select the folder containing the message s you want to move Tip You can also open the menus select Message N Continued New Get and then select Move To Palm T X Handheld 358 CHAPTER 16 To select a group of adjacent messages drag the stylus to the left of the message icons Sending and Receiving Email Messages Move a single message a Tap the envelope icon to the left of the message you want to move and then select Move To from the list 21 212 M Jason Burkey RE Coffee Quick meeting invite o M Larry Chen o today for ook Results f v Inbox 12 31p 7 o amp Paula Lagasse 12 18p 12 03p in 11 54a mo 11 53a 21 212 v Inbox M Jason Burkey 12 31p 7 RE Coffee o amp Paula Lagasse 12 18p Quick meeting invite Larry Chen 12 03p RE S2 to today for mse in 11 54a ook Results f mo 11 53a 4_U2 Getti U2 Getti Y b From the folders list select the destination folder you want 3 Move multiple messages a Tap to the left of the icon for each message you want to move A checkmark appears next to each selected message b Tap a message icon next to a selected message and then select Move To from the list c From the folders list select the destination folde
249. en select Add b Select Lookup and repeat step a for each address you want to add 4 Done Look Up Add Cancel Palm T X Handheld 351 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Attaching a personal signature You can attach a personal signature with info like your company s address and telephone number to the bottom of all messages you send 1 Open the VersaMail Preferences a From the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Signature 2 Add a signature Signature M Attach signature a Check the Attach Signature box b Enter your signature information and then select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 352 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know Send retry Send retry doesn t work If a send attempt fails for any reason after you select Send for example your handheld is out for VPN connections or of range or the application cannot connect to the mail server you can choose to have the for accounts for which application move the message to the Outbox and keep trying to send the message every your ISP requires you to 30 minutes a maximum of three times log in to the mail server before sending mail If you put a message in the Outbox you must select Send to send the message on the first try It also doesn t work if The VersaMail application attempts automatic send retry
250. en the web browser Last Page Viewed The last page you viewed before exiting the web browser Bookmarks The Bookmarks dialog box opens The web browser does not connect to the Internet Home Page The page you have set as your home page Blank Page An empty page with no URL or dialog box 4 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 439 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Setting advanced browser options You can change options on your handheld to improve the speed ease of use and security of your browsing experience Speeding up web downloads You can improve the download speed by using the Fast Mode options Images in web pages can be very large You can set an option to make web pages download faster by removing images altogether Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the General Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select General tab 3 Select Fast Mode Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 440 Cascading Style Sheets A file that controls the fonts colors and other design elements of some web pages When you select the Fast Mode icon you are shown atip on Fast Mode To bypass this tip in the future check the box Don t show this tip again Palm T X Handheld 4 Set Fast Mode Options and then select OK Disable cascading style sheets Only the HTML file for the page is downloaded This may leave some parts of a page unformatted Don t
251. er 4 Done 362 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting reply preferences You can set reply preferences including whether to include the original message text in a reply as well as the name and email address to show on your reply The preferences you set apply to all reply messages you send 1 Open Reply Options preferences a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Reply Options Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 363 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Set the preferences you want Reply Options When replying to a message Message text Select whether to Include original text include original message text with Your name in the From field a reply JS User Reply to Address with Your name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages such as Joe Smith Reply to Address with Enter the email address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your email messages only if this is different from the email address from which you are sending the message For example if you are sending a message from me yahoo com but you want recipients to reply to me earthlink net enter the reply to address here A reply to address makes it look as though the email came from the address you entered BCC Check the BCC box to send a blind copy of any email message you send to another email addr
252. er 1 is the most important b Tap the due date and select a date from the list or select Choose Date to select a date from the calendar 4 Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the task Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often Palm T X Handheld 234 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Before You Begin Setting an alarm Create atask and assign it a due date A task must have a due date before 1 Go to Favorites and select Tasks 6 you can set an alarm YVo canc stomize th 2 Open the Set Alarm dialog box alarm sound for your tasks in the Tasks Preferences dialog box b Select Details a Select the task you want to assign an alarm to l c Select the Alarm box When you set an alarm a little alarm clock appears TUDES 77 Set Alarm to the right of the task Priority M Alarm description Category v Unfiled Due Date v Wed5 10 06 3 days earlier Alarm Repeat Next alarm Private Sun 5 7 06 o OK Cancel Caere O A MOC OUAMaWN gt Cancel Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 235 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks To select intervals such as 3 Set the alarm the 2nd Tuesday of every month or the 3rd a Check the Alarm box Thursday in November of every year see b Enter how many days before the due date you want the alarm to sound Scheduling a repeating task unusual interval c Select the time columns to set the time the alarm sounds
253. er Bluetooth devices within its range approximately thirty feet As each device is discovered it shows up in your discovery results After you find the devices you are looking for you can select the devices with which you want to connect The Bluetooth application on your handheld can be turned on and off and the application has a Discoverable setting that can also be turned on and off The following is a description of setting combinations and the resulting discovery states Bluetooth Off When the Bluetooth setting is off other users cannot discover your handheld This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and a security chain and disabling the doorbell When Bluetooth application is off you cannot access the Discoverable setting Bluetooth On and Discoverable No When your handheld and Bluetooth application are on and the Discoverable setting is set to No you can receive connections only from devices with which you have previously formed a partnership with a trusted connection This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and disabling the doorbell but any friends who already have the key can enter By default the Discoverable setting is enabled when the Bluetooth application is on Bluetooth On and Discoverable Yes When your handheld is on Bluetooth application is on and the Discoverable setting is set to Yes you can receive connections from any Bluetooth device You are automatically connected with devices with
254. er to old tasks for tax purposes If you save an archive copy of your deleted tasks you can refer to them later by importing them Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Tasks 6 Open the Purge dialog box Delete all tasks a Open the menus marked completed Save archive copy on PC b Select Purge on the Record menu amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of your completed tasks on your computer Select OK 4 Done 243 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Customizing your Tasks list Control which tasks show up in the Tasks list and how they are sorted These settings also affect tasks in Calendar s Agenda View You can also choose the alarm sound for your tasks Calendar s Agenda View also displays your tasks Go to Favorites and select Tasks 6 2 Open the Preferences dialog box TAFE Sort by v Due Date Priority a Open the menus M Show Completed Tasks M Record Completion Date b Select Options and then Show Due Dates M Show Priorities O Show Categories Alarm Sound Alarm select Preferences Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 244 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks 3 Palm T X Handheld Change any of the following settings and then select OK Sort by Select the order in which the tasks appear in the Tasks list Show Completed Tasks Display your finished tasks in the Tasks list If you turn off this setting your finished tasks
255. er when they are deleted in the VersaMail application 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 388 CHAPTER 16 Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Changing email header details When viewing a message in any folder you can change the view of the message header The email header options are as follows Short header Shows sender s name or address From field and subject line Subj field Select icon to switch From Travis Washington to full header lt trwashjr hotmail com gt Subj cool site check this out www futurefacing com There are now three new levels of Full header Shows the following Sender s name or email address From field Subject line Subj field Date message was composed sent or received Date field Size of message including any attachments Size field Recipient s name or email address To field Select icon to switch From Travis Washington to short header lt trwashjr hotmail com gt Subj cool site Date Thu Feb 5 20045 24am Size 501 bytes To joe jmswordsmith com check this out www futurefacing com 389 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are composing Short header shows the To and Subject fields only full header shows the To cc bcc and Subject fields Select to switch to New Message Hl full header Subj Payroll dates Have been ch
256. erences screen 534 541 color coding 151 161 164 colors applying to annotations 206 applying to email 356 applying to events 151 161 164 applying to notes 257 changing screen 541 changing text 180 setting background 257 541 column widths 357 command gestures Graffiti 2 59 Command mode 43 command shortcuts 43 Command strokes Graffiti 2 43 59 Command toolbar 43 commands 41 42 43 See also menus communication speed 562 563 567 communications protocols 308 574 compact discs 220 T X Handheld company phone lists and memos 11 completed tasks 241 242 243 245 components handheld 2 Compress Day View check box 180 computers connecting to 8 99 287 copying information to 469 customizing connections for 566 displaying primary settings for 100 entering information with 112 managing schedules from 184 overwriting information on 107 109 preinstalled software for 23 removing Palm Desktop software 125 synchronization options for 102 104 synchronizing with 75 78 89 617 troubleshooting synchronization problems 612 updating information on 73 106 Conduit Settings command 14 108 Conduit Setup dialog box 98 conduits 74 106 conference calls 158 Confirm note delete check box 261 confirmation messages 261 confirmation tones 588 conflicting events 180 conformity declaration 636 Connect to setting 566 connecting headphones to device 557 to AC charger 561 606 to Bluetooth devices 287 566 to dial in servers 570 to mob
257. erforming Calculations Related topics Click the links below to learn about these related topics If you re having problems with Calculator or anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld Moving Around Entering Information Expense e Opening applications e Using menus Entering numbers with Graffiti 2 characters Keep track of your expenses 487 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private In this ch Choosing a security level Marking information as private Setting the level of privacy Using a password Locking your handheld Using Quick Unlock Encrypting your information Limiting the number of password attempts Related topics Palm T X Handheld You probably wouldn t leave your door unlocked at night so why should it be any different with your handheld When you think about the amount of personal and private information stored there you ll definitely want to protect it Benefits of privacy e Protect information if your handheld is misplaced e Hide private information e Unlock your handheld using only one hand 488 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Choosing a security level There are a variety of security levels available for your handheld Choose the level that provides the best mix of security and convenience Activating no security features All entries are accessible to
258. es If the web browser recognizes the address that you are entering due to a previous entry and autofill is enabled autofill automatically completes the address c Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 421 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Accessing a web page using the address field You can also hide the address field to show more of the web page 1 Open the Options menu and select Preferences Uncheck the Show 2 Address Bar box Go to the web page you want to view F e Enter the address of the web Create a bookmark to page in the address field and save the location or then select Go create a saved page to save the content of a e If you are going to a web page web page indefinitely you recently visited select the Address field pick list and then select Go 4 Done Palm T X Handheld Go to Favorites and select Web amp Address field pick list of recently visited web pages Address field 2 Email 3 Downloads 4 Sports 5 Weather 6 Finance 7 Travel 8 Directories 0 More oogle Search Click below for palmOne news products and customer support es palmOne com Wireless Edition v 422 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Using a password to access a web page Some websites allow Some websites require you to use a password to gain access to information you to check a box to have your sign in name automatically entered 1 each time you visit a particular web p
259. ess The blind copy email address is not seen by the other recipients of the message For example if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate email account enter that email address 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 364 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with URLs email addresses and phone numbers in a message In email messages you receive you can do the following URLs email addresses and phone numbers in HTML messages appear as blue underlined text In text messages most URLs begin with http or www To view a page or file associated with a URL that does not begin with http or www select the URL copy it and paste it into the address bar in the web browser To receive an alert confirming that you want to delete a message open the Preferences menu select Deletion and check the Confirm deletions box Palm T X Handheld e Select a URL to view the web page or file associated with the URL Selecting the URL opens the web browser on your handheld so that you can view the page or file e Select an email address to open a new message screen with the address in the To field e Select a phone number to dial that number Deleting a message You can delete email messages from any folder For example you can delete old messages in the Inbox or messages that you were working on in the Drafts folder When you delete a message
260. esses uncheck the DNS box tap the space to the left of each period in the Primary and Secondary DNS fields and then enter the appropriate sections of each address IP Address Check the IP Address box to use a temporary IP address Uncheck the IP Address box to enter a permanently assigned address Select OK and then select Done 4 Done 574 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Palm T X Handheld Deleting a service profile 1 Open Network Preferences a Go to Applications User Name username worldnet A t b Select Prefs i Password Connection v IR to Nokia 6310i c Select Network a Phone a Delete the service you want to delete a Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to delete b Open the menus c Select Delete in the Service menu d Select OK and then select Done 4 Done 575 CHAPTER 26 Windows You can also create login scripts with a text editor on your desktop computer Create a file with the extension PNC and then install the file on your handheld using Quick Install Your login scripts can also use non ASCII and literal characters Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Creating a login script A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network server for example your corporate network or your ISP A login script is associated with a specific service profile created in Network Prefe
261. et Message Access Protocol IMAP N NOTE Some free web based email providers such as Hotmail do not support either the POP or the IMAP protocol You cannot use VersaMail to download messages to your handheld from an account with one of these providers Palm T X Handheld 307 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages v Term e The name of the incoming mail server K a y Firewall A system set f e The name of the outgoing mail Simple Mail Transfer Protocol or SMTP server up to protect against unauthorized access into e Your account s security feature if it has one such as Secure Sockets Layer SSL Authenticated a private network Post Office Protocol APOP or Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol ESMTP Did You Know Using a corporate email account With a corporate email account you may be able to access Microsoft Exchange IBM Lotus If you want to access email on your handheld using your corporate email account you create this account in exactly the same way that you would with any other account with one exception For a corporate email account you may need to set up a virtual private network VPN Domino or Sun iPlanet If your company has a Wi Fi wireless technology network or a Bluetooth wireless technology mail servers among access point located behind the corporate firewall you may not need to set up a VPN to access others your corporate email account See the next section for details
262. etails Backing up mail databases Synchronizing IMAP mail folders wirelessly Working with root folders Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL 380 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tin Creating and using filters Use filters to organize Filters provide efficient ways to manage email retrieval and storage When you select Get or Get amp yourincoming messages Send filters determine which email messages are downloaded to your handheld and in which For example create a folder the downloaded messages are stored filter so that whenever you receive email about sales meetings it goes immediately into a folder you create called Sales IMPORTANT If you create a filter only messages that meet the filter criteria are downloaded to your handheld You don t see any other messages that have been sent to you even in your Inbox To avoid this you must set up two filters For example suppose you create a filter to have all messages with onlinebroker in the From field moved to your Finance folder You must then create a second filter specifying that all mail not containing onlinebroker in the From field Or create a filter so that should be moved to the Inbox or other folder you designate If you don t create this second filter stock quotes sent to you only messages containing onlinebroker in the From field are downloaded to your handheld by your online brokerage service go to a folder you create
263. eting a contact 1 2 Press Contacts 2 Open the Delete Contact dialog Delete Contact 9 box Delete selected Contact a Select the contact you want M Save archive copy on PC b Open the menus c Select Delete Contact on the Record menu amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the contact on your computer Select OK 4 Done 139 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts id You Kna Customizing the Contacts list If you select Work Home Fax Other Main Pager By default the Contacts list displays the work phone number for a contact if no work phone number is entered another entry is displayed You can customize a contact s settings to display or Mobile from the pick d i different information on the Contacts list You can also customize the appearance of the list list the first letter of your selection appears next to the contact in the Contacts list for example W for Work If you select email no letter appears next to 2 the contact Press Contacts f2 Open the Contact Details dialog box a Select the contact you want You can also use the Contact Details dialog box to assign a contact to a category or to mark a 3 contact as private b Select Edit and then select Details Specify the information displayed with a contact a Select the Show in List pick list and select the information that you want to appear in the Contacts list for this
264. eval for this type of account is different from your handheld Note that that of other accounts Here are the important differences the interval for Calendar event retrieval is always seven days Ry NOTE These differences apply to an account that uses Microsoft Exchange AutoSync whether you manually retrieve messages or set up an Auto Sync schedule Message retrieval When you get messages manually or through Auto Sync Microsoft Exchange Did You Know i ActiveSync not only retrieves email messages directly from the server for the time interval set on When you set your handheld default is seven days it also retrieves all Calendar events directly from the server preferences for getting for the preceding seven days The interval for Calendar event retrieval is always seven days messages for a Microsoft regardless of the interval you set on your handheld Exchange ActiveSync account the Ask Every Wireless synchronization Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync supports wireless synchronization Time option does not with the server only To retrieve email messages and Calendar events you must select Sync in the appear VersaMail application to make a wireless connection to the server If you synchronize your handheld with your computer info from other applications Contacts Memos and so on is synchronized but email messages and Calendar events are not Message removal Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync removes any email messages fr
265. f you select HTML over the Internet any email messages sent as HTML are displayed on your handheld with basic HTML formatting intact If you select plain text all messages are received as plain text only regardless of the format in which they were sent The default is HTML Synchronize Outbox Folder Check the box to synchronize messages in your handheld s Outbox with messages on your computer during the next synchronization If the box is unchecked your Outbox is not included when you synchronize so messages in your handheld s Outbox are not sent Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 321 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages lip Check with your email provider or your system administrator for any incoming or outgoing mail settings you do not know Also check to see if your account uses SSL APOP or ESMTP or whether you need to change the default port number Palm T X Handheld Cont d Synchronize Inbox Folder Check the box to synchronize messages in your handheld s Inbox with messages on your computer during the next synchronization The box is checked by default if unchecked your Inbox is not included when you synchronize so new messages in your computer s Inbox are not downloaded to your handheld Click the Incoming Mail tab and Veruanail TH Aevanced Setings gg verify or edit any of the following EO DEAE settings i General Incoming Mail Outgoing Mail r E mail Information
266. filed sounds c Select the pick list and select Repeat None Minutes Hours or Days Private O sane When you set an alarm a d Enter how many minutes little alarm clock appears hours or days before the to the right of the event event you want the alarm to sound and then select OK 4 Done description Palm T X Handheld 165 CHAPTER 7 DUETE L DITTE OFT ELA You can also use the Event Details dialog box to change the alarm location category repeat and privacy settings Palm T X Handheld Rescheduling an event Press Calendar 2 Go to the event you want to reschedule a From Day View select Go To b Select the year month and date of the event c Select the event description and edit it if necessary IMPORTANT If you edit the description of a repeating event the new description appears in all instances of the event 3 Change the date and time a Select Details b Select the Time box and select the new start and end times c Select the Date box and select the new date d Select OK Y Continued Event Details i Time Date Alarm _5 Minutes Location _ Category v Unfiled Repeat None Private O0 OR Cre Delete E 166 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE ELA 4 Palm T X Handheld If you re changing a repeating RepeatingEvent event select one of the following Apply the changes to to select the event s you want to the nant record
267. fiti 2 help to learn how to write characters NOTE Your handheld recognizes strokes entered with the stylus other than Graffiti 2 strokes in the Note Pad application only e Make the Graffiti 2 character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area not on the display part of the screen If you want to write on the display part of the screen turn full screen writing on e Write Graffiti 2 strokes for lowercase letters in the left side strokes for capital letters in the middle and strokes for numbers in the right side of the Graffiti 2 writing area e Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in shift mode or in Punctuation Shift mode Palm T X Handheld 610 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions The info entered does not appear in an application e Check the Categories pick list in the upper right corner of Applications View Select All to display all the records for the application e Did you set private records to be hidden Check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records e Open the Options menu and select Preferences Make sure Show Completed Tasks is selected don t know how to save the info entered in an application Each time you complete an entry such as a contact memo or note your handheld automatically saves the information you entered You don t have to do anything special to save your info To protect your info and create a backup of your info synchronize often to back up the info o
268. for 245 viewing overdue 245 Tasks application adding tasks 234 236 238 categorizing information in 512 getting help with 246 importing information for 117 marking completed tasks 241 opening 23 234 235 236 238 240 241 242 243 244 overview 233 related topics for 247 saving information for 243 saving information in 234 securing contents 489 setting display options for 240 setting preferences for 244 245 synchronizing information for 76 112 transferring information to 66 troubleshooting 247 621 Tasks files 117 Tasks icon 23 Tasks list 171 240 242 244 TCP IP Settings button 100 TDA files 117 technical assistance 17 71 189 232 632 Technical Support office 632 telephone numbers See phone numbers testing email accounts 329 text adjusting fade setting for 534 537 changing color of 180 541 changing screen fonts for 538 entering 48 51 entering abbreviations for 554 finding on web pages 424 resizing 250 searching for 44 selecting 44 68 viewing against photos 180 text messages See also SMS application managing 25 opening 414 sending 287 410 411 664 viewing 414 415 416 418 third party applications 8 607 628 629 thousands separator 550 thumbnails photos 180 533 537 TIFF files 191 time blocking out periods of 154 157 changing 522 checking 521 displaying current 524 displaying free 180 displaying specific periods of 180 entering current 62 entering display options for 182 incorrect
269. formation you entered and all applications you installed on your handheld are deleted after the set number of failed attempts b Select OK Select OK two more times and then select Done 4 Done 509 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Support Related topics If you re having problems with private entries or anything else on your handheld go to Moving Around Opening applications www palm com support Click a link below to learn about these related topics e Using menus Managing Info Creating a backup of your information Customizing Entering your owner information in case your handheld is lost or stolen Maintaining Doing a hard reset Common Answers to frequently asked questions about privacy Questions Palm T X Handheld 510 CHAPTER 24 Using Categories to Organize Information Adding a category Renaming a category Deleting a category Placing information in a category Viewing information by category Related topics Palm T X Handheld If you re like most people you use your handheld to manage your work life and your personal life Yet these two areas contain so many details your children s after school activities your conference schedule your shopping list for the week and entertainment Categories help you organize different aspects of your life no matter how you choose to group them Benefits of categories e Better organize your
270. from Your Handheld Dialing a number using speed dial 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Dial the number Speed Dial a Tap Speed b Tap one of the named speed dial buttons 4 Done 457 CHAPTER 19 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Editing a speed dial entry You can go directly to the Edit Entry dialog box by tapping and holding a 1 speed dial button Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Edit an entry a Tap Speed b Tap Edit Speed Dial Edit Speed Dial il Tap Edi iai c Tap an entry d Edit the entry e Tap OK and then tap Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 458 CHAPTER 19 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics If you re having problems with Dialer or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Moving Opening applications Around Bluetooth Connecting your handheld to a mobile phone Contacts Using Quick Connect and Tap to Connect in Contacts to dial phone numbers Palm T X Handheld 459 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information Using the Send command Beaming Other ways of sharing information Related topics Palm T X Handheld You have to get this memo to your boss now Or the photo of the grandkids in their Halloween costumes to your mom After you ve used your handheld to create or capture that important business an
271. from within an application using BIWStOOth TECHNOLOGY sssssc2scces sasixevensaissactsysicadacenseantnanteteanedeters eae 461 Sending a category using Bluetooth technology cccseceeeeeeeneees 463 Sending an application using Bluetooth technology sessen 464 Using the Send command with the VersaMail application 465 Using the Send command with SMS cccceeseeeeeeesseeeeeeseneeeeeeeeee 465 BeamiM vaseenaies c czadassnastactiais ccxeedenrencedaasecudetnuns cc cdevandagsauaeaececenseenisneneventeess 465 Beaming information from within an application ccseeeeeeeees 466 Beaming a Cate GQ Ory ariarian a a a a aE 467 Beaming an applicatio Ti wicks sates suiesstedscsnasscatucsteseieadecesesaddaanayteatenstatenens 468 Other ways of sharing information cccccccssseeseeeeesseeeeeesesseeeeeeesssseeeess 469 Related tOpiCS opisina ean e aE Aa a Eaa 470 Chapter 21 Managing Your Expenses ceeeeeeeee 471 Adding AN expense sisestati ai ia aiaa 472 CHOOSINGICUTTENCY OPUOMS issernida a aaia aaa 474 Customizing the currency pick list ssssssssssssssesssrnsnnensssesssnnnnnnnnnneenne 474 Presetting the currency symbol ssssssssssssssssrrssssssnssennnnnnnnnssnnesnrnnens 475 Creating a CUrrency SYMBOI sisirin iiaeaa ada 476 Deleting EXPENSES srasicetccesveneeaicessantedenstea tx antes fence a veanaaivaki en tagaees cena 477 Deleting an individual expense ceceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeeaeeaeaaees 477 Pal
272. g 129 saving 132 139 selecting 40 transferring from other applications 148 Contacts application adding contact information 130 132 addressing email from 351 archiving information in 139 242 beaming from 466 benefits of 129 categorizing information in 512 515 creating business cards 136 customizing fields in 135 displaying additional fields for 133 T X Handheld duplicating information 137 importing information for 117 148 marking entries as private 490 opening 23 130 related topics for 148 saving information in 132 139 searching from 138 selecting field types for 134 setting display options for 141 synchronizing information for 76 112 transferring information from 66 troubleshooting 148 viewing online help for 147 Contacts files 117 Contacts icon 23 Contacts list 140 continuous events See repeating events controls application 34 locating 45 controls handheld 19 cookies 445 447 Copy command 69 593 Copy dialog box 593 Copy icon 43 copying applications 111 469 593 calculations 485 contacts 131 133 137 information 69 photos 208 210 469 service profiles 570 videos 210 469 copying and pasting 69 copy protected applications 593 corporate email accounts 265 308 309 country information 550 CPUs connecting to 8 displaying primary settings for 100 entering network information for 96 overwriting information on 107 109 preinstalled software for 23 removing Palm Desktop software 125 synchroniza
273. g 249 deleting 252 displaying 250 editing 250 251 keeping private 489 490 organizing 251 512 saving 249 252 selecting 40 sending as attachments 254 transferring to PCs 251 Memos application categorizing information in 512 getting help with 253 importing information for 117 marking entries as private 490 opening 23 249 250 251 252 overview 248 related topics for 254 reordering memos lists 251 selecting memos 250 synchronizing information for 76 112 transferring information to 66 troubleshooting 254 619 writing memos with 249 Memos files 117 Memos icon 23 Memos list 249 250 251 menu bar 42 Menu icon 610 menu shortcuts 43 menus 41 42 icon on status bar 29 Message text option 364 messages See also email text messages connection types for 287 displaying unread 171 180 downloading large 372 374 receiving 211 287 411 removing confirmation 261 sending plain text 321 setting alarms for 529 Microsoft Excel spreadsheets 655 attaching to email 376 importing information from 117 transferring to handheld 77 Microsoft Excel spreadsheets See Excel spreadsheets Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 393 account setup 395 401 deleting accounts for 408 getting calendar events 402 407 getting messages 402 meeting invitations and 405 Microsoft Exchange Server and 308 prerequisites for 393 previewing attachments 404 synchronizing events and 408 time zones and 407 Microsoft Internet Explorer See Internet Explorer Microsof
274. g the most recently used number 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Dial the most recently used number a Tap Dial to display the most recently used number The most recently dialed number is displayed Tap Dial b Tap Dial again to dial the number 4 Done 454 CHAPTER 19 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld u Kno Dialing a number from the Call History List Dialer keeps a list of 11 of the most recently dialed i numbers 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer If the number is a speed 2 Dial the number from the list dial entry the name from the speed dial entry a Tap History appears in the Call History list b Tap an entry from the History list Call History 19995555555 1 20 04 5 24 pm 3 1 20 045 23 pm Tap entry to enter number on Dialer view 1 20 04 5 23 pm 1 20 04 5 22 pm Tap Dial 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 455 CHAPTER 19 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Using speed dial Speed dial allows you to store ten of your most commonly used numbers and to dial one with a single tap Adding a speed dial entry 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Add a speed dial entry a Tap Speed b Tap an empty speed dial button Speed Dial Tap empty speed dial button Edit Entry c Enter a name and telephone number d Tap OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 456 CHAPTER 19 Palm T X Handheld Dialing Phone Numbers
275. glais Enter the same passkey on your handheld and the other device and select OK IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices have a built in passkey others enable you to choose the passkey see the documentation included with your Bluetooth device for information In either case you must use the same passkey on both the device and your handheld Many phones also require you to put the phone into a mode where it can accept a key exchange for bonding in a trusted pair See the documentation included with your phone for information BluetoothSecurity Enter passkey for Trusted Devices i 300 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections 5 Select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 301 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Setting advanced Bluetooth features These advanced settings are used in special circumstances If the remote device name has changed disabling and then enabling the device name cache forces your handheld to retrieve the new device name Palm T X Handheld Storing recently found device names When you enable or disable the device name cache you control whether or not your handheld retrieves the names of remote devices each time the discovery process takes place By default the device name cache is enabled which means the names of devices that are found are stored in cache The next time the device is discovered the name appears very quickly 1 2 Tap Bluetooth contr
276. guide for the other Wi Fi device to enable device to device networking When would use Wi Fi or Bluetooth technology You can make many of the same types of connections browsing the web checking email synchronizing wirelessly using either the Wi Fi or Bluetooth technology on your handheld Which one you use depends mainly on your location and circumstances Wi Fi Use Wi Fi technology when you are in range of a Wi Fi network access point often called a hotspot This can be in a public location such as a cafe hotel or airport at your job over your company s network or at home if you have a wireless network set up Bluetooth Use Bluetooth technology when you are not in range of a Wi Fi network but are able to make a connection to your mobile phone that is also enabled with Bluetooth technology This could be at home on the road or anywhere else you are in range of your wireless provider s data network Also use your handheld s Bluetooth technology to connect directly to other Bluetooth devices such as computers or handhelds to send and receive information Check the documentation included with the other device for instructions on how to set up the device s Bluetooth capabilities 264 CHAPTER 14 Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections It is possible to have both Bluetooth and Wi Fi turned on at the same time Even if both are turned on you can only access the Internet using one wireless
277. h your handheld and the server create the folder on your custom folders you handheld and check the Also create on server box create in addition to the default folders Inbox Outbox Drafts Sent and Trash e If there is a folder on the mail server but you need to create it on your handheld you do not need to check the Also create on server box You can turn folder synchronization on or off when getting mail or you can set synchronization options from a menu Tip If you have a folder on your handheld that Turning IMAP folder synchronization on or off matches a folder on the If you choose to display the Get Mail Options dialog box you can turn IMAP folder mail server you do not synchronization on or off in the box need to do anything before synchronizing wirelessly 1 From within an IMAP email account select Get or Get amp Send 2 Check or uncheck the Sync IMAP Get Mail Options Folders box and then select OK EERON Sync IMAP Folders v Done Palm T X Handheld 391 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages id You Know Synchronizing handheld and mail server IMAP folders from the After you select the Options menu folders to synchronize a connection is made to your email service 1 provider to update the server with changes Open the Sync IMAP Folders screen a In the Inbox or on another folder screen of an IMAP account open the from your handheld and menus to update your handheld
278. handheld at least half an hour 2 every day Charge your handheld for three hours Be sure your handheld is fully charged before going on to Step 2 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 4 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer What you should know about your handheld s battery While your handheld is charging take a minute to learn about the battery Whenever you see an alert on the screen warning you that the battery is low recharge your handheld Also recharge your handheld if it doesn t turn on when you press the power button So that your battery doesn t drain completely your handheld s Wi Fi functionality and expansion card slot functionality are automatically turned off when you see a Low battery warning message and the Bluetooth wireless technology and infrared IR functionality are turned off when you see a Critically low battery warning message Ry NOTE The memory on your handheld is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your handheld When you recharge your handheld all your existing information should appear Conserve battery life by doing any of the following e Adjust the screen brightness e Reduce the Auto off setting e Use Keylock to prevent your handheld from turning on by accident e Stop music or video playback when not in use e Respond to or cancel alerts promptly e Turn off Bluetooth
279. handheld to record your computer s network information on your handheld You must use the cable or the IR port for this synchronization Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 100 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 Prepare your handheld for LANSync Preferences network synchronization a Go to Applications and select HotSync 8 Q a b Open the menus LANSync c Select Options and then select LANSync Prefs d Select LANSync and then select OK 4 Synchronize over the network a On the HotSync screen select Local b Tap the HotSync icon to synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 101 CHAPTER 5 Palm T X Handheld Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Customizing your synchronization settings You can set the following options for synchronization e Choosing how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your handheld Windows only e Enabling or disabling synchronization on your computer setting whether synchronization is enabled automatically when you start your computer and choosing how much information to include in the synchronization troubleshooting log Mac only e Choosing how application information is updated during synchronization Choosing how your computer responds to synch requests WINDOWS ONLY In order for your computer to respond when you initiate synchronization on your handheld HotSy
280. he Message menu To display confirmation messages check this box Delete After Transfer Indicates whether data messages are deleted after you accept the data in the appropriate application To keep data messages after you transfer them to the application uncheck this box Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 417 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Outgoing SMS message settings may depend on the service offered by your SMS carrier Palm T X Handheld 4 amp OPTIONAL Select Details and set the following parameters Leave Messages on Phone Indicates whether messages are deleted from your phone after you download them to your handheld To keep messages on your phone after you transfer them to your handheld select this box Return Receipt Determines whether you receive receipt confirmation notices To receive receipt confirmation notices select Requested Expires Indicates how long unsent messages remain in your Outbox Select from the following options 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week 2 Weeks 1 Month and Max Time Message Center Indicates whether your handheld obtains your mobile phone service provider s Message Center number directly from the phone or whether you need to enter the number manually If your phone is already configured to use SMS you do not need to change this setting Select OK twice 4 Done 418 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages S rt If you re having problems with SMS o
281. he Web Setting a custom proxy may prevent g proxy may p Cookies OB Clear Cookies access to some carrier services Cache Clear Cache M Use custom proxy O Clear cache on exit Proxy Server d Select OK Select OK 4 Done 449 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Setting the JavaScript preference You can choose to bypass JavaScript elements on the web pages you view JavaScript is often used on web pages for interactive content 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the General Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select General tab 3 Check or uncheck the Disable JavaScript box to disable or enable JavaScript 4 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 450 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Support Related topics If you re having problems with the web browser or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Click a link below to learn about these related topics Moving e Opening applications Around e Using menus Categories Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them Bluetooth Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Wi Fi Setting up a network connection using Wi Fi wireless technology on your handheld VersaMail Sending email messages Palm T X Handheld 451 CHAPTER 19 Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Dial
282. he expense by entering the first letter of the expense type c Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type For example entering D opens a dinner item with N NOTE You must select an Expense type if you want to save the item today s date To enable this feature on your handheld open the Options menu and select Preferences Check the automatic fill box Expense EJAT Expense type type pick list Change the date of an expense by selecting the date of the item Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 472 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses Add extra information 3 Enter the details of the expense to your expense items Select the item and select a Tap Details Receipt etails Details Then select Note Category v Unfiled and enter the b Select each field where you want Type v Dinner information to enter information and enter it Payment Unfiled Currency p Category Select a category to sort Vendor i City Select Lookup in the YOQUT EXPENSES ed Attendees Attendees list to pull names from Contacts Type Enter the expense type Payment Select how you paid for the expense After you synchronize Currency Select the currency used to pay the expense You can preset this you can send your symbol expense information to a spreadsheet on your Vendor and City Enter the vendor and city associated with the expense computer For example a business lunch might be at Rosie s Cafe in
283. he information is not lost one tap restores it in both places IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize information at least once a day so that you always have an up to date backup copy of important information 73 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Before You Begin What information is synchronized Complete the following When you install Palm Desktop software from the software installation CD a conduit is installed to your computer for each of the following applications e Perform initial Y g app handheld setup e Install Palm Desktop amp amp EB O aA software and additional Calendar Contacts Documents Expense Media Memos Note Pad Tasks VersaMail software from the CD The conduits allow you to transfer information between the application on your handheld and Key Term the corresponding application in Palm Desktop software when you synchronize Conduit The synchronization software NOTE Information from Expense and Media is synchronized on Windows computers only that links an application on your computer with the same application on your handheld During CD installation you can synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook on your computer Windows only If you do info from Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos is synchronized with info in the same application in Outlook Memos is called Notes in Outlook Information for Expense Note Pad and Media is still synchronized with
284. he slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil Lets you connect standard 3 5 mm headphones sold separately to your handheld so you can listen to music and other audio applications Turns your handheld on or off and lets you turn Keylock on if active When Keylock is on your handheld does not respond when you press the quick buttons or tap any icons 21 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Palm T X Handheld Back Bluetooth radio internal Speaker Wi Fi radio internal Multi Reset connector Y button Multi connector Speaker Bluetooth radio internal Wi Fi radio internal Reset button Lets you connect the sync cable included or a cradle sold separately to your computer or connect the AC charger to an electric outlet Connect the sync cable when you want to synchronize or exchange information Connect the AC charger to keep your handheld s battery charged Lets you listen to alarms game and system sounds and music Enables your handheld to connect with other devices sold separately that use Bluetooth wireless technology so you can dial phone numbers directly from Contacts send and receive email and text messages browse the web and more Enables your handheld to connect to a Wi Fi network to wirelessly access email browse the web and synchronize Resets your handheld if it freezes stops responding To do a soft reset use the tip of the stylus to gently press
285. held 354 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with email folders By default the VersaMail application displays the messages in an account s Inbox folder You can easily view the messages in a different folder You can also customize the appearance of the message list in your email folders move messages between folders and create and edit folders Viewing another folder 1 On a folder screen select the folders pick list in the upperright corner of the screen ew J cet ipay 2 Select the folder you want to view 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 355 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages The customization options you choose apply to all email folders not just the one you are in Select Sort on the message list to quickly sort the list by date subject or sender Palm T X Handheld Customizing the appearance of the message list You can change display options on the message list as well as the size of columns in the list Ry NOTE Changing column size is available for one line message view only In the Inbox or on another folder screen select Display Customize any of the following Display Options O Sort by Date v Descend Sort by Select the Sort by pick list Show 2 line view and then select the column name M Date Default is Date Sort order Select Descend or Ascend Default is Descend Unread Black Read Black One or two line column view Se
286. held to synchronize your handheld with your computer You are finished with this procedure If your handheld does not synchronize with your computer go to step 5 Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 85 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer If your Wi Fi network is unavailable you can still synchronize wirelessly using Bluetooth wireless technology If you use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync your email and calendar information synchronize directly with your info on your company s Exchange server You can change the conduits that are run during Wi Fi synchronization by opening the menu selecting Conduit Setup from the Options menu and then checking or unchecking the conduit boxes Palm T X Handheld 5 On your handheld make sure the network service box is set to Wi Fi If your network service is not set to Wi Fi change the network service to Wi Fi a Open the menus from the HotSync screen b Select Network Setup from the Options menu c Select Wi Fi from the Service pick list and then select Done On your computer set your HotSync manager for Network synchronization a Click the HotSync manager icon G on the taskbar in the lower right corner of your computer screen b Select Network Y Continued 86 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Palm T X Handheld Tap the HotSync icon on your handheld to synchronize you
287. hen Fade 0 select Display Options O a s Select the View By pick list and select List or Icon as the display format If you want the last category you viewed to reappear the next time you go to Applications check the Remember Last Category box NV Continued 536 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld 5 Select a photo for the background a Check the Background box b Select the picture box c Select a picture d Select Done e Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo f Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 537 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Making the screen easier to read In many applications you can change the font style to make text easier to read There are four font Palm T X Handheld styles available In certain lighting conditions you may also need to adjust the brightness to read the information on the screen Changing the screen fonts ok up Use your stylus or the onscreen keyboards to create data Navigation basics Small font retrieve data like a phone _ number you want to look up Use your stylus or the Small bold font Memo 4 4of6 gt 4 4of6 gt Navigator Button Tips Use the Navigator button to navigate your handheld and retrieve data like a phone _ up Use your stylus or the onscreen keyboards to create data srnnertteere Large font Unfiled 3 Large bold font Unfiled 1 Memo 4 4of6
288. hen select the account from the list at the top of the screen Click Next 3 Select the option to synchronize with an email account detected on your PC E nter th e basic account VersaMail TM Desktop Mail Account Wizard information pain Enter Account Settings a Enter a descriptive name for t h h Name this account e 9 Work Account e account or use the one sS h own Enter your User Name the name assigned to you for this account isadusky Enter your Password b Enter your account username pai Enter your Email Address e g bob mycompany com and password Your email EEE address will be entered etree automatically based on the username you enter cme He c Click Next Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 312 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 5 Click Next on the mail servers screen This information is already filled in based on the account whose settings you are transferring to your handheld 6 Select whether to synch ronize VersaMail TM Desktop Mail Account Wizard X the information for this account to your handheld or to set up A RR EMaTad a n ot h er a cco u nt a n d t h en poiha finished entering settings for this account What would you like to do click Next iii I m finished setting up accounts and am ready to transfer these settings on my device I dlike to set up another account To set up or edit an account later
289. hoto or a video Related topics Palm T X Handheld A picture may be worth a thousand words but what happens when you have lots of pictures or videos that you are trying to keep organized Or maybe just a few that are so meaningful that you want to have instant access to them at any time Solve both problems with the Media application Media features easy viewing and organization of still photos and videos You can keep your favorite photos right on your handheld select photos as the background for your Favorites and Applications views and for Agenda View in Calendar even add a photo to a Contacts entry Benefits e Never be far from your favorite people or places e Simplify photo and video organization e Store multiple videos and hundreds of photos 190 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Before You Begin Copying a photo or video You must synchronize your handheld with your computer once before You can copy photos and videos to your handheld in the following ways e Ona Windows computer open the Media application from within Palm Desktop software drag you can copy photos and the photos or videos into the Media window and then synchronize videos to your handheld e Ona Mac computer drag the photos or videos onto the Send To Handheld droplet icon Tip and then synchronize You can also copy photos and videos to an On a Windows computer when you copy a photo in a popular fo
290. hronization occurs so any changes made on either your handheld or your computer are not updated in the other location Y Continued 107 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Palm T X Handheld 3 MAC ONLY 1 To use the option you select on an ongoing basis check the Set as default box If you do not check this box the option you select applies only the next time you synchronize Thereafter information is updated according to the default setting Synchronize the files Click OK and then click Done 4 Done Select the application you want to customize a Double click the Palm Desktop icon gy in the Palm folder b From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings c From the User pop up menu select the appropriate username d Select an application e Click Conduit Settings Y Continued 108 CHAPTER 5 You should generally keep the default setting Synchronize the files for all applications Choose an overwrite option only if you have a specific reason for sending updates only one way Choose Do Nothing if you never use an application Palm T X Handheld 2 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Choose how information is updated during the next synchronization HotSync action for Photos Synchronize the files BS O Macintosh overwrites handheld Pa O Handheld overwrites Macintosh Br O Do Nothing Default setting Synchronize the files
291. hronize Show more detail in HotSync Log Includes more troubleshooting information in the log that is generated when you synchronize Close the HotSync Software Setup window 4 Done 105 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Key Terr Choosing whether application information is updated Conduit The By default when information in each application is updated in one place your handheld or your synchronization software computer it is updated in the other However for an application included during synchronization that transfers information you can choose whether information that has been updated in one place is updated in the other between an application during the next synchronization on your computer and the same application on your WINDOWS ONLY handheld IP 1 Select the application you want to customize Windows For information on choosing a Click the HotSync manager icon G in the taskbar in the lower right corner whether application of your screen information is updated if you are synchronizing b Select Custom your handheld with Outlook see the online Outlook synchronization Help Click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen select Custom and then view the applications that are syncing with Outlook from the list c Select the appropriate username from the drop down list at the top of the screen d Select the application you want and then
292. i asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti Advarsel Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefait av apparatfabrikanten Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner Waarschuwing Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd Wanneer deze leeg zijn moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA Uwaga Nie kroi lub przekluwa baterii ani nie wrzuca ich do ognia Mog si rozerwa lub wybuchn wydzielaj c truj ce rodki chemiczne Zu ytych baterii nale y pozbywa sie w spos b opisany przez producenta i zgodnie z miejscowymi przepisami mnr NAND X NML NP9I710N NX D NN OX Myyi9nn NIDY K MSI NYINN OXNNA ANT IX ANT NIA NNO NX Yonn w py maw Danna MyMwn MIDD TOYNI w Palm T X Handheld 637 Palm T X Handheld Intrinsic Safety Warning Warning Explosion Hazard e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 e When in hazardous location turn off power before replacing or wiring modules and e Do not disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off or the area is known to be non hazardous Wireless Notices Usage Cautions In some situations the user of the wireless device may be restricted Such restrictions may apply aboard an airplane in hospitals near explosive environment in hazardous loca
293. icator Send 4 Done 194 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Viewing a slide show By default both photos and videos in an album are displayed during a slide show 1 2 Palm T X Handheld Tap Media in the input area amp OPTIONAL Setthe slide show settings Slideshow Settings M Show Videos Slide Delay 3 seconds a Open the menus Transitions Cross Fade Auto Rotate v Yes b Select Options and then select Slideshow c Adjust the settings Show Videos Show videos during the slide show Slide Delay Select the time each photo displays Transitions Select the type of transition between slides Auto Rotate Automatically rotate the photo or video for optimal viewing Y Continued 195 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer When viewing a slide show you can use your 5 way controls Press Up and Down to control the volume Press Left and Right to move to the previous or next media file When viewing a video press and hold Left and Right to move the video forward and backward in 5 second increments Once you have positioned a photo that position is shown in the slide show This allows you to focus on sections of the photo you would like to highlight This feature does not save the zoom setting Palm T X Handheld 3 Go to the folder or album where Location the photos or videos are located pick list Handheld Expansion card a Select Handheld m
294. ice to device networking 266 Dial prefix check box 571 Dialer application benefits of 452 dialing from 453 454 related topics for 459 troubleshooting 459 Dialer icon 453 Dialer keypad 453 dial in connections 562 dial in servers 569 570 572 dialing 453 454 455 457 dialing in to networks 95 562 dialing preferences 566 Dialing setting connections 566 dialog boxes 40 dial up accounts 294 296 dial up connections 566 569 dictionaries 586 digitizer defined 556 Disable Auto Complete check box 442 Disable Cookies check box 445 Disable device name cache command 302 Disable Images check box 441 Disable JavaScript check box 450 Disconnect on Exit option 387 disconnecting sync cable 81 disconnecting USB sync cable 612 Discover your device screen 120 Discoverable pick list 289 Discoverable setting 270 278 288 289 299 discovering Bluetooth devices 288 299 302 Discovery icon 299 Discovery Results screen 288 300 disk space requirements 3 Display Name option 364 display options web pages 426 Display Options command 179 533 536 Display Options dialog box Applications View 536 calendar 179 clock 530 Favorites View 533 648 display preferences 536 538 540 541 display views web browser 426 displaying application groups 515 application information 122 applications 518 appointments 171 174 175 176 bookmarks 429 calculators 24 Category pick list 180 181 contact information 135 140 current date and time 521
295. ich type of screen you re viewing and which item on the screen is highlighted To use the 5 way press Up Down Left Right or Center Center Up Left Left Down Portrait view Right Right handed landscape view On most screens one item a button a list entry or an entire screen is highlighted by default The highlight identifies what element will be affected by your next action Use the 5 way to move the highlight from one item to another onscreen Moving around with the 5 way On most screens one item a button a list entry or an entire screen is highlighted by default The highlight identifies what element will be affected by your next action On any screen only one item can be highlighted at a time Use the 5 way to move the highlight from one item to another onscreen 37 CHAPTER 3 When an entire screen is highlighted only the top and bottom borders acquire the glow the right and left borders do not show the highlight A few onscreen elements of your handheld can only be activated by tapping them with your stylus for example icons in the input area and the view icons in the lower left corner of the Calendar screen Palm T X Handheld Moving Around in Applications The highlight can take one of three forms depending on what is highlighted NOTE Individual applications may contain application specific elements that can also b
296. ics If you re having problems with setup or anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Moving Around e Opening applications Click a link below to learn about these related topics e Using menus Sharing Beaming or sending information to another Palm Powered handheld Customizing e Selecting alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters e Creating your own Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Common Answers to frequently asked questions about entering information Questions Palm T X Handheld 71 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Why synchronize information Synchronizing with a cable or IR port Synchronizing using wireless technology Synchronizing by connecting to a computer on the network Customizing your synchronization settings Installing applications to your handheld Entering information with your computer Importing information from other applications Installing the additional software from the CD Palm T X Handheld If you regularly synchronize your handheld with your computer you know what a powerful tool synchronization is for transferring updating and backing up large amounts of information on your handheld Synchronizing simply means that information that has been entered or updated in one place your handheld or your computer is automatically updated in the other There s no need to enter
297. igate to the Palm folder and select HotSync manager Y Continued Palm T X Handheld CHAPTER 5 If you need help with synchronizing see can t synchronize my handheld with my computer Ip If the Select User dialog box appears during synchronization select the username whose information you want to synchronize and then click OK Tip If any problems occurred during synchronization a message appears on your computer screen asking if you want to view the log View the HotSync log to see what applications successfully synched and whether any problems occurred Go to Applications on your handheld and select HotSync and then select Log or click the HotSync manager icon on your computer and then click View Log Palm T X Handheld Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 2 Synchronize your handheld with your computer a Press the sync button on the USB sync cable b When synchronization is complete a message appears at the top of your handheld screen and you can disconnect your handheld from the connector 4 Done 79 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Before You Begin Synchronizing using the IR port Your computer must have When you synchronize using your handheld s IR port you don t need your cable This is especially the following useful if you travel with an IR enabled laptop e An enabled IR port and driver or have an
298. ight outgoing mail options screen Password corner of the screen and n then select Inbox to c Change the username and Cancel Previous display messages in the password if needed Inbox 4 Done For IMAP accounts you have the option of wirelessly synchronizing Getting and reading messages mail folders if the Get Mail Options dialog When you get messages you can choose to see only the subjects of your email which include box is displayed message size sender and subject so that you can decide if you want to download the entire message Or you can choose to get the entire message for all of your incoming email Ry NOTE See Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for special considerations when using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information on your handheld with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 The first 5KB of each message is downloaded You can change the maximum size for downloaded messages in the VersaMail 1 Tap VersaMail in the input area preferences Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 334 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 amp OPTIONAL If you are using a VPN connection connect to your VPN Choose whether to get message subjects only or full messages a Open the menus b Select Accounts and then select the account you want c Select Get or Get amp Send New J Get Display 4 amp OP
299. il accounts accessing email 287 changing 330 331 connection types and 307 deleting 332 logging in to Internet 436 scheduling Auto Sync 336 341 setting up 307 314 395 398 T X Handheld testing 329 transferring settings to 312 upgrading 306 email applications 574 email folders 355 email providers 307 326 See also ISPs emergency information 512 empty screen 608 Empty Trash dialog box 368 emptying Trash folder 368 369 Enable device name cache command 302 encryption email passwords and 307 wireless connections and 272 273 encryption keys 272 273 280 encryption systems 307 End command 578 entering current date and time 62 545 548 information 19 21 47 48 73 112 551 owner information 558 passkeys 300 passwords 294 326 399 570 573 phone numbers 453 455 457 573 URLs 421 422 Enterprise Software link 26 entries defined 64 entry getting number of 123 hard resets and 599 eraser 256 eReader 24 error messages 616 ESD electrostatic discharge 638 639 ESMTP authentication 333 Essential Software folder 121 Essential Software option 25 Euro in onscreen keyboard 65 Event Details dialog box 166 events adding to calendar 150 adjusting for location 545 archiving 168 169 170 beaming 467 categorizing 151 467 512 changing descriptions 166 changing time zones for 160 changing untimed 153 color coding 151 161 164 conflicting 180 contact information and 132 creating multiday 157 creating untimed 152
300. ile phones 296 to networks 97 99 572 to other devices 265 286 561 to personal computers 287 to power sources 607 to the Internet 265 287 570 Connection pick list 570 Connection Preferences screen 562 564 565 connection types 287 connections See also connecting adding login scripts for 576 adding trusted 298 authentication servers and 579 automatically stopping remote 386 closing network 572 creating 564 566 customizing network 569 deleting 564 disconnecting sync cable 81 dropping 574 limiting device 288 losing 607 omitting passkeys for 290 precautions for 31 596 639 preset settings for 561 568 selecting 570 setting flow control for 567 setting timeout intervals for 386 setting up network 293 297 572 setting up phone 290 294 setting up secure 392 setting up wireless 90 286 synchronizing from 75 99 unable to establish 289 645 wireless technology for 264 connections See Bluetooth Wi Fi conserving power 5 32 559 606 Contact Details dialog box 140 Contact Edit screen 133 135 contacting service providers 294 contacts See also Contacts application adding 66 130 133 346 archiving 139 categorizing 140 512 515 copying information for 131 133 137 customizing details for 140 deleting 139 displaying information for 135 140 duplicating information for 133 137 entering from Outlook 10 613 entering in memos 249 entering notes for 133 keeping private 140 489 490 locating 138 managin
301. in the Trash folder Palm T X Handheld 3 For IMAP accounts only select one Mark Read of the following Would you like to mark the selected messages To mark the messages as read or veadon both the handheld and server or unread on your handheld only on just the handheld Select Handheld To mark the messages on both your handheld and the server and have the messages marked on the server immediately Select Both and then select OK on the confirmation screen To mark the messages on both your handheld and the server and have the messages marked on the server the next time you synchronize or connect to the server Select Both and then select Cancel on the confirmation screen 4 Done Working with attachments Email may contain attached files such as Microsoft Word documents photos or videos that you want to save view or install on your handheld When you receive a message that has an attachment the VersaMail application scans your handheld to see if you have an application that can open the attachment Attachment file types you can download and open include photos and videos Microsoft Word Excel and PowerPoint files HTML pages text files and information from applications on your handheld such as Contacts Calendar and Tasks You can also work with attached Palm OS applications and related files PRC and PDB files as well as compressed ZIP files that contain other files 371 CHAPTER 16 Becau
302. information e Easily retrieve the information you need 511 CHAPTER 24 Using Categories to Organize Information You can have up to oe You can add categories in many applications Contacts Expense Memos Note Pad Tasks and 15 categories in an Media In Media categories are called albums Place individual entries in these categories to application easily get to a group of related items P In addition to putting individual entries into a category you can also put entire applications into Colors make it easy to categories For instance you may find it convenient to put Expense and Calculator into a category find the info you need in called Money Calendar Add a category in 1 Do one of the following Contacts that contains all of your medical numbers for quick access e To add a category for individual entries in one of the applications above open that application Other useful categories in e To add a category for applications go to Applications Contacts are Emergency for fire ambulance and police Children for your 2 Add a new category TRE children s school and Hoff Wayne Business friends and a Select the pick list in the Proa Entertainment for upper right corner and then crear Midyne unfiled Pee gpg x pear Midyne Edit Categori restaurants or theaters select Edit Categories that you visit often b Select New and enter the name of the new category c Select OK an
303. information Owner information does not include your username or passwords 1 Open Owner Preferences Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Owner Modify or enter the text and then select Done 4 Done 558 CHAPTER 26 When Keylock is on your handheld does not respond when you press the quick buttons To use your handheld again press the power button and then select Deactivate Keylock Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Conserving battery power You can save battery power by preventing your handheld from turning on accidentally and by adjusting the Power Preferences settings Ry NOTE The memory on your handheld is designed to store your information even if the battery becomes drained to the point that you cannot turn on your handheld When you recharge your handheld all of your existing information reappears Preventing your handheld from turning on by accident Does your handheld turn itself on accidentally in your briefcase pocket or purse You can lock the buttons on the front of your handheld to prevent this from happening and to prevent the battery from draining 1 Open Keylock Preferences Preferences Keylock Activation a Go to Applications m Never b Select Prefs amp Keylock prevents your handheld c Select Keylock from turning on if a button or key is pressed accidentally Ny Continued 559 CHAPTER 26 Customizi
304. information twice Benefits e Quickly enter and update information on your computer and your handheld e Install applications e Protect your information e Send photos and videos to your handheld from your desktop computer 72 CHAPTER 5 Tip Synchronize Microsoft Word PowerPoint or Excel files from your computer and open them in the Documents application on your handheld to view and edit them at your convenience Palm T X Handheld Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Why synchronize information Quickly enter and update information on your computer and handheld Synchronizing updates information both on your handheld and in Palm Desktop software on your computer For example you can quickly enter a contact list on your computer and then send it to your handheld instead of reentering the information NOTE During CD installation you can choose to synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook on your computer Windows only L lt Install applications With just a few clicks you can use Palm Quick Install to add files to certain applications on your handheld or to install additional software Protect your information Nothing is worse than losing important information When you synchronize information you create a backup copy If something happens to your handheld or your computer t
305. ing a number Using speed dial Related topics Palm T X Handheld Need to dial a number You can dial phone numbers directly from a contact using Quick Connect If you don t have the number listed as a contact you can tap out the number on the Dialer keypad and tap Dial Your mobile phone begins dialing a GSM phone with Bluetooth wireless technology is required sold separately Your call history stays on your handheld for easy access later Benefits of Dialer e Easily dial numbers that are not in Contacts by using the keypad on your handheld screen e Keep your call history on your handheld e Quickly dial numbers using speed dial 452 CHAPTER 19 Before You Begin Before you can dial a number you must set up a phone connection on your handheld Palm T X Handheld Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Dialing a number Tapping out a number on your handheld is sometimes easier than using your mobile phone Entering a number 1 Go to Applications and select Dialer 2 Tap the telephone number on the keypad Digits appear in the numeric display Enter phone number and tap Dial Tap Clear to delete last digit from numeric display Tap and hold to clear entire numeric display Tap and hold the 0 key to add a plus to the number sequence 3 Tap Dial 4 Done 453 CHAPTER 19 Palm T X Handheld Dialing Phone Numbers from Your Handheld Redialin
306. ing with a cable ccccccccssseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeeesseeeeseessseeness 78 Synchronizing using the IR port cccccceessseeeeeesseeeeeeeseseeeessesssseneess 80 Synchronizing using wireless technology sssssssssssssssrnsssssrnsssrnnsssennnsns 84 Synchronizing using Wi Fi wireless technology seeceeeeeeesseeeeees 84 Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization asese 89 Synchronizing using Bluetooth Wireless Technology 00008 94 Synchronizing by dialing in to a network ccccccesssteeeeessssteeeeeesnteeeeesees 95 Synchronizing by connecting to a computer on the network 065 99 Customizing your synchronization settings cs ceeeeeeecneeeeeeeeeteeees 102 Choosing how your computer responds to synch requests 102 Setting synchronization Options ccccceeeseseeeeeseeeneeeesseneeeeeesssnaaes 104 Choosing whether application information is updated 106 Installing applications to your handheld u eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeteeeee 111 Using Quick Install ccsiscccceccisscesccetvisssccsevescnscesevavecdieedaseeadeeeanaaneestavnnanee 111 Using the Send To Handheld droplet cecccsceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 112 Palm T X Handheld v Entering information with your COMPUTED ceeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 112 Importing information from other applications 0 eee eee 117 Installing the additional software from the CD oo
307. insert the CD WINDOWS ONLY 1 Click Start on your computer and then select Run 2 Click Browse and navigate to your CD ROM drive 3 Select Autorun click Open and then click OK cannot install Palm Desktop software WINDOWS ONLY e Disable any virus scanning software on your computer e Close any open applications e Make sure your computer has at least 170MB of disk space available e Delete all temporary files 604 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions e Run ScanDisk or another disk verification tool on your computer e Install the latest Windows software updates to your computer e If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered handheld remove any previous version s of Palm Desktop software by clicking Start navigating to Settings and clicking Control Panel Click Add or Remove Programs e Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software MAC ONLY e Disable any virus scanning software on your computer e Quit any open applications e Make sure your computer has at least 190MB of disk space available e Install the latest Mac software updates to your computer e If you are upgrading from an older Palm Powered handheld remove any previous version s of Palm Desktop software e Uninstall and then reinstall the current version of Palm Desktop software Palm T X Handheld 605 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Handheld IMPORTANT Do not open your handheld there are no serviceabl
308. ion SSL authentication username Check the box to send outgoing mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection and password information Use authentication ESMTP Check the box if the outgoing server SMTP requires ESMTP authentication If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are already filled in based on the account information you entered In most cases the information displayed is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password b Select Done 4 Done Testing your new account After you finish setting up a new email account the Inbox of the account you just created is displayed You can test whether the email account is set up and working properly by getting messages Palm T X Handheld 329 CHAPTER 16 Tir You can also edit an account by selecting Start in the lower left corner of your computer screen selecting Programs navigating to Palm and then selecting VersaMail Setup Select the username associated with the account click the Edit an existing account button and then click Next Editthe information on the account information screens Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Editing an account As with setup you can edit an account either on your computer or on your handheld Editing an account on your computer WINDOWS ONLY 1 Selec
309. ion or the web browser to quickly check Bluetooth status and make a connection from any 2 application on your handheld Verify Bluetooth status Bluetooth a Tap Bluetooth controls J on Power Bi oft the status bar Bluetooth is On b Make sure On is selected Network NoService Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 295 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Service Way of 3 i Connect to your phone connecting to a mobile phone to send a Select the Network Service pick list and select the service that you want to information wirelessly use to connect to the Internet If you _set up a phone connection the name of for example through the service you configured is listed a high speed GPRS carrier or a dial up b Select Connect account with an Internet service provider ISP 4 Done You are now ready to send and receive email messages or to When you enter a URL in browse the web the web browser or select Get amp Send in the VersaMail application a connection is automatically attempted with the last used service Palm T X Handheld 296 Before You Begin You must get the passkey username and password for the LAN from the system administrator LAN Acronym for local area network LAN refers to a local network that connects computers located in your home or business Palm T X Handheld CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Setting u
310. it remains masked Using a password Further protect your hidden or masked entries by creating a password which is needed to display the contents of hidden masked entries Palm T X Handheld 492 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Creating a password The best passwords consist of a mix of letters characters and numbers 1 Longer passwords are better than short ones a Go to Applications and then Any password you create A is case sensitive select Prefs Open Security Password box Private Records Show b Select Security 2 Create a password ete Pagi Enter letters or numbers a Select the Password box b Enter a password with Graffiti 2 writing the numeric keypad or the onscreen keyboard c Select OK Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 493 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private In Palm Desktop software the security preferences are the same as the security preferences set on your handheld including the password You can also require a password be entered to open the Palm Desktop application Open the Tools menu and click Options and then click Security Check the box Require password to access the Palm Desktop data The password is the same one used by your handheld Palm T X Handheld 3 Confirm the password and enter a hint a Enter the password again and then select OK b Enter a hint to help you remember the password if you forget it
311. it the file on your handheld and then synchronize again to transfer the changes to the original PowerPoint file on your computer e Open Office files received as attachments to incoming email messages and attach files to outgoing messages Palm T X Handheld 187 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager Opening a file from within Documents In the Documents application you can view and open any Word Excel or PowerPoint file on your handheld When you are working on a file save it to your handheld or your expansion card by selecting Menu selecting Save As from the File Tap Documents in the input area menu and then selecting the location where you want to save the file 2 Select the file you want from the list DataViz Documents To Go amp Convention Expense Product Intro 4 Done Product specs w VP Meeting Notes Palm T X Handheld 188 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager Support Related topics If you re having problems with Documents click the Click the link below to learn about these related topics Documents To Go icon on your computer and then click Help or go to VersaMail Sending and receiving Office files as attachments to email messages www dataviz com Palm T X Handheld 189 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Copying a photo or video Viewing a photo or video Organizing photos and videos Personalizing a photo Sharing a p
312. justing fade setting for 534 537 attaching to email 378 copying 208 210 469 deleting from album 202 moving 203 selecting 40 selecting as backgrounds 180 533 537 sharing 210 sorting 205 storing 586 590 synchronizing 112 transferring to handheld 75 77 viewing 192 viewing details of 198 199 Photos application See Media application Picture box 131 plain text messages 321 playing music 217 222 225 620 playlists creating 223 deleting songs on 227 T X Handheld editing 226 naming 224 removing 228 reordering music on 227 selecting music from 225 troubleshooting 620 plug in applications 579 Pocket Tunes application compatible formats for 217 getting help with 222 icon 24 installing 214 opening 24 222 overview 213 troubleshooting 620 POP protocol 317 326 POP servers 308 318 327 370 Port Number option 328 329 401 portable keyboards 250 portrait view 30 ports 21 Post Office Protocol POP 317 326 See also POP servers power adapter 596 power adapter See AC charger Power button 21 power consumption options 560 power preferences 559 561 Power Preferences screen 560 PowerPoint files 188 attaching to email 376 transferring to handheld 77 PowerPoint files creating and viewing 187 power saving settings 560 561 PRC applications 579 PRC files 75 76 precautions 597 606 638 predefined service profiles 573 preferences 189 419 532 584 See also customizing Preferences command 182 Preferences screen 26 Pref
313. k also known as an SSID and the security information such as WEP or WPA PSK keys If your computer is behind an Internet firewall you may need VPN access information to connect Once you have set up a connection to a network connect to it at any time by opening Wi Fi controls selecting the network from the Network pick list and then selecting Connect Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections Setting up a Wi Fi network connection 1 Tap Wi Fi controls on the status bar 2 Do one of the following Wi Fi Network o No wireless networks e If this is the first time you are have been set up setting up a Wi Fi network Would you like to turn connection select Yes on the radio and scan for available networks e If you have previously set up a Wi Fi network the Wi Fi dialog box displays Make sure that Wi Fi is set to On and then Wi Fi On select Scan Setup Network v NETGEAR E Not connected Your handheld scans for available networks Scan Setup Y Continued 264 CHAPTER 14 Encryption key A series of letters and numbers that enables data to be encrypted and then decrypted so it can be safely shared within a network Your handheld supports two encryption systems WEP and WPA PSK A network that does not appear on the list may be hidden for security purposes Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections Do one of the following The network you w
314. k to synchronize with your computer on the same network ip If the Select User dialog e Windows only Using a phone or modem to dial into your company network phone and box appears during modem sold separately synchronization select the username whose IMPORTANT The first time you synchronize you must use the sync cable or your handheld s information you want to IR port If you followed the instructions to synchronize during initial setup you ve already covered synchronize and then this requirement click OK To synchronize HotSync manager must be active HotSync manager was installed when you installed Palm Desktop software if you didn t install Palm Desktop software you don t have HotSync manager on your computer If you need help with synchronizing see can t i On a Windows computer you know HotSync manager is active when its icon 6 appears in the synchronize my handheld lower right corner of your screen If the icon is not there turn it on by clicking Start and then with my computer selecting Programs Navigate to the Palm folder and select HotSync manager On a Windows computer Palm Desktop software includes both Palm Media which you can use to transfer photos and videos to your handheld and Palm Quick Install which installs applications PRC or PDB for use on your handheld when you synchronize Ry NOTE Ona Mac computer use the Send To Handheld droplet to transfer photos and video
315. ks to the web Press twice to open Applications View where you can see all of the applications on your handheld Palm T X Handheld 19 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Calendar quick Press to turn on your handheld and jump to today s schedule button Contacts quick Press to turn on your handheld and jump to your contacts list button Web quick button Press to turn on your handheld and jump to your home page in the web browser 5 way navigator Lets you move around and display info on the screen Press Up Down Left or Right to highlight different items and press Center to select the highlighted item Palm T X Handheld 20 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld K Anow Did Yo u Beaming lets you quickly share appointments addresses phone numbers files photos and more Palm T X Handheld Top IR port Expansion card slot Stylus Headphone Expansion card slot IR port Stylus Headphone jack Power button jack Power button Lets you insert an expansion card sold separately to back up info and add memory applications and accessories to your handheld Short for infrared port Beams information between handhelds and other devices that have an IR port Beaming uses infrared technology to send information between two IR ports that are within a few feet of each other Lets you enter information on your handheld To use the stylus slide it out of t
316. l the songs are in the right order Select Save List 4 Done 224 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Playing songs from a playlist To quickly select all the songs in the list select Select All To quickly deselect all the songs select Select None Palm T X Handheld 1 2 y Done Go to Favorites and select Music Select a song from a playlist a Select Choose Songs button b Select Playlists c Select the playlist you want to play d Select All Choose Songs v All Plavlists amp BHarp World Music Cancel OK Select All Delete Your handheld plays the songs in the playlist beginning with the first song in the list After it plays the last song in the list it stops 225 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Palm T X Handheld Editing a playlist 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Music Open the playlist you want to edit a Open the menus b Select Actions and then select Manage Playlists c Highlight a playlist d Select Edit Ny Continued 226 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music 3 Palm T X Handheld Do any of the following Remove Select a song and select Remove to delete the song from the playlist Add Song Tap Add check a song s box and then tap Done Up or Down Select a song and select Up or Down to move the song up or down one slot Select Save List 4 Done Edit Playlist Name Harp Awakening Falling Angel Follow The Drea
317. lays EO ew B My Card ne a wD n PERSONAL If the screen doesn t display go powerOne Solitaire to Applications and select the expansion card from the category pick list 2 Select an application icon to open that application 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 589 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Opening files on an expansion card Some applications require you to store your files on an expansion card instead of on your handheld such as MP3 files on the Mac In other applications such as Media storing files on expansion cards is optional You can open files on an expansion card when you insert the card into the expansion slot Open the application associated with the files you want to open 2 Insert the expansion card 3 Select the entry you want to view 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 590 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Tip Viewing card information Reading and writing info on an expansion card uses more battery power than doing the same task Go to Applications and select Card Info 8 on your handheld If you have enough space on It s easy to forget which files you put on a particular expansion card Use the Card Info application to view the card name and type available storage space and a summary of its contents Card Info your handheld consider Card v B My Card Card name ing the info t ur Type Secure Digital Card i CODING He ES I Ye Size 13 7 MB Free of 14 0 MB Space available h
318. ld Although customizing your handheld is optional it s like changing the preset radio stations in your car Since you re probably not driving around with the dealer s preset radio stations why not personalize your handheld too You can easily customize the sound levels fonts and screen colors on your handheld by using preferences and menus Or customize the buttons to open your most important applications with one press Preference settings can even help extend the life of your handheld s battery CHAPTER 26 Benefits of customizing e Access applications quickly e Conserve power e Enjoy your handheld more e Make your screen easy to read 532 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Customizing Favorites View You can personalize Favorites View by changing the background image to your favorite photo You can also change the entries to those you use most often Changing the background photo in Favorites View Use your favorite photo as the background in Favorites View 1 Go to Favorites 2 Open the Display Options dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Display Options 3 Select a photo for the Display Options background M Background a Check the Background box b Select the picture box c Select a picture Fade 35 d Select Done Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 533 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld You can move a favorite 4 to a different loca
319. ld You can move multiple applications into the Use Quick Install Windows or the Send To Handheld droplet Mac to install applications on Quick Install window to your handheld have them ready for installation the next time Using Quick Install you synchronize WINDOWS ONLY 1 Open your Palm Desktop software and click the Quick Install icon 2 Copy the application a You can choose which handheld will receive the ga items by selecting the username in the User drop l down box in the upper right corner b Drag and drop the application onto the Quick Install window Which window you choose determines whether the application is installed on your handheld or on an expansion card if present 3 Synchronize to install the file to your handheld 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 111 CHAPTER 5 In Mac OS X you can make the Send To Handheld droplet a permanent part of your desktop by dragging the droplet to the Dock Then simply drag photos and other files you want to transfer to your handheld onto the Dock Palm T X Handheld Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Using the Send To Handheld droplet MAC ONLY 1 Select the applications or files you want to install a Drag and drop the applications or files onto the Send va To Handheld droplet in the Palm folder o b In the Send To Handheld dialog box select your username and click OK 2 Synchronize your computer with your handheld 4 D
320. lds for info on creating and configuring connection settings If you re using a phone or Phone Setup O modem connection enter the phone settings a Select the Phone box Y Continued 570 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld It s a good idea to add Cont d at least three commas before your calling card number to allow for the cue delay Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds Palm T X Handheld b Enter any of the following settings and then select OK Phone Enter the phone number for your ISP or dial in server Dial prefix Check the Dial prefix box and then enter the number that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line For example many offices require that you first dial 9 to dial a number outside the building Disable call waiting If your phone has Call Waiting check the Disable call waiting box and then enter the code to disable Call Waiting Call Waiting can cause your session to end if you receive a call while you are connected Contact your local phone company for the code that is appropriate for you Use calling card If you want to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or dial in server check the Use calling box to select it Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line IMPORTANT Because MCI works differently enter the MCI calling card number in the Phone field and the phone number in the Use ca
321. lect Prefs Game Send gt aah handheld the external Alarm Sound Medium speaker is automatically c Select Sounds amp Alerts silenced the Sounds amp Alerts settings are maintained and all volume levels are automatically adjusted 2 for use with headphones Select Custom or Silent 3 If you selected Silent in step 2 select Done If you selected Custom in step 2 select the System Sound Game Sound and Alarm Sound pick lists and select the volume level for each sound then select Done y Done Palm T X Handheld 87 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Tip In addition to entering owner information you can assign a name to your handheld for Bluetooth communication r Did You Know If you use Security Preferences to turn off and lock your handheld with a password your owner info appears when you select the Owner button the next time you turn on your handheld lip If you assigned a password in Security Preferences you must select Unlock and enter your password to change your owner info Palm T X Handheld Entering your owner information It s a good idea to enter information that could help someone contact you if you ever lose your handheld if there s enough battery power to turn it on By default the Owner Preferences screen contains the information you entered when you installed the software installation CD and set up your handheld but you can update or add to this
322. lect the Show pick list and then select 1 line or 2 line view Default is 2 line Columns shown Check the box under the Show pick list for each column you want to show The column options change depending on whether you choose a one line or a two line view Defaults are Date Size and Subject Font Select the Font field Select each pick list in the Select Font dialog box Font Size Style and select the option you want Default is Palm 9 Plain Unread and read message color Select the Read and Unread pick lists and then select the color you want for each type of message Default is black Ny Continued 356 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages 3 Select OK 4 If you selected 1 line view in step 2 change the size of columns in the message list a Tap on the column divider b Drag the column divider to change the width of the column 4 Done Palm T X Handheld Speakeas BS revised instruc Les Ne o BS these are funny Travis o M review comme Angela cool site Travi M ALC Account Fo monica Column divider 357 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tir Moving messages between folders You can use the 5 way to move a single message Select the message you want to move press Right 1 to open the Message menu and then select Move To Then select the folder you want from the folders list You can move one or more email messages betwe
323. lect the album you want and then select Done when copying is complete Palm T X Handheld Copying a photo or video You can copy photos and videos from your handheld to an expansion card and vice versa 1 2 Tap Media in the input area Select a photo or video to copy a Select Handheld E or Expansion Cara W b Select the Location pick list in the upper right corner and select the location of the photos or videos you want to copy c Select the photo or video Copy the photo a Open the menus b Select Copy to Card for photos or videos on your handheld or Copy to Handheld for photos or videos on an expansion card from the Media menu 4 Done 208 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Delete an entire album by opening the Album menu and selecting Album Details Select the album you want and then select Delete on the Album Details screen You can also delete a photo or video from the Media Details screen by selecting Delete on that screen Palm T X Handheld Deleting a photo or video 1 Tap Media in the input area 2 Go to the folder or album where the photos or videos are located a Select Handheld E or Expansion Cara b Tap Location pick list in the upper right corner and select the location of the photos or videos you want to delete 3 Delete the photo or video a Open the menus b Select Delete from the Media menu c Select the photos or vide
324. lete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync ACCOUNT ou ceeeeteceeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaaeeeeeseaaeeeesennneeeeeees 408 Related topis sirain er A a e aa EA 409 Chapter 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages 410 Creating and sending a text message s sssssssssssssssssssrerinnnnnnnnenesernnrnnt 411 Receiving and viewing a text message sssssssssssssssssernsnnsnessesrennennnnnnn 414 Editing a draft text MeOSSAGS azccscsczades vs scadevethsnndenevsnvid ccccusnnedezcaveestezdensinade 416 Palm T X Handheld xii Setting advanced messaging features ccceeesececeesseteeeeeseseeeeeessseeeeeess 417 Related TOPICS sessccevsseadsives seas endestectueanean geatasnaenncdacserhanenadusantandungensceddenea aay 419 Chapter 18 Browsing the We D cc csscesssseeeeeeeeeee 1 420 ACCESSING a WED page sissien ea a aa naaa aidi 421 Accessing a web page using the action bar sssssssssssssssssssssessrssenns 421 Accessing a web page using the address field neeese 422 Using a password to access a WED page es csseesscceceeeeteeeeteeeneneeaeens 423 Finding information ON a web page csseeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeteneenaaeaeeaeees 424 Quickly jumping tO a PAGE oo eeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseneeneeess 425 Following a IMK Secciedsesecceistensenstinents ccnzednnscvecaaesdecedeusntsradyadessesdeussenteass 425 Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited 425 Changing how you view a page
325. lications 2 Open the menus 3 Select Info from the App menu 4 Select Version for version info and Size for memory info Palm T X Handheld 632 Product Regulatory Information Palm T X Handheld FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different f
326. lity Smallest lt Best Size v Quality Uses about 57 MB per CD 128 Kbps Compare Windows Media Audio to other formats Select mp3 215 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music 3 Set the Windows Media Player Quality setting a Click Tools and then click Options b Click the Handhelds tab Select your handheld from the Handhelds list and then click Properties Click the Quality tab Uncheck the Convert files as required by this handheld recommended box gt 0 2 0 Click Apply g Click OK and then click OK again ption tg Pain Handheld Wayne Hoff Properties X Plugins _ _ Privacy _ File Types _ _DVD___ _ Network ER ely Player Rip Music Devices Performance Library Set the quality level of music videos and TV shows on this Ga et settings for CDs DVDs displays speakers and portable device devices ae Uncheck box Convert fies as required by this device recommended CDRW Drive Music quality level BDV Drive F t Display Speakers S Expansion 1 Size fh Palm Handheld Wayne Hoff f 7 7 Uses about 27 MB per hour 64 Kbps Video TV quality level Select your aoe a Reten rse j Click properties A 3p k Click Advanced to change file conversion options Advanced OK cancel J A Help OK Cancel Apy Hep 4 Done You now have set up Windows Media Player
327. lity on your handheld 1 Open Connection Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select Connection Y Continued Preferences Connection Available Connections radle Cable IR to a PC Handheld 564 CHAPTER 26 Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld 2 From the Connection Preferences screen select New Preferences Connection Edit Connection a Available Connections Name Custom radle Cable IR to a PC Handheld Connect to Modem Via v Cradle Cable Dialing TouchTone Volume v Low Y Continued 565 CHAPTER 26 Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Enter the basic settings Name Enter a name for your connection settings This name will appear on the Connection Preferences screen so that you can select your connection later Connect to Select the type of handheld you want to connect to PC Modem or Local Area Network Via Select the method you want to use to connect to the handheld you selected Bluetooth the Bluetooth radio on your handheld Cradle Cable the USB sync cable that came with your handheld Infrared the IR port on your handheld N NOTE The Dialing and Volume settings won t appear unless you select Modem as the Connect to setting Dialing Select whether your modem uses TouchTone or Rotary dialing Volume Select the volume level for your modem s speaker Off Low Medium or High Y Continued 566 C
328. ll your handheld not to accept cookies Cookie Some websites store information in a small text file called a cookie that is saved on your handheld A cookie usually stores information about you and your preferences for that website A site can use this information to customize the pages you see the next time you visit Allowing a website to create a cookie does not give the site access to the rest of your handheld A cookie stores only the information you provide while visiting the website Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Open the General Preferences Preferences i dialog box ease Generat Advanced WM Auto complete a Open the menus LM Disable cookies Disable Javascript b Select Options and then Tap and Drag Selects Text select Preferences Normal mode c Select General tab Check or uncheck the Disable cookies box Select OK 4 Done 445 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Clearing Cookies and cache memory 1 Go to Favorites and select Web amp 2 Open the Advanced Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Advanced tab Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 446 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web Palm T X Handheld 3 Clear Cookies and the cache by using the following options Clear Cookies Indicates how much memory is being used by cookies and allows you to clear Cookies and fr
329. lling card field Select Done 4 Done 571 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Connecting to your service After you set up your Connection and Network Preferences establishing a connection to your ISP or your company s network dial in server is easy To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages press Down on the 5 way To see more information open the Options menu and select View Log Palm T X Handheld 1 Open Network Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select Network Make the connection a Make sure the service profile you want to use appears in the Service field If not select it b Select Connect End the connection when you ve finished using it a Select Disconnect b Select Done 4 Done 572 Adding details to a service profile If you re using one of the predefined service profiles you probably need to enter only your username password and telephone number If you re creating a new service profile you may CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld need to use the Details dialog box to add more information to your service profile 1 Palm T X Handheld Open Network Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs E c Select Network Open the Details dialog box a Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add details to b Select Details Y Continued Preferences v Service
330. lm T X Handheld Setting advanced mail options on your handheld 1 Set incoming mail server options Advanced for the account Incoming Server Settings Port Number 110__ a Select any of the following O Use Secure Connection SSL O Use Authentication APOP Port Number By default the port number setting is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection Use Secure Connection SSL To retrieve incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection check the Use Secure Connection box If you check the box the port number for incoming mail changes to 995 Use Authentication APOP POP accounts only Encrypts your username and password when they travel over the network Some services do not work properly without APOP while others do not work properly if APOP is used b Select Next Y Continued 328 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages HYG neeH to emier new 2 Set outgoing mail options authentication going p Advanced 5 Outgoing Server Settings information enter your a Select any of the following Port Number P5 username select the O Use Secure Connection SSL Password box enter a Port Number The default is 25 O Use authentication ESMTP password and then the port number most SMTP select OK Check with servers use your email service provider for Use Secure Connect
331. lm T X Handheld 212 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Transferring MP3 files to your handheld Transferring music from a CD to your handheld Playing music on your handheld Managing playlists Customizing your player Working with Windows Media Player on your computer Related topics Palm T X Handheld Are you tired of listening to small talk during that long commute on the bus or train Do you need something smaller than a CD player when you re out for a walk or at the gym There is no need to buy an expensive MP3 player Pocket Tunes lets you play the music on your handheld Simply transfer songs onto your handheld or an expansion card and then listen through the built in speaker or stereo headphones sold separately RY NOTE Mac users cannot transfer music files directly to your handheld You must insert an expansion card into your handheld s expansion card slot transfer the music files to the card and then listen to the files from the card Benefits e Carry and listen to songs in the popular MP3 format e No separate MP3 CD or mini disc player required e Arrange your favorite songs into playlists on your handheld 213 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music 1 Before You Begin Setting up Windows Media Player for MP3 Windows only Perform the following Windows Media Player settings must be changed to support MP3 to be compatible with Pocket Tunes e
332. lock combination at any time Follow the same steps you used to create the combination Palm T X Handheld Creating a Quick Unlock combination 1 Open Security Preferences a S Password a Go to Applications and then Quick Unlock i Quick Unlock box select Prefs ry AutoLotk b Select Secu rity Private Records w Show Open the Quick Unlock dialog box a Select the Quick Unlock box b If necessary enter your password and then select OK Y Continued 502 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private 3 Create a Quick Unlock GenteQuckUelock combination sequence Use navigator or tap screen to create a combination a Use the 5 way or tap the onscreen navigator to create a combination For example you might choose Left Right Left as a Quick Unlock is optional and works only on the first three combination entry attempts b Select OK 4 Select Done 4 Done When your handheld is locked you can now unlock it by using the Quick Unlock combination If you forget your combination you are asked to enter your password Palm T X Handheld 503 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Deleting your Quick Unlock combination Palm T X Handheld 1 Open Security Preferences S Password a Go to Applications and then 7 select Prefs Peay b Select Security Private Records Show Quick Unlock Auto Lock Open the Quick Unlock dialog box a Select the
333. lose the Reminders screen and return to whatever you were doing on your If the Reminders screen handheld before the Reminders screen appeared shows an Auto Sync error message for an account select the message to view more detailed information about the e Select Clear All to delete all reminders on the Reminders screen When a notification appears on the Reminders screen select it to go to the Inbox of that account or open the VersaMail application and go to that account Once you open the Inbox any new messages are removed from the Reminders screen even if you don t open them Auto Sync then error You can choose to starts at the next scheduled interval with the Reminders screen counter reset to 1 disable notifications for Auto Sync failures Auto Sync retries If the interval for a scheduled Auto Sync is set at Every 1 hour or less frequently and an Auto Sync fails for any reason the VersaMail application tries to retrieve email every 30 minutes until either the next scheduled Auto Sync occurs or the end time for scheduled email retrieval is reached If the interval is set for more frequently than Every 1 hour the VersaMail application waits until the next scheduled Auto Sync Resource issues with Auto Sync The Auto Sync feature can cause the following resource constraints Decreased battery life If you set the Auto Sync interval for more often than once per hour your handheld s battery charge may drain
334. m Add Song wn ave List 227 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Deleting a playlist Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Music Go to Manage Playlists a Open the menus b Select Actions and then select Manage Playlists Delete the playlist a Select the playlist b Select Delete c Select Yes in the confirmation dialog box d Select Done 4 Done 228 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music Customizing your player You can customize your MP3 player by setting preferences Palm T X Handheld Turning off the screen Turning off the screen while playing music saves battery power 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Music Open the menus Select General Preferences and set screen preferences Turn off screen while playing after Preferentes x seconds When you are playing Turn off screen while playing music and not using any of the other after 30 seconds handheld applications you can set the I unless the Palm is in its cradle tim riod after which the screen M Power button turns off screen e perio cante Volume Boost v Off turns off O Show song listin comment area O Swap 5 way nav axes Unless the Palm is in its cradle The L Check for updates every 30 days screen always remains on when your handheld power cable is plugged in Power button turns off screen Pushing the power button turns off the screen but the music keeps playing Select OK 4 Done 2
335. m T X Handheld xiv Palm T X Handheld Deleting an entire category Of EXPENSES ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeees 479 Customizing the expense liSt cceeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeaeaaeaeeeeeeeneese 480 Working with Expense On your COMPUUED 2 0 eeeeeteeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeenteaaeeeees 481 Related tO DIGS sicziivievsncsaccuss iced cade aa deumbances lave ast ia 482 Chapter 22 Performing Calculations c eseeeeee 483 Calculator DUtONS siiin aaa soeandeshyssadeneniteaxeacanbesedy 484 VIEWING r cent CAlCUIATIONS sissssssdeccessceiccseasstencecsesnecdcescisstaaaieassceteceos stents 485 Accessing a different calculator 20 0 2 cccceeceeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeeeeeeseeneneneaeeaeaeeees 486 Related TODICS coruri a E E 487 Chapter 23 Keeping Your Information Private 488 Choosing a Security I VEll sissit eneit anaia 489 Marking information aS Private sisii iniidissiijirnadannioiadeia sanaan ia dn 490 Setting the level of privacy o ceeeeesccceecesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeessseeeeeeseseeeseeessseeneeeess 491 Hiding or masking private entries sssssssssssssssssssssssesrrnsnnnnnessessnnrens 491 Viewing an entry that is masked c secseecceeceeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaneeees 492 Usmga PASSWONG sssr enaa aana sandanne seers 492 Creating PaSSWOlG siiecsncsssccechiassiccigaantde cqcdesdseacancaevieancanessdsencteranneedd 493 CHANGING ai PASSWONG sirisser a 494 D leting a PASSWON ss icctitsssdsc
336. m the list to download it Once the Did You Know message is downloaded you can work with it just like any If you receive meeting you work with other attachment invitations the Reminders screen displays both the number of new email messages and the number of new meeting invitations for that account for example 5 new messages 2 new meetings Palm T X Handheld 404 CHAPTER 16 After opening an invitation you can switch between full and concise meeting details by switching between full header view and short header view You can forward meeting invitations in the same way that you forward email messages The recipient receives the message as a meeting invitation Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with meeting invitations For Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts only each time you retrieve messages either manually or through Auto Sync Exchange meeting invitations are downloaded to your Inbox Ry NOTE You cannot create meeting invitations on your handheld You can only receive meeting invitations sent to you 1 Tap VersaMail in the input area 2 Get messages 3 Select a meeting i nvitation to 19 212 v Inbox open it Meeting invitations are fo JasonBurkey 1231p displayed with a unique icon amp RE Coffee o amp Paula Lagasse 12 18p Quick meeting invite o M Larry Chen 12 03p RE Happy burrito today for o M Richard DeVillarin 11 54a RE
337. mail server options nisani ini Incoming Server Settings at ME A a i a Select any of the following Port Number 443_ M Use Secure Connection SSL the port number uncheck Port Number By default the port the Use Secure number setting is 443 You may Connection box or enter need to change the port number proxy server information if you choose not to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection Use Secure Connection SSL By default this box is checked meaning you can retrieve incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection Uncheck the box if you do not want to receive email over an SSL connection b Select Next 2 If you use a proxy server enter Proxy Server Settings the proxy server name and port number and check the box if your server requires authentication Check with your I Proxy authentication system administrator for this information When you have finished select Done 4 Done Proxy Server Username Palm T X Handheld 401 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Getting email messages Increase the time interval The steps you take for manually getting messages in a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account for how many days are the same as for all other accounts with one exception You select Sync instead of Get or worth of email to retrieve Get amp Send so that recent messages are not removed from However what takes place during message retri
338. mber and then select this button to make it negative 484 CHAPTER 22 Performing Calculations Did You Know Viewing recent calculations Viewing recent calculations is helpful View recent calculations to confirm that you entered everything correctly when double checking the math in your heckbook register 1 ove E GSS Go to Applications and select Calculator Did You Know Calculator History also 2 has these functions View recent calculations Clear Select to clear the a Open the menus calculator s history E Copy Select ta copy the b Select Edit and then select IMR history of caleulations Sew HustOny B Paste them into another application by opening e IREE A the Edit menu and 4 Done selecting Paste in the other application Palm T X Handheld 485 CHAPTER 22 Performing Calculations Accessing a different calculator Do you need a scientific or financial calculator Your calculator has a variety of modes that can help you calculate formulas in a number of different areas 1 Go to Applications and select Calculator B 2 Access the advanced mode calculators a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Advanced Mode You can now use the scientific calculator c If you want to use other calculators such as finance logic statistics or area open the menus select Options and then select a mode from the list 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 486 CHAPTER 22 P
339. menu select Conduit Settings b Select the conduit settings for the profile 4 Done Synchronizing with a user profile WINDOWS ONLY 1 Begin synchronization a Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer and then insert the other end into the Multi connector on your handheld b Press the sync button on the USB sync cable Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 14 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer 2 Transfer the profile information Installing a profile will overwrite all data currently on the handheld a Click Profiles Are you sure you want to do this I Don t ask this question again b Select the profile you want to load on the handheld and C s click OK c Click Yes 4 Done The next time you synchronize that handheld Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a username to the handheld Palm T X Handheld 15 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer MAC ONLY 1 Begin synchronization a Connect the USB sync cable to the USB port on the back of your computer and then insert the other end into the Multi connector on your handheld b Press the sync button on the USB sync cable 2 Select the profile you want to Select User load on the handheld and Please select a user click OK e New User Cancel Eo 4 Done The next time you synchronize that handheld Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign
340. n e You may need to set up a connection with your phone See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process My phone connection drops before finish using it You need to increase the Idle timeout setting on the Network Preferences Details screen get an error message when try to dial a phone number using my handheld e Make sure that the proper phone driver is installed on your handheld e You may need to set up a connection with your phone See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the connection setup process e Check the Phone Preferences screen and make sure the correct phone connection is selected Palm T X Handheld 622 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions The VersaMail application Palm T X Handheld am having problems accessing my account Occasionally you may experience problems using an email account after you set it up If you followed the account setup procedure and are experiencing problems using the account verify that the account complies with your email provider s requirements by following these steps Verify both your password and your username for your email account If you are connecting using a mobile phone through the built in Bluetooth technology on your handheld a cable or the IR port on your handheld verify that you have either a data enabled GSM or a high speed GPRS account with your
341. n hand And because Related topics it s part of your handheld there s no need to carry a separate calculator Calculator buttons Viewing recent calculations Palm T X Handheld Benefits of Calculator e Always have a calculator with you e Store calculations for later use 483 CHAPTER 22 Performing Calculations Tip Use the memory buttons to store and recall a number you enter in multiple calculations Tip If you make a mistake entering a number in the middle of a calculation use the CE button to re enter the number without starting the calculation over Tip Open the Options menu and select Advanced Mode to display a scientific calculator Did You Know When you hide the input area your current calculation is shown below the calculator Palm T X Handheld Calculator buttons fie Clear any value in the Calculator memory Recall the stored value from the memory and enter it into the current calculation Place the current number into memory The current number is added to the total that is already in memory Tapping this button does not affect the current calculation it just places the value in memory Clear the last number you entered Clear the entire calculation so that you can start over Enter a number and then select this button to change it to a percentage Enter a number and then select this button to calculate the square root of the number Enter a nu
342. n the Pages of favorites pla A A i ir nies 12 47 pm E HEE a selection scroll to the A batches By Right or Left Displays the next or previous page of Applications first icon in the upper left g f p ay p pag pp avorites z ey corner and then press Left on the 5 way or enter Center Opens the selected item i Music the Backspace character ae using Graffiti 2 writing IEE Photos amp Videos Email Web Tasks Pas Memo Moving around in Applications View Up or Down Scrolls up or down in Applications View Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous application category Center Inserts the highlight When the selection highlight is present Up Down Right or Left Scrolls to the next item in the corresponding direction Center Opens the selected item Palm T X Handheld 39 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Moving around in list screens and entry screens In list screens use the 5 way to select and move between entries such as notes memos contacts or photos In individual entry screens such as a single photo or email message use the 5 way to move among the items on the screen or to move to another entry The behavior of the 5 way for list screens and entry screens varies according to application Follow the guidelines for moving around with the 5 way for general tips as you become familiar with each application learning the specific behavior of the 5 way is easy Moving arou
343. n your handheld to your computer Palm T X Handheld 611 CHAPTER 29 Need more help with synchronizing your handheld Open Palm Desktop software go to the Help menu and select HotSync Online Troubleshooting Guide Palm T X Handheld Common Questions Synchronizing can t synchronize my handheld with my computer Ry NOTE You must install the software installation CD before you can synchronize e Make sure the USB sync cable is connected securely e Make sure the date on your computer matches the date on your handheld e Read the HotSync log for the user account for which you are synchronizing WINDOWS ONLY Click the HotSync manager icon G in the Windows taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen Make sure Local USB has a checkmark next to it If not click it ORADI 237M NOTE If you don t see the HotSync manager icon click Start in the Windows taskbar and then select Programs Go to the Palm program group and select HotSync manager MAC ONLY e Make sure HotSync manager is enabled Open the Palm folder and double click the HotSync manager icon On the HotSync Controls tab be sure Enabled is selected If it is not click it e Disconnect the USB sync cable from your computer and then reconnect the cable and restart your computer 612 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Before You Begin When I synchronize nothing happens on Palm Desktop software You must
344. nactivity before the radio is automatically turned off Selecting Wi Fi power saving settings 1 Open Wi Fi Preferences a Tap Wi Fi controls on the status bar b Select Prefs Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections 2 Select the following settings and then select Done Preferences 7 Conserve Power Conserve Power Normally this 3 Timeout E box is checked to conserve gt power If you uncheck the box sassy drpdaet the Wi Fi radio runs at full power this timeout value This improves your reception but drains your battery quicker Timeout Select the box and then select a timeout period to automatically turn off the Wi Fi radio Note that whatever value is selected the handheld display remains on while Wi Fi is connected The Auto Lock setting takes precedence over this timeout setting 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections If you re having problems with your handheld s wireless capabilities or with anything else on your handheld go to Moving www palm com support Around Synchronizing Contacts VersaMail Bluetooth Common Questions Palm T X Handheld Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics e Opening applications e Using menus Synchronizing your handheld with your desktop computer using Wi Fi wireless technology Connecting to telephone number
345. nc manager must be running You can choose whether HotSync manager always runs automatically or whether you must perform some action to start HotSync manager 1 Open the synchronization options screen a Click the HotSync manager icon G in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen b Select Setup Y Continued 102 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Tip Use the default setting Always available if you re not sure which option you want lip If you select Manual you must turn off HotSync manager which is always on by default Click the HotSync manager icon in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your screen and then click Exit To start HotSync manager when you want to synchronize click Start and then select Programs Navigate to the Palm program group and select HotSync manager Note that if you turn HotSync manager on it stays on until you turn off your computer Palm T X Handheld 2 Select how your computer responds when you initiate synchronization on your handheld Setup x General Local Modem Network r HotSync Manager G Always available put in Startup folder Available only when the Palm Desktop is running Manual you start the HotSync Manager yourself L Always available HotSync manager runs automatically every time you initiate synchronization on your handheld Available only when the Palm
346. nce to open Favorites press Home twice to open Applications Switch between Favorites and Applications by pressing Your handheld lets you display two views to quickly see and open the applications you use most Favorites lets you create a list of the items you want to quickly access while Applications lets you access all of the applications on your handheld except the wireless applications Wi Fi and Bluetooth which you need to access from the status bar Home Using Favorites View a N Favorites View can include applications and links to the web Certain items are included Did You Know in Favorites by default but you can customize the list to contain any items you want You can use a favorite photo as the background To access an item from Favorites press Home D and select an item from the list Use the 5 way for Favorites or navigator or select the numbers in the upper right corner of the screen to move to another page Applications View of favorites Tip Selectto move to other Press and hold the Home pages of favorites button to see a list of recently used applications Music Photos amp Videos Home 2 E 12 47 2B Sal Palm T X Handheld 35 CHAPTER 3 You can open individual applications by pressing the quick buttons on the front of your handheld or tapping the icons in the input area Press Center on the 5 way to scroll through application categories Palm
347. nchronize unread mail only setting 321 synchronizing applications 76 79 106 615 benefits of 72 caution for 125 IMAP mail folders 390 391 392 information 73 76 612 over networks 75 95 101 prerequisites for 95 related topics for 17 requirements for 75 78 80 89 94 third party applications and 8 troubleshooting problems 79 upgrades and 4 using another computer on the network 75 wirelessly 89 287 with IR port 75 80 82 100 with Microsoft Outlook 10 106 112 613 614 uhtxihp how iru125 with Palm Desktop software 112 with sync cable 78 96 with user profiles 11 14 16 system information icon on status bar 29 system requirements 2 System Sound pick list 557 T Tap and Drag scrolling 427 tapping application titles 42 menu items 42 problems with 597 607 610 screen elements 556 596 T X Handheld Task Preferences dialog box 235 244 tasks See also Tasks application adding contact information to 138 adding notes to 234 adding to Tasks list 244 archiving 242 243 assigning due dates to 234 235 239 categorizing 234 240 245 changing date due 245 combining with appointments 149 completing 241 creating 234 deleting 242 243 displaying 171 180 240 244 245 entering from Outlook 10 613 managing 233 marking as private 234 organizing 240 prioritizing 234 245 reordering 245 saving 234 242 243 scheduling repeating 236 238 setting alarms for 235 245 setting repeat intervals for 237 239 viewing due dates
348. ncstes Setup screen with a c Select OK checkmark next to their name You can deselect 5 amp OPTIONAL Select which applications to Condest SEP 77 applications forexample include during synchronization Select the conduits to run to include a smaller during Modem HotSync number of applications a Open the menus M Address during synchronization Applications ana iiss make b Select Options and then select Conduit Setup Sede a a eaten c Uncheck the boxes for the files and applications ae that you do not want to synchronize during a M Card Info applications described in modem HotSync operation What information is synchronized skip d Select OK step 4 Y Continued 6 Tap the HotSync icon to synchronize your handheld with your computer 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 98 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Before You Begin Synchronizing by connecting to a computer In addition to the general requirements for network on the network synchronization you must meet the following requirements in order to synchronize by connecting with a 1 computer on the network WINDOWS ONLY Prepare the computers for network synchronization i a Turn on your computer e To connect using your on your compute handheld s IR port the computer to which you are connecting must be IR compatible c Select Network e The computer to which p NOTE You must select Network on both the compu
349. nd Receiving Email Messages 2 Attach the file a Select the Type pick list and then select the file type The VersaMail application displays all file types on your handheld that you can attach to an email message Or select to browse files on an expansion card Attachments Attachments i Tap here Application prc Appointment vCal Database pdb Documents Memo Text Attachments Voice Memo wav Jocalbusiness projects xls 24KB Files on Card Browse Files N NOTE The Files on Card option appears only if an expansion card is inserted into your handheld s expansion card slot Select it to display all files on the card in the upper box of the Attachments dialog box b Select the file that you want to attach and then select Add or Attach The selected file appears in the Attachments box N NOTE For some file types for example addresses or memos the files to attach appear in the box at the top of the Attachments screen For others for example Excel or Word files a new screen appears from which you can select the file to attach c Repeat steps a and b for each attachment you want to add and then select Done 4 Done 377 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Attaching photos and videos To attach a photo or video from an expansion card select the card name from 1 the Album pick list Open the Attachments screen Red paper clip a Create the message to which New Messag
350. nd in 34 not finding 24 609 opening 113 115 543 589 organizing 45 512 related topics for 45 removing categories in 514 removing connections for 564 renaming categories 513 restoring archived files for 127 selecting for synchronization 98 setting preferences for 541 545 setting primary location for 521 setting secondary locations for 524 setting synchronization options for 106 108 soft resets and 607 specifying connections for 561 switching between 10 36 589 613 synchronizing 76 79 106 615 synchronizing information for 76 112 transferring to handheld 27 76 uninstalling 608 updating information for 106 updating third party 8 upgrading 122 Applications View displaying icons on 609 moving around in 39 opening applications in 36 setting display options for 536 using 36 appointments See also Calendar application events adding to calendar 150 adjusting for location 545 641 color coding 161 combining tasks with 149 continuous 157 displaying 174 175 176 entering from Outlook 10 613 removing from calendar 168 repeating 154 saving 151 scheduling 150 151 setting alarms for 528 setting duration of 151 182 sharing 21 viewing duration of 180 viewing unscheduled time slots for 180 archive folders 127 archived information importing 117 archived items 127 168 243 archiving information 127 ASF media files 191 Assigned password 570 asterisk characters 130 Attach Signature check box 352 attachments See al
351. nd in dialog boxes Dialog boxes appear when you select a button or option that requires you to provide additional information In dialog boxes use the 5 way to select a button or to make a selection from items such as boxes and pick lists Up Down Right or Left Center Highlights the next item in the dialog box pick list box button in the corresponding direction e Contact Details Show in List Y Work Category v Unfiled Private O Pick list If highlight is on a box Checks or unchecks the box OK Conc Detete G Button with Box If highlight is on a pick list Opens the highlight pick list When a pick list is open Up or Down Scrolls to the previous or next entry Center Selects the highlighted entry If highlight is on a button Activates the button and then closes the dialog box IMPORTANT Read dialog boxes carefully Selecting a button such as OK or Yes may cancel an action or delete information Palm T X Handheld 40 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Moving around in menus After you open the menus you can use the 5 way to move between menus and to select menu items Up or Down Scrolls within the current menu list Options ND Right or Left Scrolls to the next or previous menu on the menu bar About Note Pad Center Selects the highlighted menu item Palm T X Handheld 41 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Using menus You can al
352. nderlined links which are text or pictures that when selected take you to another web page or to another part of the same page News Email Select the link to go to 3 Downloads 4 Sports another web page 5 Weather 6 Finance 7 Travel 8 Directories 9 Portals 0 More Returning to your home page or a page you recently visited No matter where you navigate on the Internet you can always return to your home page quickly or return to a page you recently visited Select the back and forward arrows to go to previous pages Select the Home icon to go a gt 0Q47O0H to your home page 1 News 2 Email Fy 3 Downloads 4 Sports 5 Weather 6 Finance Palm T X Handheld 425 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web You can change your font size for easier viewing In the Optimized mode use the navigator to browse the web page Press Left or Right to jump to the previous or next link When a link is highlighted press Center to go to the link Press Up and Down to scroll through the web page Palm T X Handheld Changing how you view a page You can change how you view web pages by selecting different display views and dragging the screen to view different parts 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Web amp Go to the web page you want to view Go to the Options menu a Open the menus b Select Options Select from one of the following views Optimized Mode Displays a modifie
353. ndheld The Handedness preferences enable you to select right hand or left hand orientation when you rotate the screen into landscape mode 1 Open Handedness Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Handedness Select your orientation and then select Done 4 Done Preferences Handedness Select your orientation for handwriting with Graffiti 2 Left Handed Right Handed 542 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Assigning a button to your frequently To restore all the buttons to the original Palm used applications settings select Default Tired of going to Applications View to open an application you use frequently Use the Buttons Preferences screen to reassign the applications associated with the buttons on the front of your You can assign input handheld and the sync button area icons to different applications also Tap and hold the input area icon and select an application For example if you use Documents often you can assign Documents to a button so that you don t have to scroll through Applications View whenever you want to use that application from the dialog box 1 Open Buttons Preferences Pasa Select an application to a Go to Applications customize each button p AN Favorites b Select Prefs ais Contacts Select pick v Calendar c Select Buttons list amp Web 2 Select the pick list next to the button you want to reas
354. nformation on your handheld Turn this setting on to receive beamed info or turn it off to prevent receiving beamed info 4 Done Connecting your handheld to other handhelds NOTE You do not need to use Connection Preferences if you are using the built in Bluetooth wireless technology to connect your handheld to another handheld or using the Wi Fi functionality to connect your handheld to a Wi Fi network See the Bluetooth and Wi Fi chapters for connection setup instructions Use Connection Preferences for other connection types Connection Preferences let you connect your handheld to other handhelds You can use preset connection settings modify the preset settings or create your own connection settings from scratch The list of preset connections varies depending on the applications you ve added to your handheld Palm T X Handheld 561 CHAPTER 26 Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld For example you can create a connection between the IR port of your handheld and a modem so that you can dial in to your ISP or corporate network The modem can be attached to or within a mobile phone or other handheld containing an IR port Some infrared phones can act as modems To set up a phone connection you must have a 00800 GSM or GPRS mobile phone enabled with data services and a driver for your phone Check www Palm com for available phone drivers or contact the phone manufacturer Changing the prese
355. ng Your Handheld Palm T X Handheld 2 Select one of these settings and then select Done Never Keylock always remains off Automatic Keylock turns on automatically when you turn off your handheld or when your handheld goes to sleep Manual Keylock turns on when you press and hold the power button until the system sound confirms that Keylock is on 4 Done Selecting power saving settings The Power Preferences screen enables you to set power consumption options 1 Open Power Preferences Petera a Go to Applications Auto off after v 2 minutes On while Charging Off b Select Prefs 6 Beam Receive v Off c Select Power Y Continued 560 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld ISP Acronym for 2 Select the pick lists to change any of the following settings and then Internet service provider select Done This is the service you use to connect to the Auto off after Select how quickly your handheld automatically turns off after a Internet period of inactivity 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes or 3 minutes Did You Know On while charging Select whether your handheld stays on continuously when You cannot rename it is connected to the AC charger When this option is off you can still turn on or delete the preset your handheld to view your info while your handheld charges but it turns off connection settings automatically after a period of inactivity Beam Receive Select whether you can receive beamed i
356. ng with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for special considerations when using Auto Sync with a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information with info in Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Scheduling Auto Sync You can set up different schedules for each of your email accounts but you can set up only one schedule for each account For example if you set up a schedule to get mail on weekdays for your Yahoo account you can t set up a separate schedule for weekends for that account Auto Sync may not work with your specific VPN connection It also doesn t work if your security preferences include encrypting databases on your handheld Palm T X Handheld 336 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Be sure to manually 1 E EE retrieve any messages eect Ulo Syne tor agIven Auto Sync using Get or Get amp Send account X Sync automatically after setting up a a Open the menus Every scheduled Auto Sync b Select Options and then Start Tane Then only new messages select Preferences End Time 5 are retrieved during Auto Days Sa S Sync c Select Auto Sync and then check the Sync automatically box 2 Set schedule options Interval Select the Every pick list and select the time interval from 5 minutes to 12 hours Note that if you set a more frequent interval you may need to recharge your handheld s battery more often Start End Time Select the Start and End Time boxe
357. ngham Berkshire RG40 1PA www palm com Antenna Care Unauthorized Modifications Use only the supplied integral antenna Unauthorized antenna modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate FCC regulations Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Potentially Unsafe Areas Potentially explosive atmospheres Turn off your unit when you are in any areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere such as fueling areas gas or petrol stations or storage facilities for fuel or chemicals Industry Canada The term IC before the certification registration number only signifies that the Industry Canada technical specifications were met IC 3905A AOKI Canadian Wireless Regulatory Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Operation is subject to the following two conditions a this device may not cause any interference and b this device must accept any interference including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to prevent maximum shielding Equipment or its transmit antenna that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing 635 Palm T X Handheld CEO CE Declaration of C
358. nistrator e Whether the corporate mail system uses a Microsoft Exchange 2003 mail server If it does not you cannot use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Palm T X Handheld 393 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages e The name of the mail server that provides wireless access to your mail system Some companies do not give out this information because they do not want wireless access to the system If you cannot obtain the server name you cannot use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync e Whether a proxy server is used and if so the name of the server e Whether a virtual private network VPN is required to access the server How does a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account differ from other accounts An email account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync differs from other accounts in the following areas e Setting up an account e Getting messages e Sending messages e Downloading attachments e Receiving and working with meeting invitations e Receiving and working with Calendar events These features are discussed in this chapter Most other features of a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account such as attaching files to messages work like the features of any other account Ry NOTE Email accounts that use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync do not support mail filters Also you cannot set server preferences from the VersaMail Preferences screen for this type of account Palm T X Handheld 394 CHAPTER 16
359. nizing using Bluetooth Wireless Technology You must create a Bluetooth connection on your handheld and your computer must have the follwing Go to Applications and select HotSync 8 e A Bluetooth antenna and software must be 2 Setup up your Bluetooth Wayne Hoff installed on your synchronization Last HotSync 8 18 05 1 23 pm com pute r using Cradle Cable e HotSync manager must a Select Local be active on your Wis G HotSync icon computer On a Windows b Tap the pick list below the computer you know HotSync icon and select a Bluetooth connection cee HotSync manager is active when its icon appears in the lower right corner of your screen Tap pick list 3 Tap the HotSync icon on your handheld 4 Done When synchronization is complete a message appears at the top of your handheld screen Be patient synchronization may take up to a few minutes Palm T X Handheld 94 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Before You Begin Synchronizing by dialing in to a network The following setup must be done before you can WINDOWS ONLY synchronize over a IMPORTANT The first time you synchronize you must use the cable or infrared communication After that you can synchronize over a network network e Your computer must have TCP IP installed e Your company s 1 ee pany Prepare your computer for network synchronization network system and its remote access serve
360. nsert a highlight press Right or Left to select a day and then press Center on the 5 way again Palm T X Handheld 1 Open Week View Week selector Multi day event a Press Calendar b Select the Week View icon No time icon H Event Scroll arrows After hours event Week View icon Do any of the following to view your weekly schedule e Select the week selector to scroll between weeks or select Go To to choose a week e Select a date to go to that day in Day View e Select an event to view the event description and location e Select the scroll arrows to view events scheduled earlier or later in the day during the selected week 4 Done 175 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Viewing your monthly schedule You can also press Right Month View shows your schedule for a whole month You can scroll between months or jump to and Left on the 5 way any other month to scroll to the next or previous month To go to Day View for a particular 1 date press Center on the 5 way to insert a Month selector Open Month View SMT WT a Press Calendar highlight press Right or Event Left to select a date and 3 4 586 7 89 aa b Select the Month View a ae then press Center on the 10 a 11512 13 14 15716 5 way again icon E 17 iden Ea J30 J31 22 No time icon 24 25 26 29 30 Multi day event Month View icon 2 Do any of the following to view your monthly schedule e
361. nt Use Calendar to manage your schedule You can enter appointments events without a start time events that repeat at regular intervals and events that span a period of time Event The name for an entry in the Calendar application including appointments birthdays i reminders recurring Scheduling an appointment meetings and so on 1 Open Day View Aug 31 06 4SM 7 FIS gt You can also scroll to a date by pressing Left a Press Calendar O or Right on the 5 way navigator or by tapping the arrows at the top of the Day View b Select the Day View icon Day View icon Go To You can use more than one line to describe an appointment 2 amp OPTIONAL Ifthe appointment is not for today select the date of the appointment a Tap Go To 4 b Select the year month and date N EIH EE 25 26 27 28 29 30 vores Palm T X Handheld 150 CHAPTER 7 DEUET L DITTE OFT ELA You can color code your 3 calendar to file events in categories Each category has its own color You 4 can also mark events as private to hide them from prying eyes Tap the line next to the time the appointment begins and enter a description If the appointment is longer or shorter than an hour set the duration a In Day View tap the start time b In the Set Time dialog box tap End Time If you are synchronizing with Outlook on your Windows computer d Select OK and you created appointments in Outlook Sep
362. nter Graffiti 2 characters To open them tap and hold Input I on the status bar and then select open the onscreen the icon of the input area you want keyboard Wide Tip You can choose whether the Graffiti 2 strokes you gt enter appear as white characters in the Numbers input area Sel ct Uppercase letters middle icon Lowercase letters Classic Numbers Select Uppercase letters bottom icon straddling line Lowercase letters In either layout write lowercase letters uppercase letters and numbers in the sections shown If you write characters in the wrong area they are not recognized correctly and an incorrect character is written Using full screen writing When full screen writing is turned on you can write anywhere on the screen When full screen writing is turned off you must write character strokes in the Graffiti 2 input area for your handheld to recognize them Palm T X Handheld 49 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld You can write letters or characters in the following areas Left side of the screen Write letters or characters that are assigned to the abc input area Right side of the screen Write numbers or characters that are assigned to the 123 input area Middle of the screen straddling the imaginary dividing line between the left and right sides Write uppercase letters Ry NOTE For a brief period of time after writing a character a quick tap on the screen is interpreted as a period character
363. o initialize itself If you have a modem select and enter a number of seconds for the wait The typical setting for a wireless modem is 3 and the typical setting for most normal modems is 0 4 Done Setting server preferences Server preferences differ for POP and IMAP email accounts 1 Open the Server Preferences screen a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Server Y Continued 387 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Any server preferences 2 y i A Select any of the following Servers you set are account ific th prefe rences m Leave mail on server after specitic they apply only downloading to VersaMail to the account you are i y Leave mail on server POP Check this if you also view mail currently viewing accounts only To get email on from this account on a PC your handheld but leave it on the o Delete mail on the server P after deleting from VersaMail server so you can view it later on your computer check the Leave mail on server box Root Folders IMAP accounts only Defines the root folder on your IMAP server Deleted Mail IMAP accounts only Stores deleted email in the folder you specify on the server Sent Mail IMAP accounts only Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server Delete mail on the server Check this box to delete messages on your provider s mail serv
364. o Sync over a network you must be in range of a network access point for Auto Sync to work can receive email fine but am having problems sending email If you are able to receive email messages but cannot send them try these steps in turn 1 Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to access email on a wireless handheld Several providers do not offer this option at all other providers require an upgrade to access email on a wireless handheld 2 Turn on ESMTP Many services require authenticated access to use their SMTP servers or ESMTP 3 Enter the name of a different outgoing mail server for sending mail Many ISPs such as cable companies require that you have an Internet connection to their network to send email through their servers In this case you can almost always receive email from these accounts but if you want to send email you must send it through another server can t download any messages If the program memory on your handheld fills up you cannot download any more messages to your handheld Delete some messages to free up program memory and try downloading again am trying to synchronize messages on my handheld with messages on my computer but it s not working On your computer check the advanced account settings for the account you want Make sure that the box is checked that allows you to synchronize messages on your handheld with messages on your computer Palm T X Handheld 624
365. o step 8 administrator for the WPA PSK h passphrase 7 If you selected WPA PSK in step 5 a Select the Key box b Assign a passphrase c Select OK New Wi Fi Network il WPA PSK Key Network Name SSID Encryption TKIP Assign Passphrase Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections 8 amp OPTIONAL Manually set your IP or DNS addresses a Select Details b Select the Connect to pick list and then select Access Point infrastructure c Select Advanced d Select the IP Address or DNS Server pick list and then select Manual e Enter the IP address or DNS server information f If you want to use a preamble check the Use short preamble box g Select OK Advanced Network AdvancedNetwork IP Addvess ETA IP Address Manual Manual IP Address le Subnet Mask _ Router DNS Server Automatic DNS Server v Manual Preferred DNS Alternate DNS O Use short preamble O Use short preamble C Cancel Cok Cancel Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections If your computer is 9 Select OK in the Edit Wi Fi Seamer located on a Wi Fi Network or New Wi Fi Network Would youlike to network once you have dialog box and then select Yes connect to wlan set up a Wi Fi network when asked if you want to naws connection with that connect to the network When the connection completes you a
366. o that N NOTE Alarms set in World Clock use the time set for the primary location all your alarms ring on Alarm box time instead of eight heiire late CATA a Set Alarm j v San Francisco Sat Dec 25 2004 9 58 pm Set an alarm while you re working to remind you when to leave to get to your appointment on time v Tokyo v London 10 Sun 2 58pm Sun 5 58am OK Alarm Off 11 Set Date amp Time Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 528 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings To turn off an alarm before it sounds select the Alarm box and then select Alarm Off Palm T X Handheld 3 amp OPTIONAL Select the alarm sound and volume a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Alarm Preferences c Select the pick lists to select the alarm sound and volume AY NOTE This volume setting does not affect the other sounds on your handheld including the alarms you set in Calendar You can change the volume of these other sounds in Preferences d Select OK 4 Done Responding to the alarm clock When the World Clock alarm sounds select one of these three options OK Cancel the reminder message and return to the current screen Snooze Close the alarm reminder message and return to the current screen The message appears again in five minutes In the meantime an indicator blinks in the upper left corner of the screen to remind you of the upcoming alarm Go To Cancel the reminder message
367. o to a page in the guide to return to the page you were on before you clicked the link click Previous View or o depending on your version of Reader e When selecting the page s to print be sure to use the file page number shown at the bottom of your computer screen not the printed page number For example to print the first page of Chapter 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld select page 40 the file page not page 18 the printed page XX What s in this guide The info in this guide includes step by step instructions links to cross references and sidebars Step by step instructions Here you ll find how to information Look for these cues in instructions Y Continued 4 Done IMPORTANT amp OPTIONAL fy NOTE WINDOWS ONLY MAC ONLY Links Cue that means the procedure continues on the next page Cue that signals the end of the procedure You re done A step that you must follow otherwise you could experience an error or even lose information A step you might find useful Information that applies only in certain cases or that tells more about a procedure step A procedure or text that applies to one platform only In most cases if you see one heading check the following or preceding sections for the other Sometimes there is no Mac counterpart for a Windows procedure or text this feature is not available to Mac users Links appear as underlined words throughout this guide Links in body
368. o use is used by other applications exit those applications before setting up your computer for wireless synchronization Some of my applications do not synchronize If you have synchronized successfully but you can t find the information from your handheld on your computer check to see that you have the correct username selected for viewing information NOTE Ifyou upgraded from a previous handheld go to www Palm com support select your country select the T X handheld from the main page and click the Upgrade link WINDOWS ONLY Click the HotSync manager icon G in the lower right corner of your screen and then select Custom Check that the application is set to synchronize the files If it is not select the application click Change and then select Synchronize the files Check the Set as default box to use this setting each time you synchronize Otherwise it applies during the next synchronization only MAC ONLY Double click the HotSync manager icon G in the Palm folder From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings Select your username from the User pop up menu and be sure that the application is set to synchronize Palm T X Handheld 615 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions can t open the HotSync manager On a Windows computer uninstall Palm Desktop software from your computer and then reinstall the software from the software installation CD On a Mac computer just reinstall Palm Desktop software When I s
369. o your handheld over a network connection Synchronize Applies a filter to CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Filters a Synchronize fe Sues O 7 Sales M 7 Seminar Retrieve mail if the sender address contains onlinebroker OR the receiver address contains seminar messages downloaded to your handheld when you synchronize b Check or uncheck the filter boxes to select the filters you do and don t want to use for subsequent email transactions c Select OK 4 Done 384 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Editing or deleting a filter Edit a filter to change either its name or any of its criteria 1 Select the filter to edit or delete a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Filters and then select the name of the filter 2 Do one of the following Edit Revise your entry in the Name field your selections in the pick lists or the text in the edit line Select OK Delete Select Delete select Yes to confirm the deletion and then select OK 3 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 385 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip Setting connection preferences Any connection preferences you set are account specific they 1 Open the Connection Preferences screen apply only to the account you are currently in a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus
370. oa ranie 599 Restoring your information after a hard reset c eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteees 601 Related topics ionii spo aa aaa aa NEE Taaa ANERE 603 Chapter 29 Common Questions ccccccsssseseeeeeeeseeeeees 604 SOLU areara E a e a a e a outs 604 Handheld ssai iane a a aeia iaaa ea aE E i 606 Moving around suisses idiin sa aaa aiaga aaan aaiae 609 Entering information cccccccsssssceeessseeeeeeeseceeeeesseceeeeeseqaeeeeesenneeeeeesenea 610 SY MEMMOMIZIMG neeaae a E T E 612 Leea e E E A A E T E E E E teceas 618 MEMOS crids inn a a a a a e aa aa aaa 619 INO LO We Oli e E E T T E E TAT 619 Medid coenae S E A E cuevaviees 619 Pocket TUNGS retain ee T ates eee E date aerar EEs Ee aaa E Eais 620 TASKS sgascassisator oxinesiessiges a a ida a aaia aaa a aai ipi 621 Connecting wirelessly ccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeae cae eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaaeeeeeeeeees 621 The VersaMail SPO CAIN ociicctassdeeatosaiitaotnadon iietn ncanissecinndniiuieionndileloiasuis 623 PTIVACY cesena e a a ton tue aa est ath E Ta a aea 625 SETEL E TE I E A E E A I A O T 626 Problems with incompatible applications ssssssssssssrisssssssssrrrrsrnssnsse 628 Chapter 30 Getting Help ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 631 Self help TESOULCES eenirsaissiirnsieii ai r e n 631 Technical Support sissisodan Eaa edi 632 Palm T X Handheld xviii Product Regulatory Information c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 633 FEC Statement au
371. oft Exchange ActiveSync account on handheld your computer WINDOWS ONLY 1 Open VersaMail account setup 2 Select your username from the drop down list at the top of the screen and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account Click Next Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 395 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages When you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account all existing Calendar events are purged from your handheld Then when you synchronize your handheld with your Exchange server events from the past seven days are downloaded to your handheld so you don t end up with duplicate events Another way an account that uses Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync differs from other accounts is that there is no bce option when you send a message Palm T X Handheld Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list and then select Exchange ActiveSync Click Next Enter the basic account information a Enter a descriptive name for the account b Enter your account username and password c Enter your email address for this account d Click Next Enter the name of the Exchange server the port number for the server and the maximum message size you want to download Check one or both boxes if the server requires authentication and or if you are using a proxy server Check with your system administrator to obtain this information amp OPTIONAL If you are
372. okmarks 422 428 contacts 66 130 133 346 daily events 150 expense items 472 474 475 locations 525 multiday events 157 owner information 558 passwords 492 493 498 personal signatures 352 plug in applications 579 reminders 132 255 repeating events 154 155 songs to playlists 227 speed dial entries 456 tasks 234 236 238 INDEX trusted devices 299 unscheduled events 153 untimed events 152 157 Addit software 26 additional software 120 add on applications 124 628 address fields 134 422 Address Lookup screen 351 addresses 21 131 346 574 See also contacts addressing email 142 145 349 350 351 554 text messages 412 adjusting alarm volume 529 557 brightness 538 modem volume 566 speaker volume 557 Adobe Acrobat Reader 24 AES encryption 307 agenda lists 149 See also Calendar application Agenda View customizing Tasks lists and 244 described 171 opening 171 521 setting display options for 178 180 Agenda View icon 171 521 Alarm check box 165 235 alarm clock 165 235 520 528 See also alarms clock alarm icons 173 Alarm Preferences command 529 Alarm Preset settings 183 Alarm Sound pick list 258 557 640 alarm tones 165 183 245 258 529 alarms See also alerts reminders adjusting volume 529 557 attaching to notes 258 changing 166 changing sounds for 258 entering preferences for 182 183 235 icon on status bar 29 responding to world clock 529 selecting sounds for 165 183 245 529 setting 165
373. older or delete or rename existing ones c Select OK The filter appears in the Filters list 4 Done 382 CHAPTER 16 Filters that are turned on execute in the order in which they appear on the Filters list To ensure that filters execute in the correct order move them up and down the list by selecting the pick list to the left of the filter name Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Turning a filter on and off A filter that is turned on applies to all subsequent downloads of email until you deselect it More than one filter can be in effect at once Before you download email be sure to turn on the filters you want and turn off those you don t want 1 Open the Filters dialog box a In the Inbox or on another folder screen open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Filters The Filters dialog box appears with the filters you created Y Continued Filters Connected M 7 Quotes O 7 Sales M 7 Seminar Retrieve mail if the sender address contains onlinebroker OR the receiver address contains seminar 383 If you don t want a filter to apply to any downloads at all be sure to deselect the filter under both Connected and Synchronize Palm T X Handheld 2 Turn filters on or off a Select the pick list in the upper left corner and select one of the following Connected Applies a filter to messages downloaded t
374. ols on the status bar and then select Prefs Open the menus Select Options and then select Disable device name cache The selection on the Options menu toggles to Enable device name cache This indicates that the cache is disabled 4 Done 302 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Allowing your handheld to wake up when it is turned off You can set your handheld to receive information through Bluetooth connections when your handheld is turned off The radio remains on but your handheld is not discoverable For another Bluetooth device or application to wake up your handheld it must know your handheld name This limits the connections to devices that are trusted or that have connected with you before 1 Tap Bluetooth controls 4 on the status bar and then select Prefs 2 Open the menus Select Options and then select Allow wakeup The selection on the Options menu toggles to Do not allow wakeup indicating that Allow Wakeup is enabled IMPORTANT Enabling the Allow Wakeup setting uses battery power even when your handheld is turned off Be sure to monitor your battery level 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 303 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections with your handheld s wireless capabilities or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld If you re having problems Related topics Click a link below to learn about these rela
375. om working at all Palm T X Handheld 626 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions When someone beams information to my handheld it doesn t receive the info e f you are receiving info from another Palm Powered handheld confirm that your handheld and the other handheld are 4 to 39 inches approximately ten centimeters to one meter apart and that the path between the two handhelds is clear of obstacles Beaming distances to other handhelds with an IR port may be different e Are you reading your handheld in landscape mode If so is the IR port pointing away from the sending handheld e Move your handheld closer to the sending handheld e Make sure your handheld has beam receive enabled e Perform a soft reset on both your handheld and the beaming handheld When someone beams information to my handheld get a message telling me it is out of memory e Your handheld requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the info you are receiving For example if you are receiving a 30KB application you must have at least 60KB free e Purge old Calendar events and delete unused or unnecessary applications cannot send information to another Bluetooth handheld e Make sure that Bluetooth communication is enabled on both your handheld and the other handheld e Make sure that the receiving handheld has a compatible Bluetooth application installed e The receiving handheld must be within range of your handheld app
376. om your handheld that fall outside the time interval set on the handheld For example if the time interval is set at seven days any email messages that are eight days old are removed from your handheld This info is not removed from the Exchange server Palm T X Handheld 402 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages When you synchronize a 1 Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account a copy of any messages sent from your handheld 2 is placed in the Sent Items folder on the Exchange Tap VersaMail in the input area amp OPTIONAL If you are using a VPN connection connect to your VPN server A copy of any 3 Get messages messages deleted from your handheld is placed a Open the menus in the Deleted Items folder on the server b Select Accounts and then select your Microsoft Jid You Knov Exchange ActiveSync When you forward or account reply to a message the text is sent from the server copy of the message not from the copy on your handheld This is faster and may save on data charges 4 Done A list of your messages appears in the Inbox To see downloaded Calendar events tap Calendar Ps c Select Sync This updates New Sync Display your Calendar events also Palm T X Handheld 403 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages in attending Did You Know Sending messages For Microsoft Exchange You manually send messages from a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in
377. omputer screen selecting Custom selecting VersaMail and then selecting Change Select the account you want and then click Delete Account Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Deleting an account When you delete an account in the VersaMail application the account is removed from your handheld The account still exists on the server however For example deleting your Yahoo account from the VersaMail application deletes the account only from your handheld Your email account still exists at Yahoo com You can delete all but one of your email accounts you must have at least one account 1 Select the account you want to delete Open the menus Select Accounts and then select Account Setup Select the name of the account that you want to delete and then select Delete Delete the account b Select Yes in the Delete Account dialog box to delete the account and all associated email messages Select OK 4 Done Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit Yahoo Work Email Delete Account Are you sure you want to permanently remove the Work Email account 332 CHAPTER 16 ESMTP Acronym for Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol A method for authenticating outgoing email messages If you need to enter new authentication information enter your username select the Password box enter a password and then select OK
378. on you want for your memo lift the stylus 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 251 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Deleting a memo Need to retrieve that holiday recipe you stored If you save an archive copy of your deleted memos you can refer to them later by importing them Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Go to Favorites and select Memo 6 Open the Delete Memo Delete Memo 9 dialog box Delete current memo a Locate the memo you want M Save archive copy on PC b Open the menus c Select Delete Memo on the Record menu amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the memo on your computer Select OK 4 Done 252 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Tip Working with Memos on your computer Windows If you chose to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook check out the online Help in Use Memos on your computer to view and manage the memos you create on your handheld Check out the online Help in Palm Desktop software to learn how to use Memos on your computer The online Help includes info about the following topics Outlook to learn how to e Viewing copying and deleting memos use Notes on your computer e Editing memo details Tip e Marking memos as private You can copy the text of a memo and paste it into a new Word file in Documents on your handheld Edit the text in Documents save it as a Microsoft Word file and then send the file to your computer by synchronizing so you can view
379. one Entering information with your computer Do you have a lot of information to enter on your handheld Consider entering it in Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook Windows only on your computer When you synchronize your handheld with your computer the information on your handheld is updated with the info you entered on your computer N NOTE Ifyou choose to synchronize your handheld with Microsoft Outlook Windows only info from Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos on your handheld is synchronized with info in Outlook Other info on your handheld such as photos and notes is synchronized with info on Palm Desktop software 112 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Tin WINDOWS ONLY The Palm Desktop online Help has lots of info about how to use 1 Palm Desktop software Open the Help menu and select Palm Desktop Help b Click the icon in the launch bar to open the application Open an application in Palm Desktop software a Double click the Palm Desktop icon on your computer desktop Launch bar a m Si EE ED A H a 24 25 2 27 28 29 Ed gt TE dii DP 2 3 Palm Desktop s 3 A New Edit z E MEE ES E week Emonn Bhyear Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 113 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 2 Do one of the following e Click New in
380. onformity Palm T X Palm Inc declares that the above model of Palm PDA is compliant with the specifications below The declaration applies to the PDA and its associated accessories power supply and USB cable where applicable Maximum Measured SAR Values W kg 1gr AVG IEEE802 11 B Body SAR 17 Conforms with the following Specifications EMC EN 301 489 1 V1 4 1 Aug 2002 EN 301 419 17 V1 2 1 Aug 2002 EN 300 328 V1 5 1 Aug 2004 FCC CFR 47 Part 15 247 SAR ANSI IEEE C95 1 1999 FCC OET Bulletin 65 Supplement C Safety EN 60950 2000 Jan 2000 Radiated Emissions EN 55022 1998 A1 2000 A2 2003 Class B Immunity EN 55024 1998 A1 2001 A2 2003 Authorized Palm Representative Palm Regulatory Compliance Department Date June 23 2005 636 Battery Warning Do not mutilate puncture or dispose of batteries in fire The batteries can burst or explode releasing hazardous chemicals Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and in accordance with your local regulations Varning Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anvand samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anv nt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion Advarsel Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig h ndtering Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverand ren Varoitus Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisest
381. onnect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web e Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly e Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly 286 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Key Term What can I do with the built in Bluetooth luetooth Technology 5 that enables devices such wireless tech nology as handhelds mobile Connect to your Bluetooth phone to send text or email messages or to access the web phones and computers Whether you access the Internet or send text or email messages once a week or constantly to connect wirelessly to throughout the day wireless connectivity means that you can go online anytime by connecting by each other This handheld means of your mobile phone or your laptop connected to the Internet For a list of compatible complies with phones go to http www palm com us support downloads phonelink html Bluetooth 1 1 Reduce cable clutter by synchronizing wirelessly Imagine your desk and workstation without Before You Begin cable clutter Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld replaces many of the connecting Any device you connect cables with a wireless connection for tasks such as synchronizing to must also be a Bluetooth device with Bluetooth features enabled Check the user guide that came with the device for information Connect to other devices to share files wirelessly Wouldn t it be great if you could sen
382. ons Finding a third party application that is causing a problem If you have multiple third party applications installed on your handheld or have upgraded from an earlier model of a Palm Powered handheld perform the following procedure to remove all third party applications from your handheld Once you have removed all of the third party applications you can install one application at a time to determine which application is causing the problem The following procedures erase all information from your handheld Before removing the applications synchronize to back up the contents of your handheld to your computer 1 On a Windows computer open the Palm folder on your computer and then open the user folder for your handheld User folder names are often abbreviated as last name first initial On a Mac computer locate the folder Home Documents Palm Users lt handheld name gt Backups 2 Select and drag the Backup folder to the desktop Make sure you see the Backup folder on the desktop 3 On a Windows computer close the Palm folder 4 Perform a hard reset Synchronize your handheld with your computer to restore info to your handheld 5 Operate your handheld and try to replicate problem operations 6 Do one of the following e If your handheld still has problems review this Common Questions section for solutions to the problem Fix the problem before reinstalling the third party applications e If your handheld no longer has p
383. ontact fields to multiple contacts Any changes you make to Press Contacts 2 2 Customize the contact field type The email address field a Select the contact you want and then select Edit type is located on the same pick list as the b Select the pick list next to the field you want to change and select the new phone number fields field type you want Available fields include phone number email address IM field types are located and instant messenger IM fields on a separate pick list i Ry NOTE You must set up an instant messenger account with a service provider and download instant messaging software to use instant messaging on your handheld Contact Edit Unfiled Contact Edit it First name Lee First name Lee Picture 9 Select triangle 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 134 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Defining a custom field You can define the custom fields that appear at the end of the Contact Edit screen to display any additional contact information you want such as spouse s or children s names favorite color or any other information The new field is defined in all contacts not just the current contact 1 Press Contacts 2 2 Define the custom fields a Select the contact you want and then select Edit b Open the menus c Select Options and then select Rename Custom Fields d Enter names for up to nine custom fields and then select OK 4 Done
384. or Phone e Bluetooth wireless technology Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 569 CHAPTER 26 Instead of creating a new profile you can copy an existing profile and change the settings Select the profile you want to copy and then open the Service menu and select Duplicate Most dial in servers do not accept spaces in the username If you re concerned about security don t enter a password Just leave the word Prompt in the Password box and your handheld will ask you to enter a password each time you log in Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Enter the basic settings Service Select the Service pick list and select your ISP or your dial in server type from the list If your ISP or server type isn t on the list select New and enter a name for the service profile User Name Enter your username This is the part of your email address that s before the sign and it s the name that you use when you log in to your ISP or your dial in server This field can contain multiple lines of text but only two lines appear onscreen Password Enter the password you use to log in to your ISP or dial in server and then select OK The word Assigned appears in this box and you don t need to enter a password when you log in Connection Select the Connection pick list and select the method you want to use to connect to your ISP or to a dial in server See Connecting your handheld to other handhe
385. or Prompt command 577 warnings 608 637 warranty 606 web addresses 421 442 666 See also URLs Web browser application saving web pages 435 web browser application accessing web pages with 421 423 action bar icons for 425 adding bookmarks with 428 arranging bookmarks and saved pages with 431 432 automatically completing URLs and 421 442 benefits of 420 changing display views with 426 changing home page for 437 438 closing Internet connections and 433 download options for 433 440 editing bookmarks with 430 freeing memory for 447 getting help with 451 moving through web pages with 425 opening 434 opening Bookmarks View for 429 related topics for 451 saving web pages with 434 searching with 424 sending email with 436 setting preferences for 440 450 specifying start page for 439 web browsers See web browser application web pages accessing 421 422 423 bookmarking favorites 422 428 changing bookmarks for 428 changing display options for 426 427 T X Handheld clearing cache for 447 disabling cookies for 445 disabling JavaScript for 450 displaying 435 displaying saved pages 435 downloading 433 editing bookmarks for 430 finding information on 424 hiding address fields for 422 loading from email 365 loading last viewed 439 moving large 427 navigating 425 opening saved 429 removing images and 440 renaming saved 434 returning to recently visited 425 saving 434 selecting bookmarks for 429 setting autofill option for
386. ortant files and documents Get connected with wireless access to email text messages and the web View digital photo and video albums and listen to your favorite music expansion card sold separately required for Mac users to listen to music on their handheld And don t worry about losing your information even if the battery drains completely the information stays in your handheld s memory Simply recharge to access it again Benefits e Carry more of your important information and work with it e Save time and stay organized e Travel light e Never lose important information e Stay in touch with wireless connectivity CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Tip What s on my handheld The Favorites application offers multiple pages of favorites Pressing Home Front once opens the first page of Favorites use the buttons in the upper right corner of the Favorites screen to go to the other pages 5 way navigator Screen Home Web Calendar Contacts Screen Displays the applications and information on your handheld The screen is touch sensitive Display the Graffiti 2 input area by tapping the Input icon on the status bar Use the input area to enter info with Graffiti 2 writing or the onscreen keyboard Home quick button Press once to open Favorites View which lets you create a list of the items you want to quickly access Favorites View can include applications and lin
387. ory Unfiled week Every other week Every month or Repeat Every week Every year Private O OR Caneel Cere E N NOTE If you select Daily a dialog box appears for you to select the end date c Select OK 4 Done 154 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Scheduling a repeating event unusual interval Some events don t fit neatly into the preset repeat intervals so you need to set up your own repeat intervals For example set aside time for a trip to the gym every other day schedule a class that meets on the 1st Wednesday of each month or enter annual holidays that occur during a particular time of month such as the 1st Monday in September or the 3rd week of November Palm T X Handheld 1 2 Press Calendar On Enter the event you want to repeat and then select the event description Open the Change Repeat dialog box a Select Details b Select the Repeat pick list and select Other Event Details Change Repeat i Time 1 None Day Week VETS Date 3 Every 12 Month s Alarm Endon w NoEndDate Location Repeat by EEN Date The 4th Thursday of every 12th month Ny Continued 155 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE ELA To enter holidays select 4 Set the repeat interval Month enter 12 on the Every line and then a Select Day Week Month or Year as the repeat unit select Day as the Repeat By setting b Select the Every line and enter the frequency at which the event repe
388. os you want to delete d Select Delete e Select Delete in the Delete Media dialog box 4 Done Marked for deletion CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Tip Sharing a photo or a video You can also beam or send an entire album by opening the Album menu and selecting Beam Album or Send Album You can also share photos and videos using any of the following methods You can easily share photos and videos with family and friends Use your handheld s built in Bluetooth wireless technology to wirelessly send photos and videos to other Bluetooth handhelds within range e Attach a photo or video to an email message e Beam a photo or video to other Palm Powered handhelds e Copy a photo or video from your handheld to your desktop computer or from computer to handheld by using Media application from within Palm Desktop Windows You can also copy a photo or video from your Mac to your handheld using the Send To Handheld droplet Synchronize to transfer the files from your computer to your handheld N NOTE Sending a large number of photos or videos using Bluetooth technology or beaming can take a long time Palm T X Handheld 210 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Before You Begin Sending a photo or video using Bluetooth wireless technology Set up a Bluetooth You can easily share photos with family and friends Use your handheld s built in Bluetooth
389. ot Card Follow the directions in ksi ii j Select New enter the name a of the new album and then select OK album c Select OK on the Manage Albums screen Drag the stylus across multiple photos and or videos to add or remove 4 them all at once Add photos or videos to the Organize Holiday album you just created 3 Select to add a Select each photo or video you want to add to the album A plus sign appears to the left of selected items To remove If you remove a photo or video from an album it is moved to Photos and Select to remove Videos The photo or a photo or video from the video is not deleted album select it again the from your handheld or plus sign disappears the expansion card b Select Done Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 202 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Move photos within albums to easily put the slide show of your child s birthday party in the sequence you want Palm T X Handheld 5 Move photos or videos within albums a Select the location pick list at the top of the screen and then select the album in which you want to move photos or videos b Select the photo you want to move and then tap and drag with the stylus to move the photo or video to the desired location N NOTE You cannot move photos or videos in All Albums view 4 Done Moving a photo or video within and between albums 1 2 Tap Media in the input area
390. ou landed in Toronto Neither matters as long as you have your handheld Not only can you rely on it for the correct time but you can even set an alarm so you don t miss that early flight back home Benefits of World Clock e Always have the correct time no matter where you are e No need to carry a separate alarm clock 520 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Checking the current date and time Primary location You can easily check the current date and time Typically a city in the time e The System Info icon on the status bar shows the current time Tap the System Info icon to see zone in which you live the current date e Go to Applications and select World Clock O e Press Calendar and then select the Agenda View icon E Setting the primary location In World Clock you can set the location date and time for a primary location The settings for this primary location are used by all of the applications on your handheld 1 Go to Applications and select World Clock O 2 Select the primary location Primary location World Clock pick list v San Francisco a Select the primary location Thu Dec 17 2009 pick list b Select the location you want to be the primary location If you need more choices modify the locations list 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 521 CHAPTER 25 Managing Clock Settings Setting the date and time for the primary location When the Daylight You
391. ount information you entered In most cases the information displayed is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password IMAP accounts only Click the Versaitail TM Advanced Settings T Folders tab and verify or edit any Penance of the following settings General Incoming Mail Outgoing Mail Folders m Advanced Incoming Options Sent Folder Shows the name IMAP Server Folders of your Sent Mail folder on the ee et server Trash Folder Advanced Synchronization Options Server Folders Trash Folder Stores deleted Server Folder Synchronize email in the folder you specify on the server Server Folder Synchronization To synchronize messages on your handheld with messages on a server folder click in the Synchronize column to the right of the folder name to select Yes When you have finished entering or verifying advanced settings click OK 4 Done 324 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting up an account on your handheld Mac users must set up their VersaMail accounts on their handheld Windows users can set up the account either on their handheld or on their computer If you set up an account on your computer and synchronize the account information to your handheld you do not need to set up the account on the handheld it s already there Ry NOTE Special setup
392. p a connection to a Bluetooth network 1 2 Tap Bluetooth controls on the status bar Open the PC Setup wizard Select Prefs feb b Select Setup Devices 9 Select LAN Setup d Select Next Select a LAN and select OK The Discovery icon Qo appears to indicate that the discovery process is active If the LAN did not show up on the discovery results select Find More to search again Ny Continued Setup Devices i Messaging Dial from Contacts Internet connectivity Ge PC Setup Browse the Web Check Email HotSync wirelessly k LAN Setup Browse the Web check Email Discovery Results i Show v Nearby devices Select a LAN a Palm a BlueGate AP B T616 Da a Unnamed Network Access Point i a Pico 2 BRAD a Pico 3 297 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections 4 Create a trusted connection Bluetooth Security Enter passkey for a Select Yes to add the LAN as Pico a trusted device b Select Next c Enter the passkey number for the LAN and select OK 5 Enter the username and LAN Setup password for the LAN and E ter the cernameoid select Next password for your LAN Username bh Password Service Name 6 Select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 298 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections When your handheld and Bluetooth application are on and the Discoverable setting is set to No you can receive connections
393. pplications and using menus e Finding information e Synchronizing your handheld with your computer e Installing additional software from the CD e Beaming information and applications to other Palm Powered handhelds e Sending information and applications to other Bluetooth handhelds by using Bluetooth technology on your handheld Viewing the current date and time e Setting the current date and time e Adjusting the brightness of the display e Caring for your handheld e Resetting your handheld Answers to frequently asked questions about your handheld 33 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Opening applications Using the 5 way navigator Using menus Finding information Related topics Palm T X Handheld Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you figured out that the numbered streets run north south and the avenues run east west Learning to move around on your handheld is similar Most Palm OS applications use the same set of application controls So once you learn how to use these standard controls you ll be driving all over town and you won t even need a map Benefits e Find and open applications quickly e Access extra features with menus e Move around in applications with one hand using the 5 way navigator e Locate information in any application with the Find feature 34 CHAPTER 3 Moving Around in Applications Tip Opening applications Press Home o
394. provider uses to receive email messages Most providers use the 1 Post Office Protocol POP a few use the Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP 2 Open VersaMail account setup Select your username from the drop down list at the top of the screen and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account Click Next 3 Select the option to synchronize with a mail service from this list and then select Other Click Next 4 Select the protocol for this account Check with your system administrator if you do not know which protocol is used Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 317 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Your incoming mail server is also called your POP or IMAP server your outgoing mail server is also called your SMTP server Palm T X Handheld 5 Enter the basic account information a Enter a descriptive name for the account b Enter your account username and password c Enter your email address for this account d Click Next Enter the names of the incoming and outgoing mail servers for this account whether the account requires Extended Simple Mail Transfer Protocol ESMTP and if so the username and password required for ESMTP Check with your email service provider for this information amp OPTIONAL Do one of the following e To enter advanced settings for this account click Advanced Settings e To test the account settings you have entered click Test
395. ption protocol for 307 entering 326 399 570 573 forgetting 497 locking device with 498 558 losing 498 network connections and 298 omitting 570 security options for 489 troubleshooting 625 validating 333 Paste command 69 Paste icon 43 pasting information 69 485 patches 124 PCs See personal computers PDB files 75 76 PDF files 24 Peer to Peer ad hoc setting 281 pen 257 Pen selector 256 pen widths 256 percentage button Calculator 484 performance 31 596 period character 552 peripheral devices See external devices personal computers preinstalled software for 23 synchronizing handheld with 74 personal information 445 492 personalizing contact information 135 phone 300 562 566 See also conference calls mobile phones phone numbers phone connections 290 294 phone drivers 562 Phone Link Updater application 290 Phone Lookup 66 138 phone number fields 134 phone numbers adding speed dial entries for 456 dialing 453 455 457 dialing from email message 365 entering 453 455 457 573 getting from contacts 66 134 138 organizing emergency 512 redialing 454 temporary storage for 255 658 phone numbers sharing 21 phone settings service profiles 570 Phone Setup dialog box 290 photo albums arranging photos in 203 205 creating 201 moving photos in 203 moving photos to other 204 scrolling through 199 Photo Details screen 199 photos adding notes to 199 adding to albums 202 adding to contacts 131 ad
396. r ERG ON on oor Double click the CD icon and then double click palmDesktop pkg handhelds 4 Done During installation you re asked to connect your computer to your handheld if it is not already connected See next page Palm T X Handheld 7 CHAPTER 1 If the Select User dialog box appears during synchronization select the username of the handheld you want to synchronize and click OK Third party application A software program that runs on a Palm Powered device but is not created or supported by Palm Inc If you have problems with your new handheld after you synchronize you may need to update your third party applications Palm T X Handheld Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer Synchronizing your handheld and your computer During installation you connect your handheld to your computer if it is not already connected and you synchronize for the first time Synchronizing simply means that any information you enter in one place your handheld or computer is automatically updated in the other IMPORTANT Be sure to synchronize the info in your handheld s program memory at least once a day so that you always have an up to date backup copy of this info on your computer 1 amp OPTIONAL Connect your handheld to your computer a Plug the USB sync cable into a USB port on the back of your computer b Plug the cable into your handheld NV Continued CHAPTE
397. r a Turn on your computer must support TCP IP b Click the HotSync manager icon G in the taskbar in the lower right corner e You must have a of your screen and then select Network remote access account Check with your system c Click the HotSync manager icon again and then select Setup administrator for assistance Y Continued To synchronize by dialing in to a network you must also have a mobile phone sold separately that you can use as a modem to dial in to the network or an attachable modem accessory sold separately Palm T X Handheld 95 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer iip Click TCP IP Settings to display the primary settings for your computer Check that Sep eg these settings arg correct acre A on your handheld by i selecting the HotSync icon on the Applications View and then selecting Primary PC Setup from Cont d d Click the Network tab and make sure your username has a checkmark next to it If the checkmark is not there check the box next to your username oper NOTE This option is not available to users with handhelds running Palm OS Cobalt Wayne Hoff the Options menu If the settings do not match x oa aw to restart your computer and synchronize your e Click OK handheld with your computer using the cable or IR port before Synchronize your handheld with your computer using a cable or IR port s
398. r album where the photo or video is located a Select Handheld mj or Expansion Card A b Select the Location pick list in the upper right corner and select the location of the photo or video you want to view 3 Select the photo or video whose details you want to view Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 198 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer palace the soroll aimowsat 4 View photo or video details the bottom of the Media p f Media Details i i i Name Details a aN a Open the menus Date 3 16 05 4 14pm other photos in the Size 109K 488x488 album b Select Edit Details from the Album Photos amp Videos Media menu c In addition to viewing photo or video details you can do the following Change name Select the photo or video name and enter a new name Move to different album Select the Album pick list and select a new album location for the photo or video Add notes Select the Notes field and enter a note for the photo or video Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 199 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer EXIF Exchangeable Image File Format is a standard for storing interchange information in image files Most digital cameras use the EXIF format Palm T X Handheld 5 amp OPTIONAL If the photo was taken from a digital camera that uses the EXIF format you can view the EXIF information about the photo a Select EXIF b Select Done when finished viewing the EXIF det
399. r child s soccer 1 schedule and then send the entire category to a Open an application your spouse s handheld Select the category you want to send b From the list view select the pick list in the upper right corner and select the category you want This takes you to the list view within the selected When you send a category category the individual entries within the 2 category contacts memos photos and so Send the category on appear as unfiled a Open the menus items on the receiving handheld b Select the Send Category menu item in the leftmost menu c Select Bluetooth and then select OK 3 Select the receiving handheld on the Discovery Results screen and then select OK 4 Done The information is sent to the receiving handheld Palm T X Handheld 463 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information Select the Send From pick list to send an application from an expansion card inserted into the expansion slot Palm T X Handheld Sending an application using Bluetooth technology 1 y Done Select the application you want to send a Go to Applications b Open the menus c Select Send on the App menu d Select the application you want to send Send From v Device Memos 60K Note Pad 144K Palm PIMs Support 5K Pics amp Videos amp 459K Prefs Ry NOTE You cannot send an application that has a lock icon next to the application size Send the
400. r example to change the maximum message size 1 During account setup on your computer click Advanced Settings on the Enter Account Settings screen Click the General tab and verify or edit any of the following settings Synchronize Local Notes Lotus Notes accounts only Check the box to synchronize email on your handheld with email in the local copy of Notes on your computer You are prompted to enter your Lotus Notes ID and password Click Browse if you need to locate your Notes ID Enable HotSync synchronization By default this box is checked meaning you can both send and receive email wirelessly and transfer messages to your handheld from your computer when you synchronize If VersaMail TM Advanced Settings g Advanced Settings Other General Incoming Mail Outgoing Mail m Account Information Account Name fhe Last Syne Unknown Desktop Connection Direct POP connection to server I Synchronize Local Notes IV Enable HotSync synchronization m Standard Synchronization Options F Unread Messages Only Download Attachments Mail from the last Dais Max Message Size 200 KB Format of Incoming Messages HTML x I Synchronize Outbox Folder I Synchronize Inbox Folder you uncheck the box you can send and receive email wirelessly only Y Continued 320 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Did You Know The P
401. r handheld with your computer If your handheld does not synchronize with your computer go to step 8 On your handheld set the Modem Sync Preferences ModemSync preference a Open the menus OGrB Cl b Select ModemSync Prefs on the Options menu and then Network select Network c Select OK Set the LANSync preferences LANSync Preferences a Open the menus b Select LANSync Prefs on the 9 a Options menu and then select LANSync LANSync c Select OK CO a Y Continued 87 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 1 O Tap the HotSync icon on your handheld to synchronize your handheld with your computer If you still can t synchronize your handheld with your computer contact your Wi Fi system administrator for assistance You can also check the support website at www palm com support 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 88 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Before You Begin Setting up a connection for Bluetooth synchronization Your computer must WINDOWS ONLY have the following e A Bluetooth antenna and software must be 1 Tap Bluetooth controls B on the status bar installed on your computer e HotSync manager must 2 Open the PC Setup wizard be active On a Windows computer you know a Select Prefs HotSync manager is active when its icon b Select Setup Devices appears in the lower right corner of your screen c Select PC
402. r text numbers information entered in an or symbols on your handheld application such as a contact in Contacts or an appointment in Calendar 1 Open an entry You ean enter text a Open an application whenever you see a blinking cursor on the screen b Select an entry or tap New 2 If the input area is hidden select Input on the status bar to open it Tap abc or 123 to open the alphabetic or numeric keyboard respectively Y Continued Tap to open keyboards Palm T X Handheld 64 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Tip If you have a lot of 4 information to enter a portable wireless keyboard accessory makes data entry fast and easy amp OPTIONAL Select from among four separate keyboards Caps shift Tap here to display lowercase keyboard ABC uppercase int international Tap here to display Tap here to display Tap here to display uppercase keyboard numeric keyboard international keyboard 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 65 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Entering info from Contacts into another application Having lunch with someone whose info you have in Contacts Use Phone Lookup to quickly enter the person s name and primary contact info into the appointment you create in Calendar This feature is available in Calendar Memos Tasks and Expense 1 Open an entry a Open an application b Select an entry or select New In Expen
403. r with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Palm T X Handheld Related Topics Click the link below to learn about these related topics Moving Around Categories Privacy Sharing Bluetooth Wi Fi VersaMail e Opening applications e Using menus Organizing messages by arranging them into categories and sorting them Keeping messages private by turning on security options e Exchanging messages with other Palm handheld users by beaming them e Sending messages to other Bluetooth handhelds by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Setting up a phone connection using the Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Setting up a network connection using Wi Fi wireless technology on your handheld Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly 419 Browsing the Web You use the web for so many things checking email finding driving directions getting news buying gifts Now you can take the web with you Accessing a web page Quickly jumping to a page Changing how you view a almost anywhere you go Use your aoe handheld to make a Wi Fi or Bookmarking your favorite Bluetooth wireless Internet pages connection through a network Downloading files and pages computer or even your mobile phone Sending email by means of and the web browser opens the entire an Internet email account web to you Changing your home and start pages
404. r you want 4 Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 359 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Creating and editing a mail folder The VersaMail application has certain preset folders such as Inbox Outbox Sent Drafts and Trash You can create new folders so that you can store email messages by subject person or project 1 In the Inbox or on another folder screen select the folder pick list in the upper right corner and then select Edit Folders 2 Do one of the following Edit Folders il Create a new folder Select New and then enter the new folder name Rename a folder Select the folder name from the list on the screen select Rename and then enter the new folder name Delete a folder Select the folder name from the list on the screen and then select Delete N NOTE For IMAP accounts only check the box if you want the change create rename or delete to take place on the server as well as on your handheld 3 Select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 360 CHAPTER 16 You can forward email messages from any folder other than the Outbox folder Forwarded messages are always sent as text only even if you received the Original message in HTML format Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Working with email messages When you receive an email message you can reply to it or forward it to someone else You can also open web addresses URLs within me
405. rPoint computer so that you can work on files on your handheld them in the most convenient location e Improve productivity by taking any time important docs spreadsheets and presentations with you 186 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager Tip Creating and managing Office files For complete information onthe Documents To Go The Documents application provides powerful editing and file management features for Office files on your handheld What s more Documents makes it easy for you to share files between application click the your computer and your handheld application icon on your computer and then click Help or go to www dataviz com The Documents application has a companion application on your computer called Documents To Go Use Documents To Go to transfer files to your handheld when you synchronize Here are some of the capabilities of Documents Ry NOTE The Documents application does not support some editing functionality such as multiple font sizes and spell check e View Word Excel and PowerPoint files DOC XLS or PPT e Create or edit a Word compatible document or Excel compatible spreadsheet on your handheld and then save it in the native DOC or XLS format e Create a PowerPoint presentation on your computer use the Documents To Go desktop application to convert it to a format that is optimized for viewing on your handheld and then synchronize to transfer the file to your handheld View or ed
406. rd with your thumb until you hear the card from the slot confirmation tone 2 Slide the card out of the expansion slot 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 587 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Inserting an expansion card 1 Insert the card into the expansion slot with the label side facing the front of the handheld 2 Push the card in with your thumb until you feel the card click in place and hear the confirmation tone N NOTE No confirmation tone Check the Sounds amp Alerts Preferences to make sure the System Sound setting is turned on 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 588 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Opening an application on an expansion card You can install applications and other files to an expansion card during synchronization When you insert an expansion card into the expansion slot your handheld adds the expansion card to the category list in the upper right corner of Applications View You can easily switch between applications installed on your handheld and on the expansion card Ry NOTE Some applications may not run correctly when you install them on an expansion card P Try installing these applications on your handheld instead If you still have problems contact When the highlight on the developer Applications View is not active you can press and hold the Select button to 1 open the category pick Insert the expansion card and i H Cat list expansion card screen disp
407. re already familiar with Graffiti writing from an older Palm Powered handheld Graffiti 2 write them writing will be easy to master Characters are entered in exactly the same way except for i t k and the number 4 These letters are now made with two strokes just the way you would write Tip them if you were using a pen and paper Your handheld has tables displaying all of the Graffiti 2 characters short cuts and commands Customize your handheld so you can display these tables by drawing a line from the bottom of the screen to the top Also you no longer have to use the Punctuation Shift stroke for common punctuation like periods and commas or for Just write these characters on the correct side of the input area and your handheld immediately recognizes them Palm T X Handheld 53 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 alphabet You can select alternate ways to write some Graffiti 2 characters Choose the method that s most natural for you Write lowercase letters on LEFT side and capital letters across MIDDLE of input area Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke Letter Stroke A A B g C C D p lt c ofz lt lt 9c ys is lt J NE lt ESEZ N O e BEC Fn Fo U lt x m a ir e Palm T X Handheld 54 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 numbers Write numbers on RIGHT side of input area Number Stroke Number Stroke 0 1 2 3 NS FON
408. re returned to the application you were in when you opened the Wi Fi controls network you can synchronize wirelessly with your computer 4 Done You can now connect to the network any time you are within range of an access point Palm T X Handheld 264 CHAPTER 14 Before You Begin You need to perform the following e You must set up a Wi Fi network connection e You must set up an email account on your handheld before you can send or receive email messages If the Wi Fi application is already on you can change to another network by tapping the Wi Fi controls on the status bar and then selecting Scan Your handheld scans for available networks Select the network you want to from the available networks list Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections Accessing email and the web with Wi Fi technology After you set up a connection with a Wi Fi network you can send and receive email or browse the web wirelessly using this connection NOTE Wi Fi functionality must be on before you can use it to make wireless connections Open the email application or the web browser 2 Tap Wi Fi controls on the status bar Make sure that Wi Fi is set to On Wi Fi Network v NETGEAR GAD Not connected Scan Setup 4 Connect to the Wi Fi network a Select the Network pick list and then select the network you want b Select Connect When the connection is complet
409. read email select the email message in the Inbox or the folder where the message is located navigator to select and open a message press Speakeas 5 5 Les Newman 5 36a Center after reading the revised instructions for creatin Select to read message to close it and o 88 Travis Washington 5 30a return to the folder where these are funny M Angela Yee 5 28a you started review comments M Travis Washington 5 24a Tin cool site Hip M monica_lewis 3 33a Highlight a message and ALC Account Form Reminder press Right on the 5 way to open a menu of message commands such as Forward Reply and If you chose to get messages by subjects only select the More button on the message screen to view the body of the email message plus any attachments up to the maximum message size you select If the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size Delete oe only a partial message is displayed Select the More button to view the entire message Ip If you chose to get entire messages the body of the message is displayed However if the Change the font size of a downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size only part of the message is message you are reading displayed Select the More button to view the entire message by opening the Options menu and selecting Use smaller font or Use jai kei pea standard font Subj review comments for your approval Tip Use landscape mode to There are now thr
410. rences A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if you log in to the corporate servers from your handheld using a phone modem or network connection The script is generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need it It automates the events that must take place to establish a connection between your handheld and the corporate servers You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the Login Script dialog box Some commands such as Send require you to supply additional information If the command requires additional info a field appears to the right of the command where you can enter the info 1 Open Network Preferences v Service a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Network User Name usernames Password Connection v IR to Nokia 6310i Phone e Y Continued 576 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld 2 Open the Login Script dialog box a Select the Service pick list and select the service you want to add a script to b Select Details c Select Script Details Log in Script i Connection type PPP Idle timeout 1 Minute Query DNS icf IP Address QM Automatic 3 Select the End pick list and select one of the following commands from the list Wait For Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the server before executing the next command Wai
411. rier or from your corporate email account For each email account you want to access you must set up an account in the VersaMail application For example if you have a personal account and a corporate account set up one account for each in each VersaMail Did You Know The VersaMail application provides strong 128 bit application AES encryption for your password After you set up an account you can send and receive email directly to and from your handheld wirelessly Or you can download new messages from your computer to your handheld and Tip upload messages from your handheld to be sent from your computer s email program when you Go to your email synchronize provider s website or i c ntaet their ustomer IMPORTANT You must have an account with an email provider or a corporate account The VersaMail application works with these accounts to transfer messages to and from your support to obtain the eaten ee i handheld The application is not an email service provider setup information you need Using an email provider If you are setting up a new email account and have a well known email provider ISP or wireless carrier such as Earthlink or Yahoo many of the settings you need during account setup are automatically filled in For other ISPs you need the following information e Your email address and password e The protocol used for incoming mail such as Post Office Protocol POP or Intern
412. rites and select Web amp from downloading select Cancel in the Download dialog box Go to the web page you want to view 3 Select the link of the file you want to download Select a download option Application name Downloads the file to an application For example if you are downloading a Word document the file downloads into Documents To Go Card Ifyou have an expansion card installed the file downloads onto the card 5 Select Yes 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 433 CHAPTER 18 Browsing the Web 1 You Kn Saving a web page Saved pages are listed If you want to save a web page such as atravel itinerary or Internet order receipt indefinitely with the bookmarks in the you can create a saved page The copy is stored on the handheld until you delete it Bookmark List The saved pages have an orange corner Go to Favorites and select Web amp The web browser also functions as a viewer 2 enabling you to quickly view certain files while working in other applications For 3 example if you read an Go to the web page you want to save Go to the Save Page dialog box email message that has a Open the menus a file attached in HTML format select the file and b Select Page and then select Save Page the web browser opens so that you can view the file 4 Save the web page New Saved Page Bookmark i Save this page for offline viewing a Change the page name or Size 209 3K Saving a web page on
413. rk or registered trademark of DataViz Inc MPEG Layer 3 audio decoding technology is licensed from Faunhofer IIS and Thomson Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability Palm Inc assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this guide Palm Inc assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the use of this software Palm Inc assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction dead battery or repairs Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss IMPORTANT Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the accompanying software program s Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the End User Software License Agreement Software Download Available Palm Desktop software is supplied on a CD If you do not have access to a CD drive for your computer you can download Palm Desktop software from www palm com support Table of Contents Palm T X Handheld About This Guide ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeenees XX Tips for Viewing this guide e cece cece eee e ee eeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaeeaeees XX What stn this guide sicciiiicicediieiancccstisceechtivaneteddvdanmesieiavandedtendanvdeeeveanves xxi Step by step INStrUCTIONS e ee ceeeeeceseeenee
414. rmat such as JPG BMP TIFF expansion card and then uncompressed and GIF to your handheld the photo is saved on your handheld in its original view them by inserting format If you copy a photo in a different format it is saved on your handheld in JPG format the card into your handheld s expansion card slot On a Mac computer all photos you copy using the Send To Handheld droplet icon are saved on your handheld in JPG format When you copy a video from your Windows or Mac computer the video is converted to a format your handheld can play and is optimized for viewing on the handheld Note however that there are numerous video formats and not all types can be converted to a format that s viewable on your handheld To test a video on your Windows computer try to open and view the video in the desktop Media application if you can t view the video on your computer you won t be able to view the video on your handheld Palm T X Handheld 191 CHAPTER 9 Your Photo and Video Organizer Select Slide Show to display all photos and videos in an album automatically one after another Tap a photo or video to stop the slide show Palm T X Handheld Viewing a photo or video 1 2 Tap Media in the input area Go to the album where the photo or video is located a Select either Handheld mj or Expansion card Ry NOTE The Handheld and Expansion card icons appear only if an expansion card is inserted into your
415. rmation from the i F desktop component of You can use your handheld s built in Bluetooth technology to send information directly to another handheld that includes Bluetooth technology You must be within range of the receiving handheld to send information using Bluetooth technology The maximum range is approximately 25 30 feet 8 10 meters however the shorter the range the more quickly and accurately you can send information many applications For example you can send photos from the Media desktop application See the online desktop help for information If you are unable to send information to another handheld try moving closer to the receiving handheld Palm T X Handheld 461 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information In most applications the 1 leftmost menu is named Record Select the information you want to send a Open an application b Select the entry you want 2 Select a sending method Send With Bluetooth a Open the menus SMS VersaMail b Select the Send menu item in the leftmost menu In most applications the leftmost menu is named Record c Select Bluetooth and then select OK 3 Select the receiving handheld on the Discovery Results screen and then select OK 4 Done The information is sent to the receiving handheld Palm T X Handheld 462 CHAPTER 20 Sharing Information Sending a category using Bluetooth technology Create a category of Calendar events such as you
416. roblems install the third party applications one application at a time using the following procedure a Open the Backup folder you moved to the desktop in step 2 Palm T X Handheld 629 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions b Double click a PRC file On a Windows computer the Quick Install window opens with the PRC file listed On a Mac computer the HotSync manager window opens with the PRC file listed NOTE Alternatively on a Mac computer you can drag the PRC file to the Send To Handheld droplet instead of double clicking it c Click Done d Synchronize your handheld with your computer e Operate your handheld and try to replicate problem operations f Do one of the following e If installing the application re creates your problem remove the application and contact the application developer for a solution Continue to reinstall your applications one application at a time to make sure another application is not creating a problem e If installing the application does not cause a problem go to step a and reinstall another application g Go to www Palm com us support contact incompatible_apps html to provide feedback to Palm on the application Ry NOTE Some applications use more than one PRC file You should continue to check each PRC file even if you identify one associated with an application that is causing a problem on your handheld since that application may use other PRC files Palm T X Handheld 630 Getting H
417. rom that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The use of shielded I O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices Failure to do so may violate FCC rules 1 IMPORTANT Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the manufacturer s Regulatory Engineering Department Changes or modifications made without written approval may void the user s authority to operate this equipment In August 1996 the FCC of the United States with its action in Report and Order FCC 96 326 adopted an updated safety standard for human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy emitted by FCC regulated transmitters Those guidelines are consistent with the safety standard previously set by both U S and international standards bodies The design of this product complies with the FCC guidelines and these international standards 633 Exposure to radio frequency energy SAR In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines this device and its antenna must not be co located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter The user of this device should ensure that the operation of this device is in compliance with these provisions Radio transmitting devices radiate Radio Frequency RF energy during its operation RF energy can be absorbed into the human body and potenti
418. roximately 25 to 30 feet eight to ten meters Palm T X Handheld 627 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Other Bluetooth handhelds cannot find my handheld e Tap Bluetooth controls E on the status bar to open the Bluetooth settings screen and make sure that Bluetooth is turned on e Select Prefs and make sure the Discoverable setting is set to Yes Problems with incompatible applications Palm Inc works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your handheld Possible symptoms of incompatible applications include e Fatal errors needing resets e Nonresponsive handheld requiring a reset e Slow performance e Abnormal screen display or uneven sound quality e Problems using Bluetooth technology or other features e Problems opening an application e Problems synchronizing You can determine whether an incompatible application is causing problems by deleting the application and then operating your handheld After you have deleted the application try to replicate the operation that created the error If removing the application solves your problem contact the application developer for a solution Also go to www Palm com us support contact incompatible apps html to provide feedback to Palm on the application Palm T X Handheld 628 CHAPTER 29 Common Questi
419. rtCut c Select ShortCuts ts Time Stamp lip The ShortCut Text can be 45 characters long That s long enough for a name whose spelling you always forget or a 2 Create a ShortCut ShortCutEntry complex email address ShortCut Name a Select New Your ShortCuts are b On the ShortCut Name line backed up on your enter the abbreviation computer when you c On the ShortCut Text line s enter synchronize the text you want to insert when you write the abbreviation d Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 554 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Changing a ShortCut To delete a ShortCut After you create a ShortCut you can modify it at any time open ShortCuts Preferences and select the ShortCut Select Delete select Yes and 1 then select Done Open ShortCuts Preferences a Go to Applications dts Date and Time Stamp b Select Prefs 8 ibe pnb me Meeting ts Time Stamp c Select Shortcuts 2 Edit the ShortCut a Select the ShortCut you want to change b Select Edit c Make your changes d Select OK and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 555 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Touchscreen Another name for your handheld s screen and the internal circuitry that enables it to respond appropriately to taps If your screen is not responding to taps use the 5 way navigator to open Touchscreen Preferences Cali
420. s c Select Record and then select Duplicate Contact 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 137 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts Tip Locating a contact on your list You can also press Right on the 5 way navigator or select the Quick Look 1 Up icon at the top of the screen to open the Quick Look Up line Press Up and Down to select the 2 letter of the name you Press Contacts 2 Search for the contact want in each box and a Select the Look Up line at the Contacts press Right to move to bottom of the screen and Lina se 302 555 9512M alita J T jtm jtm com the next box enter the first letter of the name you want to find Nguyen Mai 555 3434W Nosuch Don donn example com ic u K Sanagala Srivinas 954 555 1234H b Enter the second letter of the ier 831 555 7534M The Phone Lookup i 650 555 9278 W feature lets you add name and so on until you tactini can easily scroll to the contact i 555 234 1939 W contact information you want raja anyisp com directly into certain other applications on your handheld For example you can add a name and phone number to a 3 memo or task Select the contact to open it 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 138 CHAPTER 6 Managing Your Contacts i You never know when you re going to need to look up an old business associate If you save an archive copy of your deleted contacts you can refer to them later by importing them Palm T X Handheld Del
421. s Select Details and then select the number of parts from the Warn over pick list You can create a signature that you use to sign your messages by opening the Options menu and selecting Preferences Enter a signature on the lines You can add your signature to your message by opening the Options menu and selecting Add Signature Palm T X Handheld 3 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Enter the recipient s address using one of the following methods Select To Select the recipient s name on the Mobile Number Lookup list and then select Add Enter directly Enter the recipient s mobile phone number on the To line Number of characters New Message SOT Length 20 In the area below the To line enter the text of your message amp OPTIONAL You can store your message in your Draft category and work on it later a Open the menus b Select Draft on the Message menu Y Continued 412 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages 6 Send your message Select Send Sends the current message now Selecting Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox Select Outbox Sends your message to the Outbox to be sent later 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 413 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages If you want to check your messages but you don t want to send the messages stored in your Outbox open the Messages menu and select Check Yo
422. s and install applications on your handheld when you synchronize When you transfer a file to your handheld through synchronization the file such as a video may be converted for best use on optimized for your handheld Palm T X Handheld 75 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer When would I use each method The method you use to move info onto your handheld depends on the type of info it is Here are the methods to use with the most common information types Information in Contacts Calendar Tasks Memos Note Pad Windows only Expense VersaMail Use Palm Desktop or Outlook Windows to enter information on your computer Synchronize to transfer the new or updated information on your computer to your handheld Applications PRC or PDB file Use Quick Install from within Palm Desktop Windows or drag the application to the Send To Handheld droplet icon on your desktop Mac and then synchronize to install the application on your handheld Palm T X Handheld 76 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Did You Know When you transfer photos and videos using the desktop Media application the files may be converted for viewing on your handheld Word documents Excel spreadsheets PowerPoint presentations Use the Documents To Go application on your computer or the Documents application in Palm Desktop software Windows only Synchronize to transfer the files
423. s and then select the hour the minute and AM or PM to enter the time for the first and last Auto Sync to take place Select OK Days Select the days you want the schedule to be active You can choose any number of days but you can set up only one schedule for each email account 3 Select OK Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 337 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages You can also adjust the 4 amp OPTIONAL Select Get or Get amp Send volume of the alert sound 4 Done Auto Sync notifications The Auto Sync feature provides two types of notifications during and after it gets messages Alerts You can choose to have your handheld alert you with a beep or other sound when a new message arrives in your account Reminders screen If Auto Sync discovers and downloads new messages for an email account a notification appears on the Reminders screen telling you the account name and the number of new messages If Auto Sync is scheduled for more than one account a separate notification appears for each account Palm T X Handheld 338 CHAPTER 16 Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting alert options You can choose an alert such as a bird a phone or an alarm to let you know when new email arrives 1 Open the Alerts screen a From the Inbox or another folder open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences c Select Auto Sync and then selec
424. s modems 387 567 input area 19 48 icon on status bar 30 inserting expansion cards 21 588 installation CD 2 120 604 installation prerequisites 122 installing additional software 73 120 applications 23 73 111 589 HotSync manager 75 78 Palm Desktop software 3 7 related topics for 17 instant messenger IM accounts 134 instant messenger IM field 134 Internet See also websites 653 accessing 287 Bluetooth 294 connecting to 265 287 570 email accounts and 436 selecting service provider for 296 Internet Explorer 2 See also web browsers Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP 317 326 Internet protocol IP 574 Internet Service Provider 326 Internet Service Providers ISPs 287 307 569 invalidating warranty 606 IP Address check box 574 IP addresses 274 282 574 IR devices 80 IR port See also beaming beaming from 465 466 467 connecting to networks from 99 creating connections for 562 disabling 83 location of 21 setting up connections for 566 synchronizing from 75 80 82 100 IR to a PC Handheld connection 562 563 IR enabled laptop 80 ISPs 287 307 569 iTunes application transferring songs 220 J JavaScript 450 JPG files 191 435 T X Handheld K key exchange 300 key index 273 Key Type pick list 272 280 keyboard entering information from 64 onscreen types 65 keyboards connecting to portable 250 Keylock 21 559 560 Keylock Preferences screen 559 L LAN Setup option 297 landscape
425. s pencils paper clips or other sharp objects e Use only the supplied AC charger to charge your handheld e Keep the battery charged e Keep the screen free of dust or anything else that could make it dirty For general cleaning use a soft damp cloth If the screen becomes dirty use a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window cleaning solution Use only 3 5mm stereo headphones sold separately in your handheld s headphone jack e Be sure to get rid of any static electricity buildup before you connect your handheld to any cable or accessory e Synchronize often to maintain a backup copy of your important information on your computer Don ts IMPORTANT Do not open your handheld for any reason There are no user serviceable parts inside e Do not drop bang or otherwise cause a strong impact to your handheld e Do not carry your handheld in your back pocket you might sit on it by mistake e Do not let your handheld get wet don t leave it in a damp location Palm T X Handheld 31 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld Tip e Do not expose your handheld to very hot or cold temperatures including placing it near Se cana to charge your a heater leaving it in the trunk of a car or setting it by a window in direct sunlight handheld for a full three hours if it does not turn on when you press the power button Conserving battery power If you see an alert on the screen warning you that the battery is
426. s by exchanging cards or beaming items between handhelds Click a link below to learn about these related topics e Sending applications and information to other Bluetooth handhelds by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Managing Adding applications from your computer to an expansion card and Info installing other files such as photos videos or music Palm T X Handheld 595 Maintaining Your Handheld Palm T X Handheld Your handheld is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide you with years of trouble free service Taking care of your handheld helps keep it working properly and ensures that it s available when you need it Handheld do s and don ts To protect your handheld from damage and ensure reliable performance follow these guidelines Handheld do s e Be sure to get rid of any static electricity buildup before you connect your handheld to any cable or accessory Use only the stylus to tap the screen no pens pencils paper clips or other sharp objects Use only the supplied AC charger to charge your handheld Keep the battery charged e Keep the screen free of dust or anything else that could make it dirty For general cleaning use a soft damp cloth If the screen becomes dirty use a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window cleaning solution Use only 3 5mm stereo headphones in your handheld s headphone jack 596 CHAPTER 28 Maintaining Your Handheld
427. s dialog box Calendar Select an event select Details select the Category pick list and then select Edit Categories All other applications Select the pick list in the upper right corner and then select Edit Categories Delete the category a Select the name of the category you want to delete b Select Delete c Select Yes d Select OK 4 Done 514 CHAPTER 24 Using Categories to Organize Information Placing information in a category You can place individual entries into categories within an application For example you may want to place some of your contacts in a category called Medical You can also enter new information into a category by opening the application and then selecting the category from the upper right corner Select New and enter the information Palm T X Handheld You may also find it convenient to view applications in groups You may want all of your games in one category and all of your multimedia applications in another Then you can go right to the group of applications you need N NOTE An entry or application cannot be placed in more than one category Placing an entry in a category 1 2 Open an application that contains a category option In Calendar go to Day View Open an entry In Note Pad only skip to step 5 Open the Details dialog box Contacts Select Edit and then select Details All other applications Select Details Y Continued 515
428. s icon 26 preinstalled applications 23 124 preset connections 562 564 preset delays 500 preset formats 549 primary location 521 522 527 530 Primary PC Setup command 96 100 printers 265 printing expense reports 23 prioritizing tasks 234 245 privacy FAQs 625 privacy levels 491 privacy settings applications 45 calendar 166 information 489 notes 263 records 489 web pages 445 Private check box 490 profiles 11 16 projectors 265 Prompt command 578 prompts 577 protecting handheld 596 protecting information 488 490 498 586 protocol defined 317 326 Protocol pick list 326 659 proxy servers 448 449 Proxy Settings dialog box 449 punctuation marks 53 56 Punctuation Shift indicator 60 Punctuation Shift stroke 60 Purge Categories dialog box 479 Purge command 170 243 479 Purge dialog box 170 243 purging items 608 Q quarterly tasks 238 Query DNS check box 574 questions and answers 604 quick buttons not responding 21 559 opening applications from 23 reassigning 543 restoring defaults for 543 Quick Install icon 111 Quick Install software 27 73 111 616 Quick Look Up icon 138 Quick Look Up line 138 Quick Tour 6 51 R radio 22 25 range peripheral connections 288 Read pick list 356 reading email 345 text messages 414 416 RealPlayer application opening files for 590 reassigning quick buttons 543 T X Handheld Receipt Details dialog box 474 receiving email 295 334 receiving messages 211 28
429. s in your list of contacts Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your handheld s Wi Fi technology Using your handheld s Bluetooth wireless technology Answers to frequently asked questions about Wi Fi wireless technology 264 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections In this chapter What can do with the built in Bluetooth wireless technology Entering basic Bluetooth settings Setting up a Bluetooth phone connection Accessing email and the web with Bluetooth wireless technology Setting up a connection to a Bluetooth network Creating partnership with other devices Setting advanced Bluetooth features Related topics Palm T X Handheld Staying connected in the world means you have the latest wireless technology at your fingertips at all times Now your handheld can connect you to the wireless world using either Wi Fi or Bluetooth wireless technology Your handheld s built in Bluetooth functionality helps you easily set up wireless connections to a number of devices so you can enjoy the convenience of cable free connectivity With Bluetooth connections you can share contacts or your favorite photos with other people You choose who you share with by managing your wireless privacy through trusted connections to other devices and setting levels of visibility Benefits of your handheld s Bluetooth wireless technology e C
430. saMail and Calendar applications on your handheld to directly access corporate groupware information on a Microsoft Exchange 2003 server You can access business email and calendar info on the Exchange 2003 server from your handheld without using a desktop computer When you create a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account in the VersaMail application both the email and calendar info on your handheld synchronize directly with the Exchange server email and calendar info on your handheld does not synchronize with the desktop software application on your computer such as Microsoft Outlook or Palm Desktop software Other information on your handheld such as contacts tasks and memos continues to synchronize with your desktop software For most VersaMail features using a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account works the same as using any other type of account However certain features such as automatically retrieving and resending email messages and downloading attachments work differently for Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts Also the account setup procedure is slightly different for a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account And with a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account you can receive and reply to meeting invitations directly from within the VersaMail application What do I need to use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync To use Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync on your handheld you must obtain the following information from your system admi
431. scroll down to see if the event appears farther down the screen e If you have two or more events with the same start time the events appear as multiple bars starting at the same time in Week View To see the overlapping events select the individual bars or select Day View For more information see Finding events that overlap e If you marked the event as private check Security Preferences to see that Private Records is set to Show private records Time zones don t appear on my Palm Desktop software Palm Desktop software does not recognize time zones Only Outlook recognizes times zones set the global time zone preference but only some of my events are responding to my time zone change Only new events created after the preference is set are affected The events you created earlier without time zones do not have the time zone set You can edit the earlier events to include a time zone created my event with a time zone but only that event is responding to my time zone change When you create an event with a time zone setting only that event is affected To have all events automatically include a time zone setting set the New events include time zones preference Palm T X Handheld 618 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Memos l m having problems listing memos the way want to see them If you cannot manually arrange the order of memos on the list screen open the Options menu and select Preferences Make
432. se downloading large messages can consume handheld resources the VersaMail application displays the size and asks if you want to continue downloading any message that exceeds your maximum message size of 60KB or total message size with attachments of approximately 5MB You can download a maximum of 10 attachments for any received messages Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages For other types of files your handheld may contain a viewer that can open and view attachments for that file type You can open the attachment only if your handheld has such a viewer Among the file types that may be supported are MP3 and AAC files Working with a downloaded attachment In the message list a paper clip on a message s envelope icon indicates that the message has an attachment that was downloaded You can save view edit or install an attached file depending on the file type 1 In the Inbox select the message Speakeas BEE with the attachment Sil es NEWman 5 36a revised instructions for creatin Travis Washington 5 30a these are funny M Angela Yee 5 28a review comments Paper clip M Travis Washington 5 24a cool site M monica_lewis 3 33a ALC Account Form Reminder 2 amp OPTIONAL If you choose to get messages by subject only select More for each downloaded message to view the body of the email message plus any attachments up to the maximum message size N Continued 3
433. se only Select Details and then select Attendees 2 Add the contact from Phone Lookup a Tap where you want to enter the contact b Open the menus c Select Options and then select Phone Lookup Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 66 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld You can also enter the first few letters of the contact s name and the Cont d d Select the contact and then select Add open Phone Lookup The 415 555 9308M 909 555 9702 W first contact name 303 555 9820M matching the letters you 650 555 3970 W Baltes i 650 555 9984 H entered is highlighted Patri 415 555 9802 W 415 555 0233 H 650 555 3327 H Veddi Maria Venkat Raj 555 Westman Paul 650 555 6692 H Dec 23 03 KIBW OOGEC 3 amp OPTIONAL To add another contact repeat step 2 4 Done The name and phone number of the contact are automatically entered Palm T X Handheld 67 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Editing information Editing information on your handheld is similar to editing with word processing applications on your computer Select the information and then apply the correct command Selecting information There are several ways to select information that you want to edit or delete Selecting text Place the cursor before or after the text you want to select and drag the cursor over all the text you want to select Selecting a word Tap twice on a word to select it
434. sername password or server name for this type of account The next e Any events you create or change in Outlook on your computer that are on the Exchange server are synchronized to your handheld e Any meeting invitations are displayed in the Inbox of your Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync time you synchronize account in the VersaMail application When you respond to an invitation your handheld is your handheld with the synchronized with the server to transfer the response to the server and then the server is Exchange server all synchronized with your handheld to transfer the response to Calendar on your handheld events are downloaded to your handheld so rand eA Updating Calendar events when you delete a Microsoft Exchange duplicate events ActiveSync account You cannot choose to synchronize Calendar events with info in Palm Desktop software or Outlook once you set up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account If you want to stop synchronizing Calendar events with info on the server you must delete the Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync email account When you delete a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account all Calendar events are purged from your handheld Then when you synchronize Calendar with your desktop software application Palm Desktop or Outlook the events synchronize to your handheld so you don t end up with duplicate events Palm T X Handheld 408 CHAPTER 16 t r Jupp If you re having probl
435. set up either a new or existing account directly on the handheld NOTE Special setup considerations apply if you are setting up a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account to synchronize email and Calendar information with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 You can open VersaMail account setup on a Windows computer in one of two ways e During software CD installation select the option to set up your email software on the final installation screen e From the Start menu select Programs navigate to the Palm program group and then select VersaMail Setup IMPORTANT If you plan to synchronize your new handheld using an existing username from another handheld you must do so before you enter your email account information in VersaMail If you enter the email account information first and then synchronize your handheld with your computer using an existing username the email account information you entered is overwritten Palm T X Handheld 311 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Transferring settings from an existing account If you are transferring WINDOWS ONLY existing account settings your username and email address are already 1 entered based on the account settings that the VersaMail application finds on your computer Open VersaMail account setup Select your username from the drop down list at the top of the screen and then select the option to create a new VersaMail email account Click Next and t
436. sic from a CD to your handheld Windows only You must set up WMP to transfer If your songs are on a CD and you want to listen to them on your handheld you need to use MP3 files Windows Media Player on your computer to convert and transfer the files Ry NOTE Mac users can use iTunes included with OS X to transfer music from a CD to your computer and then use the Send To Handheld droplet to transfer the files to your handheld Music An interactive tutorial on i i files should be imported in MP3 format the software installation CD guides you through WINDOWS ONLY adding music Insert the CD go to the My Music section of the tutorial and then select Add 1 music from a CD Access the music CD from Windows Media Player on your computer a Open the Windows Media Player application b Insert the music CD into your computer s CD drive c Select the Rip tab Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 220 CHAPTER 10 Listening to Music 2 Rip the songs you want to add to your library a Select the titles you want to rip from the CD b Select Rip Music ee Rip Rip Music Find Album Info View Album Info Music M v Title Length Rip Status Artist Composer Genre Save titles ___ M1 Awakening 4 43 Electric Angel il Meniketti Lynne Reardon Midyne Spear Rock V 2 Light of Sound 5 27 Electric Angel Claudia Slayman Rack V 3 DrawingDown the Moon 5 20 Electric
437. sidandir aneda e a aAa 166 Deleting events casacaducsacczess cencteesbanzuxunanceddachces sednuacesageaagenseaeneasers sanduune state 168 Deleting a specifi EVENT iiss cccideeercccccsuestecteasesccecnceshesceahasenaeenceoennascee 168 Deleting all your Old events ccc cceccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeneneenneaaes 170 Checking your schedule si cients cccecceavssscesndestcetzesstsadeausesasesentnienst exenacearees ta 171 Viewing your appointments and tasks together cceeeees 171 Viewing your daily schedu le isinisi osodun inania 173 Viewing your weekly schedule sssssssssssssssssssssssssssssnnnnnnnesnssnnnnnnnnnnn 175 Viewing your monthly schedule ssasssssssssssssssssssssssssnnnnnnnesnsseennennnnnnn 176 Viewing a yearly calendar iss isszsccssscciccamasanadcsscesnccececsssaczanuessdentetes sseans 177 Finding events that overlap ssnsd 178 CUSTOMIZING VOUT calendar sitsit a a daai 178 Customizing display options for your calendar sesser 179 Setting alarm and time options ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeneeeeeesenaaes 182 Working with Calendar on your cComMputer ssssssssssssssssssssssesssrnnnnrnnensssss 184 Related tOpiCS ceritera R A eenstictat pracntarteaas 185 Chapter 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager 0 186 Creating and managing Office files ccccccseseeeeceeseeeeeeesseereeeessseeeeeess 187 Opening a file from Within DOCUMENTS ccccceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseen
438. sign and select the application that you want to assign to that button Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 543 Full screen penstroke A stroke that is drawn from the bottom of the input area to the top of the screen You can use this stroke as a quick way to do a selected task such as opening the Graffiti 2 Help screen If you have purchased an external modem accessory sold separately you can also assign the sync button on the modem by selecting the second pick list Palm T X Handheld 3 Assign the full screen pen stroke a Select More b Select the pick list and select the action you want to assign to the full screen pen stroke c Select OK Assign the sync button a Select HotSync b Select the pick list next to the icon labeled Cradle and select the application you want to assign to the button c Select OK Select Done 4 Done CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Select a feature you can access by dragging your stylus from the graffiti 2 writing area to the top of the screen A T Graffiti 2 Help in Pick list HotSync Buttons i Customize the HotSync Button on the cradle or optional handheld modem 65 wv HotSync Cradle 65 w HotSync 544 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld d You Kne Setting the date and time The location you select also appears as the You can set the date time and location for all the applications on your handheld that req
439. so email adding 376 downloading 372 374 Internet email accounts and 436 previewing with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 404 reading 375 434 sending files as 376 377 379 Attachments screen 376 378 Audible Player software 25 audio applications 21 T X Handheld audio files setting up Media Player for 214 transferring with Windows Media Player 217 authentication 299 333 Authentication option 324 329 authentication servers 579 Auto Empty check box 369 Auto Lock option 499 Auto Sync constraints for 341 retrying 341 scheduling 336 337 setting notification options for 338 Auto Disconnect option 386 autofill option 442 auto off delay 561 609 available storage space 591 B back panel controls 22 backgrounds adding photos as 180 533 537 customizing 180 533 537 selecting color of 257 541 backing up information 73 See also synchronizing archiving backup cards 594 basics 6 604 battery cautions for 637 charging 4 31 561 596 607 checking 303 606 conserving power for 5 32 559 606 extending life of 532 606 overview 5 recharging 4 5 32 561 606 battery gauge 606 BCC option 364 Beam Category command 467 Beam command 466 468 Beam Contact command 463 Beam dialog box 466 467 469 Beam From pick list 468 Beam icon 43 Beam Receive pick list 561 beaming 21 465 469 561 626 627 beeps 338 Birthday icon 173 birthdays 132 150 Blank Page setting web browser 439 blank screen 608 Blazer application See web
440. so open the handheld menus by tapping the application title in the upper left corner of the screen When the menus are open you can use the 5 way to select menus and menu items Palm T X Handheld Menus let you access additional features and settings They are easy to use and once you master them in one application you know how to use them in all your applications 1 2 Open an application Tap Menu EF on the status bar Application title VPP ioi gt Unfiled Menu Menu item li Record Edit Options Select an item from the leftmost menu or use the 5 way to highlight and select a different menu and then select a menu item 4 Done 42 CHAPTER 3 Command mode is active for just a few seconds so write the menu shortcut or tap an icon on the Command toolbar quickly Palm T X Handheld Moving Around in Applications Using the Command stroke Most menu items also have a menu shortcut which is similar to the keyboard shortcuts used on computers The menu shortcut appears to the right of the menu item To use a menu shortcut first write the Graffiti 2 Command stroke on the left side of the input area or the full screen and then write the shortcut letter For example to select Paste from the Edit menu write the Command stroke followed by the letter p You do not have to open a menu to use the Command stroke Command ZIJ Options stroke va Menu items R
441. ssages Forwarding an email message 1 2 On a folder screen select the folder pick list in the upperright corner and then select the folder that contains the message you want to forward Select the message you want to forward a Select the email message to open it b Select Fwd Forward 4 50 of 140 gt From Lis Hammel T Subj Interview schedule wv let me know if anyone is interested in attending Select Fwd amp OPTIONAL Add any desired text to the message beneath the subject line Address and send the message 4 Done 361 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Replying to an email message You can reply to an email message as you are reading it or you can reply to messages in the Replies are always sent as text only even if you received the original message in HTML format On the message screen you can also select Reply from the Options menu To reply to a message from the message list tap the envelope icon next to the message you want and then select Reply from the list Or open the Options menu and select Reply Palm T X Handheld message list 1 2 Select the message you want to reply to Create the reply a Select Reply b Select whether to reply to the sender only or to all message recipients listed in the menu c Enter a reply Select Send to send the reply now Outbox to send it later or Drafts to work on it lat
442. ssen n E 633 INGUStrY Ca ada sissies aa aani 635 Canadian Wireless Regulatory Notice ssssssssssssssssssssnessssesesnsnnnnnsnsssnerens 635 CE Declaration Of COntOrmity i ciccrcssdeccaisensicecncteiassckhasdavscscarecendecaxzeeaneecds 636 Battery Warning sccsstanactceeecads cxtevetangsanesscc aa saccexs anginbestects 637 Intrinsic Safety Warming ssccccsiissscccccssscecccedssseccecdsssentcedesseendeeesssancvedeseenes 638 Wireless Notices Usage Cautions o cecceeeeeseeceneeceeeeeeeeeeneeeenneaeeaeees 638 Static Electricity ESD and Your Palm Handheld ssssccceeseeseees 638 DON isc pi cca tae seanee ee eemn epee cepatsanpedestncaniahe aaatanacwts vate nennen 640 Palm T X Handheld xix About This Guide Palm T X Handheld This guide tells you everything you need to know to start using your handheld from the things you ll do every day to the things that make your handheld not only useful but fun Tips for viewing this guide Here are some helpful tips for making it easier to read and find information in this guide as you view it in Adobe Reader e To magnify the page click the magnifying glass E move the cursor which is now a magnifying glass over the page and click repeatedly Click Previous View 4 or oO depending on your version of Reader to return to the original view e Click an entry in the Table of Contents or Index to go directly to that section of the guide If you click a link and g
443. ssns 246 Related topis croinn eaa a aN Na 247 viii Palm T X Handheld Chapter 12 Writing Memo cccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 248 Creating a MEMO dreineer aaraa A 249 Viewing and editing MEMO sissisotaa iakoe 250 Moving a memo in your Memo list ssssessesssssssssssnnsrnensnsssresrsnnnnnnnnnneenne 251 Deleting a MEMO asisas sg aa a A aE ara 252 Working with Memos on your computer ssssesssssssssssrsrrrsssssesssrrnnnnnnnsnns 253 Related tODICS ssis miesti daaa 254 Chapter 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad 255 Creating aMote asegre e a a EE Ea 256 Choosing the pen and paper background colors ssccsceeeeeeees 257 Setting an alarn siserierssierdsisnsicsrerisnideser iket cedssvacsvhcessnedeaadsteace cade sends 258 Viewing and editing a MOTE cccssecctesssnscscuesensscogeecatseccquhecndsenasvenssesecetedsneccs 260 Deletingia MOLE arsane ienee EA 261 Working with Note Pad on your computer ssssssssssssssssssrssssrinnnrnssnsses 262 Related TOPICS ofsoen iniae ar EE EEEa EEE 263 Chapter 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections 264 What can do with the built in Wi Fi wireless technology s s s 265 What types of connections can make sssssssssssssrrnssssrnnssrennnssrennnnsennnn 265 When would I use Wi Fi or Bluetooth technology sessssssssssssesssrresssses 266 Wi Fi signal strength indicator 20 0 2 ccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeaeaaeeaeaeeens 268 Setting up a Wi Fi network connection
444. t and then select your mail service from the list Click Next Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 314 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Your neoning ana 4 Enter the basic account Fi 7 VersaMail TM Desktop Mail Account Wizard X outgoing server settings information and whether the account Enter Account Settings needs ESMTP a Enter a descriptive name for P E authentication are the account or use the one Speakeasy already entered based on shown Enie aaue Nane eae assioned o sou or his secur the account type you Enter your Password select b Enter your account username EEE E and password Your email jsadusky speakeasy net address will be entered Click Nest to continue automatically based on the Fe e Bese ae username you enter pee 5 Click Next on the mail servers screen This information is already filled in based on the mail service you selected 6 amp OPTIONAL Do one of the following e To enter advanced settings for this account click Advanced Settings e To test the account settings you have entered click Test My Settings Click OK after settings have been tested 7 Click Next Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 315 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Palm T X Handheld 8 10 amp OPTIONAL Setup other accounts a Select the option to set up another account and then click Next b Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account yo
445. t Alerts Y Continued Auto Sync M Sync automatically Every 1 Hour Start Time End Time Days 339 CHAPTER 16 If you are viewing the Inbox and Auto Sync downloads new messages those messages do not appear on the Reminders screen because you can already view them in the Inbox Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages 2 Select alert options Alerts a Check the Alert me of new Rf Alert meotnew malt a Alert me of failures mail box m Alert Sound v System b Select the Alert Sound pick list and then select a sound Your handheld plays a brief demo of the sound c To receive alerts of successful Auto Sync retrievals only uncheck the Alert me of failures box Leave the box checked if you want to receive alerts for both successful and failed Auto Sync retrievals d Select OK 4 Done Viewing and using the Reminders screen The Reminders screen on your handheld shows info about new email messages It also shows alerts from other applications such as Calendar appointments To view the Reminders screen tap Alert H on the status bar when it is blinking You can do any of the following e Check the box to clear a reminder from the list e Select the reminder either the mail icon or the text description to go to the Inbox of that account or to read a detailed error message 340 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tip e Select Done to c
446. t For Prompt Detects a challenge response prompt coming from the server and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value You then enter the challenge value into your token card which in turn generates a response value for you to enter on your handheld This is a two part command that is separated by a vertical bar on the input line Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 577 CHAPTER 26 Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Cont d Send Transmits specific characters to the server that you re connecting to Send CR Transmits a carriage return or line feed LF character to the server Send User ID Transmits the User Name field from Network Preferences Send Password Transmits the Password field from Network Preferences If you didn t enter a password this command prompts you to enter one The Password command is usually followed by a Send CR command Delay Tells your handheld to wait a specific number of seconds before going to the next command in the login script Get IP Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your handheld This command is used with SLIP connections Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter certain text for example a password or a security code End Identifies the last line in the login script Complete the script a Repeat step 3 until the login script is complete b Select OK and then select OK again c Select Done 4 Done 578 CHAPTER 26
447. t Office Manager See Documents application Microsoft Outlook applications that synchronize 74 Microsoft Outlook See Outlook Microsoft Windows systems See Windows information Microsoft Word documents 186 188 attaching to email 376 transferring to handheld 77 Microsoft Word files 24 73 Mini USB connector icon 22 missing applications 24 609 missing icons 609 mobile devices 134 140 mobile phones accessing Internet with 287 T X Handheld attaching modems to 562 compatibility 291 connecting to 287 290 296 568 621 connecting to Internet from 296 creating trusted pairs for 290 621 dialing 142 143 452 dialing in to networks from 95 key exchanges and 300 passkeys and 621 requirements for 145 Modem Sync Prefs dialog box 97 Modem Wait option 387 modems connecting to IR port from 562 dialing in to networks with 95 initialization strings for 387 567 setting up connections for 566 570 Money category 512 See also currency Month View 164 176 178 181 Month View icon 176 month setting 522 548 monthly events 154 monthly schedules 176 monthly tasks 237 239 moving bookmarks 432 information 72 messages 358 359 photos 203 videos 203 web pages 427 moving around dialog boxes 40 moving through web pages 425 MP3 files 213 219 MP3 files 77 setting up Media Player for 214 transferring with Windows Media Player 217 MP3 players 213 MPA files 117 multiday events 157 multiline descriptions 150 multimedia applications
448. t Palm Desktop software pesca and then click Remove Add New Programs opose 0330994 c Click Yes in the Confirm File Deletion box d Click OK and then click Close 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 126 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Restoring archived items on your computer In many applications you can save a copy of an item that you deleted from your handheld or desktop software to an archive folder on your computer This frees up space on your handheld while ensuring that the information is available if you need it in the future You can restore individual entries or an entire archive file to the related application in your desktop software The Palm Desktop online Help and the Microsoft Outlook online Help have lots of info about how to restore archived files Refer to these Help files for details Palm T X Handheld 127 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Related topics Click a link below to learn about these related topics If you re having problems with synchronization or with anything else on your handheld go to Connecting Synchronizing using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld www palm com support Bluetooth Using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Wi Fi Using Wi Fi wireless technology on your handheld Common Answers to frequently asked questions about synchronization Questions Palm T X Handheld
449. t connection settings The following steps show you how to adjust the communication speed in the preset IR to a PC Handheld connection setting You can similarly edit other connections or settings 1 Open Connection Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Connection Y Continued Preferences Connection Available Connections Cradle Cable IR to a PC Handheld 562 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld 2 Open the Edit Connection Edit Connection e dialog box Name IR to a PC Handheld a Select the IR to PC handheld Connect to w PC connection Via v Cradle Cable b Select Edit 3 Change the speed setting Details Speed 57 600 bps a Select Details Flow Ctl Automatic b Select the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed c Select OK d Select OK again and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 563 CHAPTER 26 To delete a connection that you created select it on the Connection Preferences screen and then select Delete Palm T X Handheld Customizing Your Handheld Creating your own connection settings If none of the preset connection settings are close to what you need or if you re already using all the connections as they are you can create a new connection NOTE See the Bluetooth and Wi Fi chapters for instructions on setting up a new connection using the built in Bluetooth wireless technology or Wi Fi functiona
450. t of the input area if selected or in the correct part of the screen if full screen writing is on Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 51 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld 4 Write the characters exactly as shown in the tables that follow these steps Be sure to start each stroke at the heavy dot 5 Lift the stylus at the end of the stroke 4 Done When you lift the stylus from the screen your handheld recognizes the stroke and prints the character at the insertion point on the screen Palm T X Handheld 52 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Did You Know Keys to success with Graffiti 2 writing Graffiti 2 characters made Keep these guidelines in mind when using Graffiti 2 writing with two strokes are recognized after the e Write the characters exactly as shown in the following tables Don t write the dot It s only there second stroke Make the to show you where to begin writing the character second stroke quickly after the first so that the e The Graffiti 2 writing area whether the input area or the full screen has two sections Write correct character is lowercase letters on the left numbers on the right and capital letters across the middle recognized i g e Write at a natural speed and do not write on a slant Did You Know j e Press firmly Write uppercase letters the same way you write e Write large characters lowercase ones The only difference is where you If you
451. t recognize time zones Selecting a time zone when creating a new event allows you to travel and have your events automatically adjust to the time zone in your new location When you schedule an event set the solae Preferences Select time zone and the time the event occurs in the location of the event The event automatically New events use time adjusts on your schedule based on the primary location you have set on your handheld zones Only new events created after the When you travel you can change the primary location on your handheld and the event preference is set are automatically adjusts on your schedule to the correct time according to the time zone of the affected new primary location NOTE Only events that have a time zone setting adjust when you change the primary time zone on your handheld Events that do not have a time zone setting remain at their set time 1 Press Calendar O Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 160 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE ELA 2 Set the time and the time zone Set Time Start Time a Enter the event Ey End Time b Set the time for the event as it is scheduled at the location where Time zone San Francisco it occurs pick list S No Time c Select the time zone pick list and 1 select a city within the time zone Cancel 1 where the event is located 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 d Select OK 4 Done Color coding your schedule Use color coding to quickly spot different
452. t s OK to enter commas instead of semicolons between addresses because they re changed to semicolons But you can t use other punctuation or no punctuation between addresses Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Entering an address directly in the To field 1 2 On the New Message screen select or navigate to the To field Enter an address using one of the following methods To field Enter the address and then select Done For multiple addresses enter a semicolon and then a space between recipient names Recipient List Select To and enter the name or address on the Recipient List screen and then select Done Use the shortcut buttons at the bottom of the screen for quick address entry For multiple recipients enter a semicolon and then a space between recipient names 4 Done New Message To Subj com net org edu gov 350 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Entering an address using Contacts You can enter a recipient s address by using the Lookup screen to select the address The names and addresses on the Lookup screen come from Contacts 1 Open the Lookup screen a On the New Message screen select the word To b On the Recipient List screen select Lookup 2 Enter the address Address Lookup Joanna Kwan jkwan jkwan net a On the Address Lookup Tsai Lee tsailee example com screen select the address you want and th
453. t the account to edit a Select HotSync manager in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your computer screen b Select Custom and then select VersaMail c Click Change and then select the name of the account to edit in the pane on the left of the screen 2 Select one of the following Delete Account Click the button and click to confirm the deletion Edit Account Click the button and edit the account settings on the following screens Advanced Click the button and edit the advanced account settings on the following screens 4 Done 330 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Editing an account on your handheld 1 Select the account you want to edit a Open the menus b Select Accounts and then select Account Setup c Select the name of the account to edit and then select Edit 2 The same series of screens appears for editing an account as for creating an account Go through the screens by selecting Next and change the entries you Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit VersaMail Yahoo Work Email want to edit on the appropriate screens 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 331 CHAPTER 16 Ona Windows computer synchronize to free up the memory associated with an account after you delete it Tir You can also delete an account on a Windows computer by selecting HotSync manager in the taskbar in the lower right corner of your c
454. t your phone is not ready to accept a connection check to a Select the Manufacturer and Model pick lists select the correct entries for your phone and then select Next make SUTE that your If the phone does not appear on the list check for phone compatibility at phone is prepared to http www palm com us support downloads phonelink html make a Bluetooth connection See the instructions included with your phone If your phone is not listed in the discovery results check whether your phone is discoverable using Bluetooth wireless technology Select Find More to search again b The Discovery Results displays all Bluetooth devices within range Select the phone you want select OK and then select Next Ay NOTE Notall features are available if your specific phone model is not in the pick list Discovery Results i Show v Nearby devices Select a phone PalmNokia3600 Select phone Select if your phone does not appear Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 291 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Passkey Like a 4 Enter a passkey Bluetooth Security i passwo rd the passkey Enter passkey for is a security measure a Enter a passkey number Connections can happen This can be any number you only between your choose it does not have to be aai A device for example a password you that has the same use to access a network or an email account Entering a passkey creates a partnership
455. te precautions to discharge static electricity if you are in an environment where you notice ESD events you may want to take extra precautions to protect your electronic equipment against ESD Palm T X Handheld 639 SYMBOLS exclamation point in Tasks list 245 asterisk characters 130 period character 552 NUMERICS 128 bit AES encryption 307 12 hour clock See clock 12 hour formats 550 24 hour clock 548 549 24 hour formats 549 550 5 way navigator 41 location 20 scrolling application categories 36 using 37 A ABA files 117 abbreviations 554 AC charger 31 606 607 accented characters 58 access points WI Fi 265 274 accessing email accounts 25 292 information 37 accessories 586 596 Account Setup command 325 Account Setup screen accessing 325 deleting accounts and 332 editing accounts and 331 ESMTP authentication and 333 setting up email accounts from 398 accounts accessing email 287 307 Palm T X Handheld Auto Sync and 336 caution for synchronizing and 311 deleting email 332 deleting Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 408 editing email 330 331 instant messenger and 134 logging in to Internet 436 setting up email 307 314 395 398 setting up Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync 395 401 testing 329 transferring settings to 312 updating information and 408 upgrading email 306 action bar web browser 421 425 actions pen stroke 544 Add Bookmark command 428 Add Contact dialog box 346 adding bo
456. technology at a time For example if you are connected to the Internet using Wi Fi and then you connect to the Internet using Bluetooth the Wi Fi connection is automatically disconnected before the Bluetooth connection is made If you encounter interference it is recommended that you turn one off while using the other Wi Fi Bluetooth gt Internet ISP p N N pe alz ite 0000 Example You are out making sales calls and arrive early for an appointment Use your handheld s Bluetooth technology to connect to your mobile phone and check your email from the car in the parking lot before you go into the appointment Example You are at an Internet cafe and want to browse the web Use your handheld s Wi Fi technology to wirelessly access the Internet by connecting to the hotspot at the cafe 264 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections Wi Fi signal strength indicator You can easily check Wi Fi status and signal strength anytime by viewing the Wi Fi icon on the status bar You can tap the Wi Fi icon to also view status signal strength and other Wi Fi information 10 24 controls Status Icons Wi Fi off Miti Wi Fi on Connected to a network al al AFM ETA E Signal strength Full strength decreasing to no signal Wi Fi on Not connected to a network om Palm T X Handheld 264 CHAPTER 14 Before You Begin Contact the network administrator to get the name of the networ
457. tection to your private entries by setting the privacy level hidden masked of privacy from within certain applications Open the Options menu Hiding or masking private entries select Security and then select the level of privacy from the Privacy pick list 1 Open Security a Go to Applications and then select Prefs b Select Security 2 Select the display option for private entries a Select the Private Records pick list b Select one of these options and then select Done Show Display private entries Mask Cover entries with a gray mask you can see the mask onscreen but you can t see the content of the entry Hide Make private entries invisible Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 491 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Usea password to Cont d protect confidential work or personal information If your handheld is lost or stolen this information will be safe Preferences Security amp gt v All Password 4 Cho Mike 650 555 6322 W Masked entry Cruz Maria 415 555 8983 W D Am Lou 415 555 5236 W ie 415 555 0589 W 5 id f d Hamon Nikk 530 555 7650 H Private Records CVEN Keaton Lisa 203 555 6192 W Hide Lang Mei 203 555 7567 W Look Upil 4 Done Viewing an entry that is masked To open a masked entry select the entry If you have a password enter it in the Show Private Records dialog box and then select OK When you close a masked entry
458. ted topics Moving Around Synchronizing Contacts VersaMail 2 MS i Fi Common_ Questions e Opening applications e Using menus Synchronizing your handheld with your desktop computer using Bluetooth wireless technology Connecting to telephone numbers in your list of contacts Sending and receiving email messages wirelessly using your handheld s Bluetooth technology Sending and receiving text messages wirelessly using your handheld s Bluetooth technology Using your handheld s Wi Fi wireless technology Answers to frequently asked questions about Bluetooth wireless technology 304 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Upgrading an existing email account About email accounts Setting up an account Getting and reading messages Sending an email message Working with email folders Working with email messages Working with attachments Advanced VersaMail application features Working with Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync Related topics Palm T X Handheld You already know how efficient email is for staying in touch with contacts Now the VersaMail application brings you a new level of convenience email on the go Enjoy the ease and speed of communicating with friends family and colleagues anywhere you can make an Internet connection You can email photos to your friends and family or create Microsoft Word or Ex
459. ter to which you are you are connecting must have aversion of connecting and the computer with which you want to synchronize your handheld Palm Desktop software that is compatible with your handheld b Click the HotSync manager icon G in the taskbar in the lower right corner of the screen Y Continued e The computer with which you want to synchronize your own computer must be turned on Palm T X Handheld 99 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Click TCP IP Settings 2 to display the primary settings for your On the computer with which you want to synchronize your own computer only do the following computer Check that a Select Setup from the HotSync manager menu these settings are correct on your handheld by b Click the Network tab and make sure your username has a checkmark next selecting the HotSync to it If the checkmark is not there check the box next to your username icon on the Applications CA View and then selecting Primary PC Setup from General Local Modem Network Checked users make this their Primary PC for performing a LANSync al S E f 5 the Options menu If the noet a e a settings do not match FZ Wayne Hoff restart your computer and synchronize using the cable or IR port before synchronizing by connecting to a computer on the network c Click OK d Tap the HotSync icon on your
460. that begin with the month or year Use the Formats Preferences screen to change these settings and to apply them to all the applications on your handheld You can quickly choose the preset formats based on geographic regions where you might use your handheld For example in the United Kingdom time often is expressed using a 24 hour clock In the United States time is expressed using a 12 hour clock with an AM or PM suffix You can use the original preset formats or change them based on your personal preferences 1 Open Formats Preferences PreterenE a Go to Applications Time v HH MM am pm 2 36 pm b Select Prefs k Date M D Y 12 8 06 Dec 8 2006 c Select Formats Week starts v Sunday Numbers 1 000 00 Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 549 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld The country setting Select a country changes only the way the 2 A i date ane time look It a Select the Preset to box to doesn t change your open the Set Country handheld s time to that dialog box country s time To do that go to Date amp Time b Select a country dad Preferences or to United States c Select OK World Clock 3 amp OPTIONAL Customize any of the following preset formats Time Controls whether the time is displayed in 12 hour or 24 hour format and which symbol separates the numbers Date Controls the sequence in which the day month and year appear and which symbol separates the segments
461. the next automatic send retry can be edited moved or or synchronize during a deleted However if you edit the message you must manually send the message If the manual send retry the retry is send fails you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic canceled You must send retry manually send any messages in the Outbox During automatic send retry any message that the VersaMail application is trying to send is in a locked state You cannot edit move or delete these messages If you try to modify a message in the locked state an error message appears If a send retry fails after the third try the message is stored in the Outbox in the error state You can send the message again manually or edit move or delete the message However if you edit the message you must send the message manually If the manual send fails you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to wait for the next automatic send retry Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications The icons to the left of a message in the Outbox show the message s status M Message is waiting either to be manually sent or to be sent during the next send retry You can edit move or delete a message in this state A Send retry is currently in process you cannot edit move or delete a message in this state A Third automatic send retry has failed You must manually send a message in this state by selecting Get amp Send Palm T X Hand
462. the reset button inside the hole on the back panel of your handheld 22 CHAPTER 2 Getting to Know Your Handheld What software do I have Your handheld comes with many applications preinstalled and ready to use In addition the software installation CD that came with your handheld includes desktop software for your computer and additional software for your handheld When you set up your handheld you can install some or all of these applications You can install any of the applications at any time after you set up your handheld as well Personal information These applications let you organize your contacts calendar events and more as well as keep information updated between your handheld and your computer They are already installed on your handheld amp Calendar Manage your schedule from single entries like lunch with a friend to repeating and extended events like weekly meetings and holidays Even color code your schedule by category Contacts Store names and addresses phone numbers email and website addresses even add a birthday alarm or a contact s photo Tasks Stay on top of your to do list Enter things you need to do prioritize them set alarms and then monitor your deadlines Pas Memos Capture information such as meeting notes lists of books to read movies to see recipes and anything else you need to write down Note Pad Write on the screen in your own handwriting or draw a quick sketch amp Expense
463. then click Date Book Palm T X Handheld 184 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Support Related topics If you re having problems with Calendar or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Click a link below to learn about these related topics Sharing e Beaming events to other Palm Powered handhelds e Sending events to other Bluetooth handhelds by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld e Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook VersaMail Sending events as attachments to email messages Privacy Keeping events private by turning on security options Categories e Editing and deleting categories e Viewing events by category Common Answers to frequently asked questions about Calendar Questions Palm T X Handheld 185 CHAPTER 8 Your Microsoft Office Manager In this chapter Creating and managing Office files Opening a file from within Documents Related topics Palm T X Handheld With its ability to store large amounts of important information your handheld lets you take your office with you including your Microsoft Office files With the Documents application you can carry create view and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files directly on your handheld You can also view carry and manage PowerPoint files on your handheld You can keep updated copies of the Benefits files on both your handheld and your e Manage Word Excel and Powe
464. then click Note Pad on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Note Pad on your computer double click the Note Pad icon in the Palm folder 262 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Support Related topics If you re having problems with Note Pad or with anything else on your handheld go to Wwww palm com support Moving Around Sharing VersaMail Privacy Categories Common Questions Palm T X Handheld Click a link below to learn about these related topics e Opening applications e Using menus e Beaming notes to other Palm Powered handhelds e Sending notes to other Bluetooth handhelds by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld Sending notes as attachments to email messages Keeping notes private by turning on security options Creating categories so you can organize notes Answers to frequently asked questions about Note Pad 263 CHAPTER 14 Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections In this chapter What can I do with the built in Wi Fi wireless technology What types of connections can make When would I use Wi Fi or Bluetooth technology Setting up a Wi Fi network connection Accessing email and the web with Wi Fi technology Setting up a device to device Wi Fi network Related topics Palm T X Handheld Staying connected means you have the latest wireless technology at your fingertips at all times Now your handheld can actually
465. ti strokes shown as you write a character in the input area 4 Done Customizing Graffiti 2 strokes There is more than one way to write certain Graffiti 2 characters Use the Graffiti 2 Preferences screen to select an alternate stroke shape for these characters 1 Open Graffiti 2 Preferences Select a character below to tune it a Go to Applications b Select Prefs amp c Select Graffiti 2 Y Continued 552 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld 2 Select alternate strokes Graffiti 2 Tuner a Tap a character to view its 12 alternate stroke Y b Check the box to use the m V orta Jarmot alternate stroke and then select Done 3 Repeat step 2 for each stroke you want to reassign and then select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 553 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Setting up a ShortCut Are you looking for a quicker way to enter information on your handheld Use ShortCuts to define space character after abbreviations for any words letters or numbers that you enter often You can use your ShortCuts the last word in your anywhere you enter info with Graffiti 2 writing ShortCut text This way a space automatically follows the ShortCut text 1 You may want to add a Open ShortCuts Preferences a Go to Applications To learn how to use ShortCuts while enterin A PRY b Select Prefs 8 ais Pate and Time Stamp information see Writing M Bing me Meeting a Graffiti 2 Sho
466. ting 40 assigning to applications 543 calculator 484 locking 559 navigator 37 not responding 21 552 559 597 607 opening applications from 36 reassigning application 543 restoring defaults for 543 selecting dialog box 40 Buttons Preferences screen 543 Cc cables 596 cache 302 Calculator application 24 benefits of 483 buttons described 484 categorizing with Expense 512 copying and pasting from 485 displaying calculation history 485 re entering numbers 484 related topics for 487 troubleshooting 487 Calculator icon 24 calculators 24 calculators preinstalled See Calculator application calendar See also Calendar application adding appointments to 150 changing events on 166 changing repeat intervals for 166 color coding appointments 151 161 customizing 178 179 550 deleting events 168 displaying appointments for 171 174 175 176 displaying conflicting events in 180 entering birthdays for 132 finding overlapping events on 178 opening 184 purging old events 170 reserving dates 152 scrolling through 175 176 setting repeat intervals for 155 156 157 Calendar application applying color coding options 162 categorizing information in 515 checking schedules in 173 175 176 defining repeating events 154 155 deleting categories 514 deleting events 168 displaying categories in 518 entering event locations from 158 importing information for 117 opening 23 150 152 154 155 157 158
467. tion on the Favorites list by opening the Favorite 4 Done menu and then selecting Rearrange Favorites Drag the favorite you want to the new location Adjust the fade setting so that the text is easy to read against the photo and select OK Changing entries in Favorites Change the entries in the Favorites View to include the applications or web links you use most often 1 Go to Favorites 2 Open the Edit Favorites dialog box a Highlight the favorite you want to change b Open the menus c Select Edit Favorites Palm T X Handheld 534 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld 3 Change the favorite a Select the favorite type from the Edit Favorite Type pick list App application Type App or Web Link Original Media b Select the application from the Name Media Original pick list or tap to enter the web address you want c Enter a name for your new favorite d Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 535 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Customizing Applications View Use your favorite photo as the background in Applications View You can also display your application icons in list format with small icons so that you can see more applications without Palm T X Handheld scrolling 1 2 Go to Applications Open the Display Options Display Options 9 dialog box vi iew By Icon M Remember Last Category a Open the menus M Background b Select Options and t
468. tion options for 102 104 synchronizing with 75 Cradle Cable setting 566 creating appointments 150 backups 73 bookmarks 422 428 business cards 136 categories 512 company specific information 11 connections 564 566 contacts 66 130 133 346 daily events 150 email messages 348 filters 381 login scripts 576 mail folders 360 memos 249 multiday events 157 notes 256 owner information 558 passwords 492 493 498 personal signatures 352 photo albums 201 playlists 223 plug in applications 579 646 reminders 132 255 repeating events 154 155 repeating tasks 236 238 service profiles 569 570 573 ShortCut strokes 554 tasks 234 236 238 trusted devices 290 trusted pairs 299 unscheduled events 153 untimed events 152 157 user profiles 12 video albums 201 currency 473 474 476 Currency pick list 474 currency symbols 474 475 476 480 current date and time checking 521 entering 62 545 548 cursor 64 68 Custom Currencies dialog box 476 customer support 17 71 189 232 632 customizing applications 108 backgrounds 180 533 537 calendar 178 179 contact information 135 140 currency symbols 476 data entry 551 expense lists 480 Graffiti 2 writing 552 handheld 26 handhelds 11 network settings 569 579 preset formats 550 synchronization settings 102 110 T X Handheld Tasks list 244 Cut command 70 Cut icon 43 cycling through calendar views 171 D daily events 154 daily schedules 173 174 178 daily tasks 237 2
469. tions etc If you are not certain of the policy that applies to the use of this device please ask for authorization prior to turning on the device Static Electricity ESD and Your Palm Handheld Electrostatic discharge ESD can cause damage to electronic devices if discharged into the device so you should take steps to avoid such an occurrence Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material To most people static electricity and ESD are nothing more than annoyances For example after walking over a carpet while scuffing your feet building up electrons on your body you may get a shock the discharge event when you touch a metal doorknob This little shock discharges the built up static electricity ESD susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm circuitry so when working with electronic devices take measures to help protect your electronic devices including your Palm handheld from ESD harm While Palm has built protections against ESD into its products ESD unfortunately exists and unless neutralized could build up to levels that could harm your equipment Any electronic device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD Devices that you carry with you such as your handheld build up ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have b
470. tness sssccscccsssnsscccesssensdenessensdenava tends sete aana danaa aaan 540 Changing screen COlOMS sisi ccsdesssdusas ciate nccicenissadeaiessvecesnies eeakeadearnes ce 541 Changing handedness orientation of the screen csssesesessereees 542 Assigning a button to your frequently used applications sses 543 Setting the date and time cccceeceeccsseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeseeseeseeeseeseneeess 545 Selecting a lOCALION sssccissstescccvessescecssieaccedesessssdevedasseceasvsseccatessyeces 545 Resetting the date and time isiciiasscccceccesssgncecenssancicecessacsencetsatvenane ssecee 547 Selecting formats for dates times ANd numbers scsseceeeeeeeeeeees 549 Customizing the way you enter information cceseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 551 Palm T X Handheld xvi CUStOMIZING THE INPUT areais iaoa 551 Customizing Graffiti 2 strokes scisistesasscccaurdiecnaasiiceetetsiaae ines 552 Setting Up ai ShortC Ul viisiisscsccessssscncesseedecceeeeasseedccadeseencevevvseenceyeassends 554 CHANGING a SHOMCUE seciincseecedsscestens civiesvaascantesdietecanedaaddeaesdeanevinestia tes 555 Correcting problems With tapping cece eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 556 Selecting sound settings cccccccessseececeseseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeseeeeeeeess 557 Entering your Owner information cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneees 558 Conserving Dattery POWEN icsccssseeccvcnssiaducunesacedacctasendnavesetnad
471. to use Quick Unlock to prevent accidental password attempts while your handheld is in a purse or pocket Palm T X Handheld 507 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Palm T X Handheld Open Security a Go to Applications and then A select Prefs Pay b Select Security Set the number of password attempts a Select Options b If necessary enter your password and then select OK c Select the Intrusion Protection box d Enter the number of password attempts that are allowed before selected information on your handheld is deleted Y Continued Preferences Password Quick Unlock Auto Lock Private Records v Show Security Options i O Encrypt data when locked Encryption type v RC4 Intrusion Protection Intrusion Protection box 508 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private The number of password attempts must be between 5 and 99 Palm T X Handheld 3 Select the information that is deleted after the set number of failed attempts Intrusion Protection After 7 Attempt s Private Records a Select the Delete pick list and All Data 4 If an incorrect pusswuru is select one of these options attempted 7 times all of your data will be deleted No Data_ No information is deleted after the set number of failed attempts Private Records All entries marked private are deleted after the set number of failed attempts All Data All in
472. twork connection using Wi Fi wireless technology on your handheld VersaMail Sending information as an attachment to an email message SMS Sending information as part of a text message Common Answers to frequently asked questions about sharing information Questions Palm T X Handheld 470 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses In this cl Adding an expense Choosing currency options Deleting expenses Customizing the expense list Working with Expense on your computer Related topics Palm T X Handheld Tired of trying to re create your business trip when you return Expense makes it easy to keep track of what you paid for that dinner in New York with your new sales group You can track costs for meals lodging transportation entertainment and more and save all of the information in one convenient place You can even transfer the information to a spreadsheet on your computer Benefits of Expense e Monitor your business and personal expenses e Easily retrieve expense information e Create expense reports faster 471 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses d You Know Adding an expense Expense is not just for business Use it to help plan your budget by 1 Go to Applications and select Expense amp figuring out how much you spend each month on things like entertainment 2 and dining out Enter the expense a Tap New Add an expense simply i b Enter the amount of t
473. u Ny Continued Palm T X Handheld 124 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer 3 Delete the application a Select the Delete From pick list and then select Device or an expansion card b Select the application that you want to remove and then select Delete c Select Yes and then select Done 4 Done Removing Palm Desktop software from your computer WINDOWS ONLY IMPORTANT If you remove Palm Desktop software you also remove the synchronization software and can no longer synchronize your information Even if you want to synchronize your handheld with another personal information manager like Microsoft Outlook you must leave Palm Desktop software installed on your computer This process removes only the application files The information in your Users folder remains untouched Palm T X Handheld 125 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Ry NOTE Mac computers do not provide an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop software You may have to modify these steps to correspond with the operating system on your computer 1 Open Add Remove Programs a From the Start menu select Settings and then select Control Panel b Double click the Add Remove programs icon 2 Remove Palm Desktop software Change or Remove Programs a Click Change or Remove aia Programs 5i Currently installed programs Sort by Name E Change or Remove b Selec
474. u can also send all the messages in your Outbox by opening the Messages menu and selecting Send You can set an alert that lets you know a new message has arrived Open the Preferences menu and check the Alert sound box Select the Alarm pick list to choose a sound Palm T X Handheld Receiving and viewing a text message Go to Applications and select SMS D 2 Select Send amp Check 3 Select the message to open and read it sms 0 unread v Inbox 3336558986 Let s meet at 336558986 have some ide 5559191 Sorry will be 16505551234 ididu hear fro Ny Continued From 336558986 Date 6 27 04 2 59 pm have some ideas about the meeting 414 CHAPTER 17 Sending and Receiving Text Messages Did You Know You can change how your 4 Store delete or reply to the message messages are listed You can sort the messages in Select Done The message is kept in the Inbox order of one of the following Alphabetic Select Reply A new message is created with the sender s phone number in Date Phone Number the To line Any selected text is copied into the new message and Status You can also choose to display the Select Delete The message is sent to the Trash category date the message was received Open the Options menu and select Preferences Select from the Sort by pick list and select Show date Archive the message You can store your message in the Archive category a
475. u can easily synchronize with your computer wirelessly 90 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Palm T X Handheld MAC ONLY A Go to Applications and select Prefs Open the Edit Connection screen a From the Communications Preferences list select Connection b Select New Set up the connection to your computer a Enter a name for the connection such as BT to Mac b Select the Connect to pick list and select PC c Select the Via pick list and select Bluetooth N Continued EEA Connection Available Connections Cradle Cable IR to a PC Handheld BT to Universal Phone IR to Universal Phone Ser to Universal Phon Infrared to GSM Phone Serial to GSM Phone Edit Connection i Connect to v PC Device 91 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Just as it is safer to use different personal identification numbers PINs for different bank accounts your passkeys are more secure if you use a different passkey for each device with which you want to connect one passkey for a connection to a phone a different one for a connection to a computer and so on Just remember that you must enter the same passkey on your handheld and on the device with which you want to connect Palm T X Handheld Cont d d Make sure the computer is ready to accept a Bluetooth connection N NOTE See the documentation inclu
476. u want to set up When you have set up the last account go to step 9 Finish setting up accounts a Select the option to synchronize information for this account and then click Next b Click Finish VersaMail TM Desktop Mail Account Wizard pain Account Settings Entered You have finished entering settings for this account What would you like to do next I m finished setting up accounts and am ready to transfer these settings on my device I d like to set up another account To set up or edit an account later click the HotSync icon in the system tray and select VersaMail under the Custom menu then click Change Click Next to continue cal e VersaMail TM Desktop Mail Account Wizard X Transfer Settings to Device You must now perform a HotSync operation to transfer your account settings to your device 4 Important your mail cannot be downloaded to your device until you do the following Click the Finish button on this screen to exit the Wizard Make sure your device is connected to your computer securely through the HotSync cable Press the HotSync button on the cable to synchronize Synchronize to transfer all account information to your handheld 4 Done CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting up an account on your computer Other providers Protocol Settings your WINDOWS ONLY email
477. ued 168 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE T ELA 4 amp OPTIONAL Check the box to save an archive copy of the event on your computer 5 Select OK 6 If you re deleting a repeating Repsctinetvents event select one of the following meu A e changes to to select the event s you want to aha Current record delete this amp all Future records AIl occurrences Current Delete only the selected Current _ instance of the repeating event Future Delete the selected event and all instances of the repeating event that occur at a later date All Delete the selected event and all past and future instances of the repeating event 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 169 CHAPTER 7 DEUET L DITTO ELi Palm T X Handheld Deleting all your old events When you need more space on your handheld or you just want to do some housekeeping you can delete all your old events Press Calendar O2 Open the Purge dialog box Delete events older a Open the menus than 1 week Save archive copy on PC b Select Purge on the Record menu Select the events to purge a Select the Delete events older than pick list and select a time frame b Check the Save archive copy on PC box if you want to place a copy of the deleted events in an archive file on your computer the next time you synchronize c Select OK 4 Done 170 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Tip Checking your schedule Press the Calendar button
478. ueengecncstns sad eataeransaaaeseedecansaanauadaneensatieeteeeniny 584 Chapter 27 Expanding Your Handheld 002000 2 985 What type of expansion cards Can USE csssssececceeeceesessssssesscsseeeess 586 How can expansion Cards help Me ceccssceeeeseneeeeeseseneeeesecenateeessesnaes 586 Removing an EXPANSION card cecceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeneeeneaaeaeaeeeeeeeeeneense 587 Inserting an expansion CAN esas sscdiccessesnedcesssanacancasecstaccess texcenna niaide 588 Opening an application ON aN expansion card cecccceceseeereeeessseteeeess 589 Opening files ON an expansion card ccccccceseseeeeeeseeeeeeeseseeeeeeseeseeeeess 590 VIEWING Card IMTOFMATLION sssini ninnaa sen denresdaetedees enc 591 Renaming a CONG assire ninaa aa EE AaS a 592 Palm T X Handheld xvii Copying applications to an expansion card o eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeteeees 593 Removing all information from a card oo eee eee eeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 594 Related tOpl S siringi aa nets decenaacaunenadeeauasenns seceseanneeds 595 Chapter 28 Maintaining Your Handheld 00008 596 Handheld do s aind AOM ts eiiis ensani caaiands veces 596 Handheld Go S siicsceassss cadaatsdaxs tauunes naaa aaa aai aE 596 Handheld QON tSaoi a a 597 Resetting your handheld sisccsscdscicccetassscdeagerssecucaeendescachaevacsnaunenseecndaueapnests 597 Doing SOM reset sikeren AE a 597 DOING a hard TESOL sisisi oraaa deda ad
479. uently asked questions about Memos 254 Writing Notes in Note Pad Creating a note Viewing and editing a note Deleting a note Working with Note Pad on your computer Related topics Palm T X Handheld Need to jot down a phone number or a reminder to yourself Avoid fumbling for scraps of paper and write important reminders in Note Pad You can use Note Pad to do everything you might do with a piece of paper and a pencil such as drawing a quick sketch Note Pad gives you a place to draw freehand and take notes in your personal handwriting which is even faster and more flexible than creating a memo on your handheld Benefits of Note Pad e Capture information in the moment e A picture is worth a thousand words e See reminders when you set alarms e Send notes to colleagues wirelessly 255 CHAPTER 13 Before You Begin Make sure full screen writing is turned off You cannot create or edit notes in Note Pad when full screen writing is on Select the pen selector to change the pen width or to select the eraser To clear the screen completely select the note anywhere but the title open the Edit menu and select Clear Note Prevent others from viewing your notes by marking them as private Palm T X Handheld Writing Notes in Note Pad Creating a note 1 2 y Done Go to Applications and select Note Pad B Create a note Category box a Use the stylus to
480. uilt up on your body is automatically passed to the device Then when the device is connected to another device such as a docking station a discharge event can occur Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built up static electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching an electronic device or connecting one device to another The recommendation from Palm is that 638 you take this precaution before connecting your handheld to your computer placing the handheld in a cradle or connecting it to any other device You can do this in many ways including the following e Ground yourself when you re holding your mobile device by simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground For example if your computer has a metal case and is plugged into a standard three prong grounded outlet touching the case should discharge the ESD on your body e Increase the relative humidity of your environment e Install ESD specific prevention items such as grounding mats Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment include the following e Low relative humidity e Material type The type of material gathering the charge For example synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural fibers like cotton e The rapidity with which you touch connect or disconnect electronic devices While you should always take appropria
481. uire primary location in World this information You can also select the format in which the date time and numbers appear Clock Selecting a location You can set the current date and time based on your location When you travel to a new time zone change the Location setting to quickly reset the date and time Your appointments stay at the time you entered them no adjustments for time zones So always enter your schedule based on the time zone you will be in on the day of the event 1 Open Date amp Time Preferences a Go to Applications b Select Prefs 8 c Select Date amp Time Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 545 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld You can rename the 2 mane h Select the location Edit Location 9 ocation to the city where ane E Door Name field z i e Bonny Doo you live Select the Name a Select the Location pick list and field and then modify the select a city in your time zone If location name you found a city in the list go to m t 3 M This location observes step gt Daylight Saving Time If you are synchronizing No nearby city Select Edit List 3 with Outlook on your and do steps b through e computer you can also select a time zone when creating a new event in Calendar b Select Add c Select a city in your time zone and then select OK d Select OK again and then select Done When creating a new e Select the Location pick list and select the cit
482. ule Day View shows your daily schedule one day at a time You can scroll between days in the current week or jump to any other date 1 Open Day View a Press Calendar b Select the Day View icon 0 TAEA 4s METIS amp Adam Spear Day selector Birthday icon Alarm icon 8 00 No time icon 9 00 10 00 11 00 1200 Event duration 1 00 eMeeting 2 00 Repeat icon Note icon Category marker 220 soso asonansi Day View icon Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 173 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE ELA 2 Do any of the following to view your daily schedule e Select the day selector to view another day in the same week select the arrows to scroll to the previous or next week or select Go To to choose a specific date Select the Repeat icon the Alarm icon or Details to open the Details dialog box Select the Note icon to view the note text Select the Birthday icon to view the birthday entry Select the category marker to assign the event to a color code 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 174 CHAPTER 7 Managing Your Calendar Viewing your weekly schedule Week View shows your schedule for an entire week The time frames that appear on the screen are based on the Start Time and End Time settings in Calendar Preferences You can also press Right and Left on the 5 way to scroll to the next or previous week To go to Day View for a particular day press Center on the 5 way to i
483. ur Expenses If you re oe ee Cont d b Select one of the Currency Select Currencies expenses that all use the pick lists and select the name Galore tha Anvandac that same currency change of the country whose currency display in currency list Currency the preset currency to symbol you want to display Currency 1 United States pick list that symbol to save time Currency 2 v EU Euro ave c Select OK and then select Currency 3 v United Kingdom When you re finished OK again Currency 4 Japan with those expenses Currency 5 w None change it again to the next one you ll use 4 Done The expense list now displays the currencies you selected Presetting the currency symbol Choose which currency symbols appear when you add a new expense 1 Go to Applications and select Expense 8 2 Open Expense Preferences dialog box a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Preferences Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 475 CHAPTER 21 Managing Your Expenses Palm T X Handheld 3 Choose the default currency a Select the Default Currency pick list b Select the symbol you want to appear when you add new expenses c Select OK 4 Done Creating a currency symbol If the currency you want to use is not in the pick list of countries you can create your own symbol 1 2 Preferences i M Use automatic fill when entering data Default curren Go to Applications
484. using a proxy server enter the server name Click Next amp OPTIONAL To test the account settings you have entered click Test My Settings Click OK after settings have been tested Y Continued 396 CHAPTER 16 Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages 10 11 Click Finish Do one of the following a To synchronize the account information to your handheld click the top button b To set up another email account click the bottom button N NOTE You can set up only one Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account If you choose to set up another email account it must be a different type Click Next When you have finished setting up all accounts click Finish on the Transfer Settings screen 4 Done 397 CHAPTER 16 Setting up an account on your handheld 1 2 Palm T X Handheld Sending and Receiving Email Messages Tap VersaMail in the input area Open the Account Setup screen a Open the menus b Select Accounts and then select Account Setup c Select New Enter the basic account information a In the Account Name field enter a descriptive name b Select the Mail Service pick list and then select Exchange ActiveSync c Select Next Y Continued Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit Yahoo Work Email Account Setup i Choose an account name e g My Mail and select settings Account Nam
485. utlook Other info such as photos and notes is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software 1 Insert the CD into your computer 2 Select Change your synchronization method 3 Follow the onscreen instructions for the desktop software you want to use Palm T X Handheld 613 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions can t synchronize my handheld with Microsoft Outlook WINDOWS ONLY NOTE If you choose to synchronize your handheld with Outlook information from Contacts Calendar Tasks and Memos is synchronized with info in Outlook Other information such as photos and notes is synchronized with info in Palm Desktop software e Click the HotSync manager icon 6 and select Custom Check the following e Make sure that you have the correct username selected from the drop down list e Make sure that the applications you want are set to synchronize the files If not select each application click Change and then choose Synchronize the files e Make sure that the correct application name is selected For example the older version of Calendar was called Date Book If you upgraded from an older handheld make sure that Calendar is set to Synchronize the files and Date Book is set to Do Nothing NOTE For any of the above changes to become permanent settings check the Set as default box Otherwise it applies during the next synchronization only e Be sure that the application you want is installed Reinstall the HotSync manager an
486. verter amp 163K Documents 342K your handheld and an DSLib 8K Font Library 18K expansion card See the GraphicsLibrary 12K information on each Libinstall 10K application for details 3 Select the application to copy N NOTE A lock appears next to applications that are copy protected You cannot copy or beam these applications a Select the Copy From pick list and select Handheld b Select the application you want to copy c Select Copy d Select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 593 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld Removing all information from a card Formatting a card removes all of its info and prepares it to accept new applications and files IMPORTANT We do not recommend formatting backup cards Formatting removes the backup application and turns the card into a blank memory card Insert an expansion card 2 Go to Applications and select Card Info 8 3 Format the card Format Card Formatting this card a Open the menus will destroy allits data Do you want to format b Select Format Card on the this card Card menu c When asked if you want to format the card select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 594 CHAPTER 27 Expanding Your Handheld ort Related topics If you re having problems with expansion cards or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Sharing e Exchanging applications and information with other Palm Powered handheld
487. view 30 LANSync Prefs dialog box 101 laptops 80 287 large fonts 539 large images 440 Last Page Viewed setting web browser 439 Leave mail on server option 388 lightning bolt icon 607 line selection 68 links web pages 425 list screens 40 listening to music 217 222 585 lists See also song lists creating company phone 11 customizing expense 480 customizing Tasks 244 displaying applications icons in 536 displaying bookmarks in 429 displaying contacts in 140 finding items in 525 moving between items in 40 opening category 180 589 ordering memos in 251 rearranging items in 251 selecting items in 40 loading user profiles 15 16 Local Area Networks See networks locating contacts 138 controls 45 information 44 overlapping events 178 Location field 158 Location pick list 525 546 location pick list 525 location settings World Clock 521 524 526 locations deleting 527 location specific preferences 545 550 Lock Device dialog box 499 lock icons 468 593 lock options 500 locking handheld buttons 559 locking device 558 log files 79 logging in to email accounts 309 436 logging in to network servers 576 Login Script dialog box 576 577 login scripts 576 578 Look Up line Contacts 138 Lookup screen 351 losing information 40 73 network connections 607 654 passwords 497 498 low batteries 5 606 low battery 32 lowercase letters 53 M Mac information creating contacts 147 creating notes 262 creating
488. w Profile screen 12 13 Note Pad See also notes backing up information in 27 categorizing information in 512 516 clearing 256 creating notes from 256 deleting notes in 261 displaying notes in 260 getting help with 262 263 opening 23 overview 255 related topics for 263 selecting pens 257 setting color preferences 257 synchronizing information for 76 troubleshooting 619 Note Pad icon 23 notes See also memos Note Pad attaching alarms to 258 attaching to email 263 backing up 27 categorizing 256 512 creating 256 deleting 261 editing 256 260 marking as private 256 263 489 saving 256 selecting 40 260 setting background colors for 257 sorting 260 synchronizing 112 notification options email 340 353 No time icon 172 number formats 482 549 550 numbers 51 See also phone numbers adding to entry fields 55 entering on calculator 484 O Office files 186 188 off line viewing 433 434 omitting passkeys 290 omitting passwords 570 Online Troubleshooting Guide 612 onscreen keyboard See keyboard opening applications 543 Calendar views 150 175 176 177 Category pick list 180 files 188 HotSync manager 23 90 Note Pad 23 Pocket Tunes 24 web browser 434 operating systems 2 Optimized view web browser 426 options 102 order forms 442 organizing applications 45 512 information 45 511 orientation of screen 30 Outbox 348 353 354 Outbox icons 354 outgoing mail options 329 outgoing mail servers 308 318 327 Outlook
489. which you have previously communicated but you can refuse invitations to connect with unrecognized devices This is similar to locking your front door with a dead bolt and enabling the doorbell Friends who already have the key can enter freely and if someone without a key rings the bell to request a connection you can choose to open the door or ignore the request Palm T X Handheld 288 CHAPTER 15 Making Bluetooth Wireless Connections Entering basic Bluetooth settings Discoverable Setting that allows other devices to find and connect with 1 Tap Bluetooth controls 3 on the status bar your handheld using Bluetooth wireless technology If your handheld is not 2 Enter the basic Bluetooth Bluetooth settings discoverable other Bluetooth KON Wireless Technology Bluetooth is On devices cannot find it x a Select Prefs to make a connection b Select ON When the Bluetooth c Tap the Device Name field Service icon on the status bar is and enter a name for your dimmed the Bluetooth handheld This is the name application is off and your that other Bluetooth devices handheld is not see when they connect to discoverable your handheld By default it is the username you use during synchronization but you can hange it You can synchronize change with your computer using d Bluetooth wireless technology Select the Discoverable pick list and select Yes or No 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 28
490. wireless service provider Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your email account If this is the case be sure to use your provider s network as the connection type for the account Some wireless service providers have other requirements specific to their service For example Yahoo requires you to pay for a POP account in order to download email messages from your Yahoo account to your handheld Check with your service provider to see if any provider specific requirements exist Service provider settings frequently change If your email account was working but you are currently experiencing problems check with your service provider to see if any of the account settings have changed am having problems sending and receiving email Short periods of time when email is unavailable are common due to server problems or poor wireless coverage If you have problems sending or receiving mail for an extended period of time check with your ISP or email service provider to verify that the service is working properly Make sure your ISP or email provider allows you to send and receive email on a wireless handheld Several providers like Hotmail do not offer this option at all 623 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions Auto Sync is not working e If Auto Sync is occurring and you turn your handheld off or the connection to your email service provider is disconnected Auto Sync fails e If you are attempting Aut
491. wireless technology and Wi Fi functionality when not in use e If using Auto Sync to automatically retrieve email messages set the time interval to one hour or less often e Minimize use of the expansion card slot Palm T X Handheld 5 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer L Before You Begin Step 2 Setting up your handheld for the first time Be sure to fully charge your handheld as described in the 1 Press the power button preceding procedure Power button After you set up your handheld review the Quick Tour on your handheld and take the tutorial on the CD to learn the basics 2 Slide the stylus out of the slot 3 Hold the stylus as you would hold a pen and follow the onscreen instructions to set up your handheld 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 6 CHAPTER 1 Setting Up Your Handheld and Your Computer ou Kno Step 3 Installing your software When you upgrade there s no need to delete the old desktop software 1 Insert the CD into your computer first When you install the new Palm Desktop NOTE You need administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software on software all of your a computer information transfers automatically to the new sOnare 2 WINDOWS ONLY Vid You Kno Follow the onscreen instructions If you re upgrading select the username that IT managers can set up you assigned to your old handheld a profile if they want to install the same set of MAC ONLY ne
492. with your computer to restore any private entries that were deleted amp OPTIONAL Create a new password 4 Done Locking your handheld Protect the entire contents of your handheld whether marked private or not by using your password to lock your handheld You can set your handheld to lock automatically or you can lock it manually IMPORTANT If you lock your handheld you must enter the exact password to unlock it If you forget the password your handheld will show you the hint you entered to help you remember the password If you still cannot remember the password you must do a hard reset to resume using your handheld A hard reset deletes all of the information on your handheld including your password You can restore the information by synchronizing your handheld with your computer 498 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private Locking your handheld automatically 1 Palm T X Handheld Open Security a Go to Applications and then select Prefs Pay b Select Security Private Records v Show Open the Lock Handheld dialog box a Select the Auto Lock box b If necessary enter your password and then select OK Y Continued 499 CHAPTER 23 Keeping Your Information Private 3 Select one of these lock options Lock Handheld 7 Automatically lock handheld Never Always leave your handheld unlocked When power is off After a preset delay When power is off Automatically
493. work you want is listed Select the network and then select Connect If the network does not require an encryption key the connection process begins When the process is completed you are returned to the application you were in when you opened the Wi Fi controls You are finished with this procedure If the network requires an encryption key select Yes when asked if you want to enter security settings Continue with step 4 The network you want is not listed Select Edit and then select Add Continue with step 4 Y Continued Wi Fi Networks Select anetwork belkin54g Ta NETGEAR Secure Network You need to enter security settings to connect to this network Would you like to enter them now Wi Fi Networks Select anetwork Ta NETGEAR Add Delete Connect 264 CHAPTER 14 Palm T X Handheld Making Wi Fi Wireless Connections 4 Add the network name or SSID 5 Select a security option If your network does not require any encryption settings select None and go to step 8 If your network requires WEP encryption select WEP and go to step 6 If your network requires WPA PSK encryption select WPA PSK and go to step 7 Y Continued New Wi FiNetwork Network Name SSID Security wv None Edit Wi FiNetwork Network Name SSID Security C None WPA PSK 264 CHAPTER 14 64 bit WEP keys are commonly called 40 bit keys and 128
494. write your note directly on the handheld screen Time or title Scroll bar b Select the time at the top of the screen and enter a title using Graffiti 2 writing or the onscreen keyboard Eraser Pen selector amp OPTIONAL Assign the note to a category by selecting the Category box in the upper right corner and then selecting a category Select Done That s it Your handheld automatically saves the note Make sure you have a current backup Synchronize often 256 CHAPTER 13 Writing Notes in Note Pad Choosing the pen and paper background colors 1 Palm T X Handheld Go to Applications and select Note Pad es Open the Select Colors dialog box a Select Done to display the Note Pad list b Open the menus c Select Options and then select Preferences d Select Color Select Colors i ZW Paper OOOO00 NotePadPreferences Sort by v Manual Alarm Sound Alarm M Confirm note delete HEED DHATH Select the pen and paper colors a Select Pen and then select the ink color you want to use b Select Paper and then select the background color you want to use c Select OK and then select OK again 4 Done 257 CHAPTER 13 Change the alarm sound by opening the Options menu selecting Preferences and then selecting a sound from the Alarm Sound pick list Palm T X Handheld Writing Notes in Note Pad Setting an alarm To us
495. y NOTE When you write the Command stroke the Command toolbar appears See the next section for info on using the Command toolbar Using the Command toolbar The Command toolbar displays different icons based on the active screen For example if you have text selected the icons might be Cut Copy and Paste If no text is selected the icons might be Beam Undo and Delete To use the Command toolbar write the Command stroke to display the Command toolbar and then tap an icon to select its command Command gt BS stroke Ee S Cut Copy Paste Beam Undo Delete 43 CHAPTER 3 If you select text in an application before you tap Find the selected text automatically appears in the Find dialog box Open an application before you tap Find to display results from that application at the top of the results list Want to stop searching Select Stop at any time during a search To continue the search select Find More Palm T X Handheld Moving Around in Applications Finding information You can use Find to locate any word or phrase in applications such as Media SMS Contacts Documents or Calendar Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter and is not case sensitive For example searching for plane finds planet but not airplane Searching for bell also finds Bell 1 2 Tap Find FJ on the status bar Enter the text that you want to find and then select OK S
496. y level or categories WINDOWS ONLY To open Tasks on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon on the Windows desktop and then click Tasks on the launch bar MAC ONLY To open Tasks on your computer double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder and then click To Dos Palm T X Handheld 246 CHAPTER 11 Managing Your Tasks Support Related topics If you re having problems with Tasks or with anything else on your handheld go to www palm com support Click a link below to learn about these related topics VersaMail Sending tasks as attachments to email messages Sharing e Beaming tasks to other Palm Powered handhelds e Sending tasks to other Bluetooth handhelds by using Bluetooth wireless technology on your handheld e Synchronizing with Palm Desktop software and Outlook Privacy Keeping task private by turning on security options Categories Organizing tasks by type Common Answers to frequently asked questions about Tasks Questions Palm T X Handheld 247 CHAPTER 12 Writing Memos Creating a memo Viewing and editing a memo Moving a memo in your Memo list Deleting a memo Working with Memos on your computer Related topics Palm T X Handheld Your handheld contains applications for storing the most common types of information contact names and numbers appointments and so on Memos is the tool to use for capturing information that is meaningful to you
497. y on the first attempt it is moved to the Outbox Outbox Stores email so you can compose email offline and then send it all during one connection with the server To send your email select Get amp Send Drafts Saves your message so you can work on it at another time 4 Done 348 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Entering an address using Smart Addressing You can also type the first Smart Addressing completes a recognized email address initial and last name of the person you want Smart Addressing displays any entries 1 matching the initial and On the New Message screen navigate to or tap in the To field last name 2 Start entering the person s name Emil bender Smart Addressing displays Tap the email header icon matching names and email in the upper right corner addresses from Contacts of the screen to display the cc and bcc fields 3 When the name you want appears select it to enter it on the To line 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 349 CHAPTER 16 gt Did You Know When you put addresses in the copies cc field they are visible to all other recipients Addresses in the blind copies bcc field are hidden from all other recipients As with Smart Addressing when you begin to enter a name or address on the Recipient List screen the VersaMail application displays any matching entries from Contacts Select a match to automatically enter it in the Recipient List lip I
498. y to read against the photo nothing scheduled as well as your appointments deselect 5 Compress Day View But don t forget to scroll Select Day and set any of the Display Options e following Day View options O Show Category List Default View v Agenda down to see the events at Show Category List Display the EN Month the end of your day or category pick list By default the Show Time Bars hide the input area and Category pick list doesn t appear M Compress Day View F M Show Category Column display as much of Day View as possible Show Time Bars Display the bars that show the duration of an event and event conflicts Compress Day View Avoid scrolling and display only the time period with scheduled events Show Category Column Display the category marker between the time and description The color of the category marker indicates which category the event is filed under Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 180 CHAPTER 7 DEET L DITTE ELA 6 Select Month and set any of the Display Options O following Month View options O Show Category List Default View v Agenda Show Category List Display the Day Month category pick list By default the Show Category pick list doesn t appear M Timed Events gory p pp M Untimed Events g M Daily Repeating Events Timed Events Show events that are scheduled for a specific time Untimed Events Show events that are scheduled for a specific date but not a specific time
499. y you just added location you can add a note with more information 3 Select Done 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 546 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Resetting the date and time In most cases you won t need to reset the date and time However you may need to do this if you do a hard reset on your handheld 1 Open Date amp Time Preferences EEE a Go to Applications Location v San Francisco Set Date b Select Prefs 6 Set Time c Select Date amp Time 2 Select the location Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 547 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Palm T X Handheld 3 Set the date a Select the Set Date box b Select the arrows to select the current year c Select the current month d Select the current date Set the time a Select the Set Time box b Select the hour and minute boxes and then select the arrows to change them Set Date Year 4 2006 arrows Jan Feb Mar Apr May M Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec SM TW T F S 1 2 3 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 LCE gt mM c Select AM or PM and then select OK N NOTE If you re using a 24 hour clock format you won t see the AM and PM options Select Done 4 Done 548 CHAPTER 26 Customizing Your Handheld Selecting formats for dates times and numbers Would you rather see the time displayed in a 24 hour format or dates
500. ying Applications View in list format Maintaining Caring for your handheld Common Answers to frequently asked questions about using your handheld and its Questions applications Palm T X Handheld 46 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld In this chapter How can enter information on my handheld Entering information with Graffiti 2 writing Using the onscreen keyboard Entering info from Contacts into another application Editing information Related topics Palm T X Handheld Whether you re scheduling a meeting with your daughter s teacher or adding a new restaurant to your Contacts list you need to get that information into your handheld There are several ways to do this You may find that you prefer one method if you re entering a small amount of information while another works best for large amounts Choose the one that fits your situation Benefits e Quickly enter important information e Choose the method that works best for your situation 47 CHAPTER 4 Entering Information on Your Handheld Tip How can I enter information on my handheld A blinking cursor on your handheld screen indicates where the information you enter will There are several ways to enter information directly on your handheld The most popular methods are using Graffiti 2 writing or using the onscreen keyboard The following are some of the ways to enter information appear
501. ynchronize receive the 8009 error message An application has failed to respond to a HotSync notification WINDOWS ONLY The 8009 error indicates that the Windows registry is corrupt You need to rebuild the HotSync manager registry entries For information on rebuilding the registry entries go to www Palm com support and search the Palm Knowledge Library for error 8009 My files didn t install during synchronization e f files do not install after you synchronize the file type was not recognized On your handheld open the application associated with those files Then synchronize again If the files remain in the Palm Quick Install list on your computer Windows only they are not associated with an application on your handheld and cannot be installed by synchronizing e f you are trying to install files to an expansion card make sure that a card is inserted into your handheld s expansion slot before you synchronize can t add more files to the Quick Install list Make sure the dialog box that confirms where the files will be installed is closed You cannot add more files to the list when the confirmation dialog box is open Palm T X Handheld 616 CHAPTER 29 Common Questions When add a zipped file ZIP to Quick Install some of the files don t appear in the Quick Install list Unzip the file with a file compression utility such as WinZip and then add the unzipped files to Quick Install receiv
502. ynchronizing by dialing in to a network Y Continued Palm T X Handheld 96 Use Network Preferences to set up a service if you have not done so already Check with your system administrator to obtain network service information Palm T X Handheld 2 Prepare your handheld for network synchronization a Go to Applications and select HotSync 8 b Open the menus c Select Modem Sync Prefs in the Options menu d Select Direct to modem and then select OK Select a service a Tap Network b Tap the Service pick list and select the service you use to connect to your corporate network Check with your system administrator if you do not know which service to use Y Continued CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Modem Sync Preferences Jg OB Sto B e Direct to modem Wayne Hoff Last HotSync 9 8 08 9 10 pm using Wi Fi Network v PalmModem Tap Service pick list 97 CHAPTER 5 Moving Info Between Your Handheld and Your Computer Only applications 4 fai hs Enter the phone number Phone Setup 77 are included in a Tap the Enter phone box synchronization Other O Dial prefix 9 applications are not b Enter the phone number and O Disable call waiting 1170 included even if they dialing preferences O Use calling card appear on the Conduit A Deccnscincssnicsins scons bosvosuceccocn
503. you set up a VPN you need to connect to it in order to retrieve email messages from your corporate mail server You may need to connect to the VPN each time you open the VersaMail application to retrieve messages from the server 1 Tap VersaMail in the input area 2 Connect to your VPN a Open the menus b Select Options and then select Connect VPN c Enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN d Select OK 4 Done Palm T X Handheld 310 CHAPTER 16 Sending and Receiving Email Messages Setting up an account IMPORTANT You must have an account with an email provider or a corporate account The VersaMail application works with these accounts to transfer messages to and from your handheld The application is not an email service provider Before you can use the VersaMail application with a given email account you need to set up the account in VersaMail You can do this in one of three ways e On a Windows computer if the email account is already set up on your computer for example if you use Outlook Express on your computer to access your EarthLink account you can transfer the account settings to your handheld in just a few steps e On a Windows computer if this is a new account you can quickly set up the account on your computer and synchronize the information to your handheld e If you are a Mac user you can set up the account directly on your handheld Windows users can also choose to

uk

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents